Alpine CDA-9886 Quick Reference Manual

CDA-9886 MP3 AAC H?) ~~~j

WARNINGIAVERTISSEMENTI ADVERTENCIA 3 CAUTIONIATTENTIONIPRUDENCIA 5 Getting StartedIMise en routelPrimeros pasos 6 Radio 7 CD/MP3IWMAJAAC 8 iPod® (Optional)1 iPod® (en Optional)1 iPod® (opcional) 10 Setting Time/Reglage de 1'heurel Ajuste de la hora 14 InstallationiInstallationiInstalaci6n 16 Connections/Raccordements/Conexiones 18 2 IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of your unit in the space provided below and keep it as a permanent record. SERIAL NUMBER: _ INSTALLATION DATE: _ INSTALLATION TECHNICIAN: _ PLACE OF PURCHASE: _ IMPORTANT Veuillez inscrire Ie numero de serie de votre appareil dans l'espace prevu ci- contre et conservez-le soigneusement dans vos archives. NUMERO DE SERlE: _ DATE D'INSTALLATlON: _ INSTALLATEUR: _ LIEU D'ACHAT: _ IMPORTANTE Anote el numero de serie de la unidad en el espacio proporcionado a continuaci6n y conservelo como registro permanente. NUMERO DE SERlE: _ FECHA DE INSTALACI6N: _ INSTALADOR: _ LUGAR DE ADQUISICI6N: _ , Contents I Contenu Iindice WARNINGIAVERTISSEMENTI ADVERTENCIA 3 CAUTIONIATTENTIONIPRUDENCIA 5 Getting StartedIMise en routelPrimeros pasos 6 Radio 7 CD/MP3IWMAJAAC 8 iPod® (Optional)1 iPod® (en Optional)1 iPod® (opcional) 10 Setting Time/Reglage de 1'heurel Ajuste de la hora 14 InstallationiInstallationiInstalaci6n 16 Connections/Raccordements/Conexiones 18 2 IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of your unit in the space provided below and keep it as a permanent record. SERIAL NUMBER: _ INSTALLATION DATE: _ INSTALLATION TECHNICIAN: _ PLACE OF PURCHASE: _ IMPORTANT Veuillez inscrire Ie numero de serie de votre appareil dans l'espace prevu ci- contre et conservez-le soigneusement dans vos archives. NUMERO DE SERlE: _ DATE D'INSTALLATlON: _ INSTALLATEUR: _ LIEU D'ACHAT: _ IMPORTANTE Anote el numero de serie de la unidad en el espacio proporcionado a continuaci6n y conservelo como registro permanente. NUMERO DE SERlE: _ FECHA DE INSTALACI6N: _ INSTALADOR: _ LUGAR DE ADQUISICI6N: _

Failure to heed them can result in serious injury or death. DO NOT OPERATE ANY FUNCTION THAT TAKES YOUR ATTENTION AWAY FROM SAFELY DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE. Any function that requires your prolonged attention should only be performed after coming to a complete stop. Always stop the vehicle in a safe location before performing these functions. Failure to do so may result in an accident. KEEP THE VOLUME AT ALEVEL WHERE YOU CAN STILL HEAR OUTSIOE NOISES WHILE DRIVING. Excessive volume levels that obscure sounds such as emergency vehicle sirens or road warning signals (train crossings, etc.) can be dangerous and may result in an accident. LISTENING AT LOUD VOLUME LEVELS IN A CAR MAY ALSO CAUSE HEARING DAMAGE. MINIMIZE DISPLAY VIEWING WHilE DRIVING. Viewing the display may distract the driver from looking ahead of the vehicle and cause an accident. DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR ALTER. Doing so may result in an accident, fire or electric shock. USE ONLY IN CARS WITH A12 VOLT NEGATIVE GROUND. (Check with your dealer if you are not sure.) Failure to do so may result in fire, etc. KEEP SMALL OBJECTS SUCH AS BATTERIES OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN. Swallowing them may result in serious injury. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately. USE THE CORRECT AMPERE RATING WHEN REPLACING FUSES. Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock. DO NOT BLOCK VENTS OR RADIATOR PANELS. Doing so may cause heat to build up inside and may result in fire. ~AVERTISSEMENT Ce symbole designe des instructions importantes. Le non-respect de ces instructions peut entrainer de graves blessures, voire la mort. N'ACTIVER AUCUNE FONCTION SUSCEPTIBLE DE DETOURNER VOTRE ATTENTION DE LA CONDUITE DU VEHICULE. Les fonctions requerant une attention prolongee ne doivent etre exploitees qu'1I I'arret complet du vehicule. Toujours arreter Ie vehicule 11 un endroit silr avant d'activer ces fonctions. II y a risque de provoquer un accident. GARDER lE VOLUME it FAIBLE NIVEAU DE MANIERE it POUVOIR ENTENDRE lES BRUITS EXTERIEURS PENDANT LA CONDUITE. Des niveaux de volume excessifs qui couvrent Jes sirenes des ambulances ou les signaux routiers (passages 11 niveau, etc.) peuvent etre dangereux et provoquer un accident. UN NIVEAU DE VOLUME TROP ELEVE AL'INTERIEUR DU VEHICULE PEUT EGALEMENT AVOIR DES EFFETS IRREVERSlBLES SUR VOTRE AUDITION. MINIMISER l'AFFICHAGE EN COURS DE CONDUITE. La visualisation de l'affichage peut distraire Ie conducteur de la conduite du vehicule et, partant, de provoquer un accident. NE PAS DESASSEMBlER NI MODIFIER l'APPAREll. n y a risque d'accident, d'incendie ou de choc electrique. AUTILISER UNIQUEMENT SUR DES VOITURES AMASSE NEGATIVE DE 12 VOLTS. (Verifiez aupres de votre concessionnaire si vous n'en etes pas certain.) II y a risque d'incendie, etc. GARDER lES PETITS OBJETS COMME lES PilES HORS DE PORTEE DES ENFANTS. L'ingestion de tels objets peut entrainer de graves blessures. En cas d'ingestion, consulter immediatement un medecin. UTILISER DES FUSIBlES DE l'AMPERAGE APPROPRIE. II Ya risque d'incendie ou de decharge electrique. NE PAS OBSTRUER lES SORTIES D'AIR NI LES PANNEAUX DU RADIATEUR. Une surchauffe interne peut se produire et provoquer un incendie. 3 ~ADVERTENCIA Este simbolo indica que las instrucciones son importantes. De no tenerse en cuenta, podria ocasionarse heridas graves 0 muerte. NO REALICE NINGUNA OPERACION QUE PUEDA D1STRAER SU ATENCION YCOMPROMETER LA SEGURlOAD DURANTE LA CONDUCClllN DEL VEHicUlO. Las operaciones que requieren su atenci6n durante mas tiempo s610 deben realizarse despues de detener completarnente el vehfculo. Estacione el vehfculo en un lugar seguro antes de realizar dichas operaciones. De 10 contrario, podria ocasionar un accidente. MANTENGA EL VOLUMEN AUN NIVEL QUE NO lE IMPIOA ESCUCHAR LOS SONIOOS DEL EXTERIOR MIENTRAS CONDUCE. Los niveles de volumen demasiado altos que reducen la percepci6n de otros sonidos como las sirenas de emergencia 0 posibles seiiales acusticas de advertencia en carretera (cruces de trenes, etc.) podrian ser peligrosos y provocar un accidente. LOS NIVELES DE VOLUMEN ALTOS EN EL VEHfcULO TAMBIEN PUEDEN DANAR EL SISTEMA AUDITIVO DE LOS PASAJEROS. REDUZCA Al MAXIMO LA VISUALIZACION DE LA PANTALlA MIENTRAS CONDUCE. EI conductor puede distraer su atenci6n de la carretera mientras mira la pantalla y ocasionar un accidente. NO DESMONTE NI ALTERE LA UNlOAD. Si 10 hace, podra ocasionar un accidente, un incendio 0 una descarga electrica. UTILICE LA UNlOAD SOLAMENTE EN VEHicUlOS QUE TENGAN 12 VOlTlOS CON NEGATIVO AMASA. (Consulte a su distribuidor en caso de duda.) De no ser asf, podrfa ocasionar un incendio, etc. MANTENGA LOS OBJETOS PEQUENOS, COMO LAS PILAS, FUERA DEL ALCANCE DE LOS NINOS. La ingestion de estos objetos puede provocar lesiones graves. Si esto ocurre, consulte con un medico inmediatamente. UTILICE El AMPERAJE CORRECTO CUANDO CAMBIE FUSIBLES. De 10 contrario, puede producirse un incendio 0 una descarga electrica. NO OBSTRUYA LOS ORIFICIOS DE VENTILACION 0 LOS PANELES DEL RADIADOR. Si los bloquea. el calor podria acumularse en el interior y producir un incendio. ~WARNING This symbol means important instructions. Failure to heed them can result in serious injury or death. DO NOT OPERATE ANY FUNCTION THAT TAKES YOUR ATTENTION AWAY FROM SAFELY DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE. Any function that requires your prolonged attention should only be performed after coming to a complete stop. Always stop the vehicle in a safe location before performing these functions. Failure to do so may result in an accident. KEEP THE VOLUME AT ALEVEL WHERE YOU CAN STILL HEAR OUTSIOE NOISES WHILE DRIVING. Excessive volume levels that obscure sounds such as emergency vehicle sirens or road warning signals (train crossings, etc.) can be dangerous and may result in an accident. LISTENING AT LOUD VOLUME LEVELS IN A CAR MAY ALSO CAUSE HEARING DAMAGE. MINIMIZE DISPLAY VIEWING WHilE DRIVING. Viewing the display may distract the driver from looking ahead of the vehicle and cause an accident. DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR ALTER. Doing so may result in an accident, fire or electric shock. USE ONLY IN CARS WITH A12 VOLT NEGATIVE GROUND. (Check with your dealer if you are not sure.) Failure to do so may result in fire, etc. KEEP SMALL OBJECTS SUCH AS BATTERIES OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN. Swallowing them may result in serious injury. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately. USE THE CORRECT AMPERE RATING WHEN REPLACING FUSES. Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock. DO NOT BLOCK VENTS OR RADIATOR PANELS. Doing so may cause heat to build up inside and may result in fire. ~AVERTISSEMENT Ce symbole designe des instructions importantes. Le non-respect de ces instructions peut entrainer de graves blessures, voire la mort. N'ACTIVER AUCUNE FONCTION SUSCEPTIBLE DE DETOURNER VOTRE ATTENTION DE LA CONDUITE DU VEHICULE. Les fonctions requerant une attention prolongee ne doivent etre exploitees qu'1I I'arret complet du vehicule. Toujours arreter Ie vehicule 11 un endroit silr avant d'activer ces fonctions. II y a risque de provoquer un accident. GARDER lE VOLUME it FAIBLE NIVEAU DE MANIERE it POUVOIR ENTENDRE lES BRUITS EXTERIEURS PENDANT LA CONDUITE. Des niveaux de volume excessifs qui couvrent Jes sirenes des ambulances ou les signaux routiers (passages 11 niveau, etc.) peuvent etre dangereux et provoquer un accident. UN NIVEAU DE VOLUME TROP ELEVE AL'INTERIEUR DU VEHICULE PEUT EGALEMENT AVOIR DES EFFETS IRREVERSlBLES SUR VOTRE AUDITION. MINIMISER l'AFFICHAGE EN COURS DE CONDUITE. La visualisation de l'affichage peut distraire Ie conducteur de la conduite du vehicule et, partant, de provoquer un accident. NE PAS DESASSEMBlER NI MODIFIER l'APPAREll. n y a risque d'accident, d'incendie ou de choc electrique. AUTILISER UNIQUEMENT SUR DES VOITURES AMASSE NEGATIVE DE 12 VOLTS. (Verifiez aupres de votre concessionnaire si vous n'en etes pas certain.) II y a risque d'incendie, etc. GARDER lES PETITS OBJETS COMME lES PilES HORS DE PORTEE DES ENFANTS. L'ingestion de tels objets peut entrainer de graves blessures. En cas d'ingestion, consulter immediatement un medecin. UTILISER DES FUSIBlES DE l'AMPERAGE APPROPRIE. II Ya risque d'incendie ou de decharge electrique. NE PAS OBSTRUER lES SORTIES D'AIR NI LES PANNEAUX DU RADIATEUR. Une surchauffe interne peut se produire et provoquer un incendie. 3 ~ADVERTENCIA Este simbolo indica que las instrucciones son importantes. De no tenerse en cuenta, podria ocasionarse heridas graves 0 muerte. NO REALICE NINGUNA OPERACION QUE PUEDA D1STRAER SU ATENCION YCOMPROMETER LA SEGURlOAD DURANTE LA CONDUCClllN DEL VEHicUlO. Las operaciones que requieren su atenci6n durante mas tiempo s610 deben realizarse despues de detener completarnente el vehfculo. Estacione el vehfculo en un lugar seguro antes de realizar dichas operaciones. De 10 contrario, podria ocasionar un accidente. MANTENGA EL VOLUMEN AUN NIVEL QUE NO lE IMPIOA ESCUCHAR LOS SONIOOS DEL EXTERIOR MIENTRAS CONDUCE. Los niveles de volumen demasiado altos que reducen la percepci6n de otros sonidos como las sirenas de emergencia 0 posibles seiiales acusticas de advertencia en carretera (cruces de trenes, etc.) podrian ser peligrosos y provocar un accidente. LOS NIVELES DE VOLUMEN ALTOS EN EL VEHfcULO TAMBIEN PUEDEN DANAR EL SISTEMA AUDITIVO DE LOS PASAJEROS. REDUZCA Al MAXIMO LA VISUALIZACION DE LA PANTALlA MIENTRAS CONDUCE. EI conductor puede distraer su atenci6n de la carretera mientras mira la pantalla y ocasionar un accidente. NO DESMONTE NI ALTERE LA UNlOAD. Si 10 hace, podra ocasionar un accidente, un incendio 0 una descarga electrica. UTILICE LA UNlOAD SOLAMENTE EN VEHicUlOS QUE TENGAN 12 VOlTlOS CON NEGATIVO AMASA. (Consulte a su distribuidor en caso de duda.) De no ser asf, podrfa ocasionar un incendio, etc. MANTENGA LOS OBJETOS PEQUENOS, COMO LAS PILAS, FUERA DEL ALCANCE DE LOS NINOS. La ingestion de estos objetos puede provocar lesiones graves. Si esto ocurre, consulte con un medico inmediatamente. UTILICE El AMPERAJE CORRECTO CUANDO CAMBIE FUSIBLES. De 10 contrario, puede producirse un incendio 0 una descarga electrica. NO OBSTRUYA LOS ORIFICIOS DE VENTILACION 0 LOS PANELES DEL RADIADOR. Si los bloquea. el calor podria acumularse en el interior y producir un incendio.

Use for other than its designed application may result in fire, electric shock or other injury. DO NOT PLACE HANDS, FINGERS OR FOREIGN OBJECTS IN INSERTION SLOTS OR GAPS, Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to the product. MAKE THE CORRECT CONNECTIONS. Failure to make the proper connections may result in fire or product damage. BEFORE WIRING, DISCONNECT THE CABLE FROM THE NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAl. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or injury due to electrical shorts. DO NOT ALLOW CABLES TO BECOME ENTANGLED IN SURROUNDING OBJECTS, Arrange wiring and cables in compliance with the manual to prevent obstructions when driving. Cables or wiring that obstruct or hang up on places such as the steering wheel, gear lever, brake pedals, etc. can be extremely hazardous. DO NOT SPLICE INTO ELECTRICAL CABLES. Never cut away cable insulation to supply power to other equipment. Doing so will exceed the current carrying capacity of the wire and result in fire or electric shock. DO NOT DAMAGE PIPE OR WIRING WHEN DRILLING HOLES. When drilling holes in the chassis for installation, take precautions so as not to contact, damage or obstruct pipes, fuel lines, tanks or electrical wiring. Failure to take such precautions may result in fire. DO NOT USE BOLTS OR NUTS IN THE BRAKE OR STEERING SYSTEMS TO MAKE GROUND CONNECTIONS. Bolts or nuts used for the brake or steering systems (or any other safety-related system). or tanks should NEVER be used for installations or ground connections. Using such pans could disable control of the vehicle and cause fire etc. DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WHICH MIGHT HINDER VEHICLE OPERATION, SUCH AS THE STEERING WHEEL OR GEARSHIFT. Doing so may obstruct forward vision or hamper movement etc. and results in serious accident. UTllISER CET APPAREIL POUR DES APPLICATIONS MOBILES DE 12V. Toute utilisation autre que I'application designee comporte un risque d'incendie, de choc electrique ou de blessure. NE PAS INTRODUIRE LES MAINS, LES DOIGTS NI DE CORPS ETRANGERS DANS LES FENTES ET LES INTERSTICES. II y a risque de blessures ou de dommages 11 l'appareil. EFFECTUER CORRECTEMENT LES CONNEXIONS. II Ya risque de blessures ou de dommages 11 l'appareil. AVANT TOUTE CONNEXION. DEBRANCHER LE CABLE DE LA BORNE NEGATIVE DE LA BATTERIE. II y a risque de choc electrique ou de blessure par courts-circuits. NE PAS COINCER LES CABLES AVEC DES OBJETS VOISINS. Positionner les cables conformement au manuel de maniere 11 eviter tOUle obstruction en cours de conduite. Les cables qui obstruent ou depassent 11 des endroits tels que Ie volant, Ie levier de changement de vitesses, la pedale de frein, etc., peuvent s'averer extremement dangereux. NE PAS DENUDER LES CABLES ELECTRIQUES. Ne jamais enlever la gaine isolante pour alimenter un autre appareil. II y a risque de depassement de la capacite de courant et, panant, d'incendie ou de choc electrique. NE PAS ENDOMMAGER DE CONDUITES NI DE CABLES LORS DU FORAGE DES TROUS. Lors du forage de trous dans Ie chassis en vue de l'installation, veiller 11 ne pas entrer en contact, endommager ni obstruer de conduites, de tuyaux 11 carburant ou de fils electriques. Le non-respect de cette precaution peut entrainer un incendie. NE PAS UTllISER DES ECROUS NI DES BOULONS DU CIRCUIT DE FREINAGE OU DE DIRECTION POUR LES CONNEXIONS DE MASSE. Les boulons et les ecrous utilises pour les circuits de freinage et de direction (ou de tout autre systeme de securite) ou les reservoirs ne peuvent JAMAIS etre utilises pour I'installation ou la liaison 11 la masse. L'utilisation de ces organes peut desactiver Ie systeme de controle du vehicule et causer un incendie, etc. NE PAS INSTALLER ADES ENDROITS SUSCEPTIBLES D'ENTRAVER LA CONDUITE DU VEHICULE, COMME LE VOLANT OU LE LEVIER DE VlTESSES. La vue veTS I'avant pourrait etre obstruee ou les mouvements genes, etc., et provoquer un accident grave. 4 UTILICE ESTE PRODUCTO CON APLICACIONES MOVILES DE 12 V. Si se emplea para otra aplicacion distinta de la prevista, podrfa producirse un incendio, una descarga electrica u otras lesiones. NO INTRODUZCA LAS MANOS, LOS DEDOS NI OTROS OBJETOS EXTRANOS EN LAS RANURAS DE INSERCION 0 EN LAS ABERTURAS, Si 10 hiciera, podria sufrir heridas u ocasionar daiios al equipo. REALICE LAS CONEXIONES CORRECTAMENTE. Una conexion incorrecta puede producir un incendio 0 dailar el equipo. ANTES DE EFECTUAR EL CABLEADO. DESCONECTE El CABLE DEL TERMINAL NEGATIVO DE LA BATERiA. De no hacerlo asf, podria ocasionar una descarga electrica 0 heridas debido a cortocircuitos electricos. IMPIDA QUE LOS CABLES SE ENREDEN CON LOS OBJETOS SITUADOS ALREDEDOR. Disponga la instalacion eJectrica y los cables conforme a 10 descrito en el manual para evitar obstaculos durante la conduccion. Los cables que obstaculizan la conduccion 0 que cuelgan de panes del vehfculo como el volante de direccion, la palanca de cambios, los pedales de freno, etc., se consideran extremadamente peligrosos. NO EMPALME CABLES ELECTRICOS. Nunca corte el aislamiento de un cable para suministrar energfa a otro equipo. Esto hace que la capacidad portadora del cable se supere y puede ser la causa de incendios 0 descargas electricas. EVITE DANAR LOS TUBOS YEl CABLEADO CUANDO TALADRE AGUJEROS. Si taladra agujeros en el chasis durante la instalacion, tome las precauciones necesarias para no rozar, daiiar u obstruir los tubos, las tuberias de combustible, los depositos 0 el cableado electrico. De 10 contrario, podrfa provocar un incendio. NO UTllICE TUERCAS 0 PERNOS EN EL SISTEMA DE FRENOS 0 DE DIRECCION PARA REALIZAR LAS CONEXIONES AMASA. Los pemos 0 tuercas empleados en los sistemas de freno 0 de direccion (0 en cualquier otro sistema relacionado con la seguridad del vehfculo), o los depositos, NUNCA deben utilizarse para instalaciones de cableado 0 conexion amasa. Si utiliza tales panes podra incapacitar el control del vehfculo y provocar un incendio, etc. NO INSTALE EL EQUIPO EN ll~GARES QUE PUEDAN INTERFERIR CON LA OPERACION DEL VEHICULO, COMO EL VOLANTE DE DIRECCION 0 LA CAJA DE CAMBIOS DE VELOCIDAD. Esto podrfa obstaculizar la visibilidad y dificultar el movimiento, etc. y provocar accidentes graves. USE THIS PRODUCT FOR MOBILE 12V APPLICATIONS. Use for other than its designed application may result in fire, electric shock or other injury. DO NOT PLACE HANDS, FINGERS OR FOREIGN OBJECTS IN INSERTION SLOTS OR GAPS, Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to the product. MAKE THE CORRECT CONNECTIONS. Failure to make the proper connections may result in fire or product damage. BEFORE WIRING, DISCONNECT THE CABLE FROM THE NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAl. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or injury due to electrical shorts. DO NOT ALLOW CABLES TO BECOME ENTANGLED IN SURROUNDING OBJECTS, Arrange wiring and cables in compliance with the manual to prevent obstructions when driving. Cables or wiring that obstruct or hang up on places such as the steering wheel, gear lever, brake pedals, etc. can be extremely hazardous. DO NOT SPLICE INTO ELECTRICAL CABLES. Never cut away cable insulation to supply power to other equipment. Doing so will exceed the current carrying capacity of the wire and result in fire or electric shock. DO NOT DAMAGE PIPE OR WIRING WHEN DRILLING HOLES. When drilling holes in the chassis for installation, take precautions so as not to contact, damage or obstruct pipes, fuel lines, tanks or electrical wiring. Failure to take such precautions may result in fire. DO NOT USE BOLTS OR NUTS IN THE BRAKE OR STEERING SYSTEMS TO MAKE GROUND CONNECTIONS. Bolts or nuts used for the brake or steering systems (or any other safety-related system). or tanks should NEVER be used for installations or ground connections. Using such pans could disable control of the vehicle and cause fire etc. DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WHICH MIGHT HINDER VEHICLE OPERATION, SUCH AS THE STEERING WHEEL OR GEARSHIFT. Doing so may obstruct forward vision or hamper movement etc. and results in serious accident. UTllISER CET APPAREIL POUR DES APPLICATIONS MOBILES DE 12V. Toute utilisation autre que I'application designee comporte un risque d'incendie, de choc electrique ou de blessure. NE PAS INTRODUIRE LES MAINS, LES DOIGTS NI DE CORPS ETRANGERS DANS LES FENTES ET LES INTERSTICES. II y a risque de blessures ou de dommages 11 l'appareil. EFFECTUER CORRECTEMENT LES CONNEXIONS. II Ya risque de blessures ou de dommages 11 l'appareil. AVANT TOUTE CONNEXION. DEBRANCHER LE CABLE DE LA BORNE NEGATIVE DE LA BATTERIE. II y a risque de choc electrique ou de blessure par courts-circuits. NE PAS COINCER LES CABLES AVEC DES OBJETS VOISINS. Positionner les cables conformement au manuel de maniere 11 eviter tOUle obstruction en cours de conduite. Les cables qui obstruent ou depassent 11 des endroits tels que Ie volant, Ie levier de changement de vitesses, la pedale de frein, etc., peuvent s'averer extremement dangereux. NE PAS DENUDER LES CABLES ELECTRIQUES. Ne jamais enlever la gaine isolante pour alimenter un autre appareil. II y a risque de depassement de la capacite de courant et, panant, d'incendie ou de choc electrique. NE PAS ENDOMMAGER DE CONDUITES NI DE CABLES LORS DU FORAGE DES TROUS. Lors du forage de trous dans Ie chassis en vue de l'installation, veiller 11 ne pas entrer en contact, endommager ni obstruer de conduites, de tuyaux 11 carburant ou de fils electriques. Le non-respect de cette precaution peut entrainer un incendie. NE PAS UTllISER DES ECROUS NI DES BOULONS DU CIRCUIT DE FREINAGE OU DE DIRECTION POUR LES CONNEXIONS DE MASSE. Les boulons et les ecrous utilises pour les circuits de freinage et de direction (ou de tout autre systeme de securite) ou les reservoirs ne peuvent JAMAIS etre utilises pour I'installation ou la liaison 11 la masse. L'utilisation de ces organes peut desactiver Ie systeme de controle du vehicule et causer un incendie, etc. NE PAS INSTALLER ADES ENDROITS SUSCEPTIBLES D'ENTRAVER LA CONDUITE DU VEHICULE, COMME LE VOLANT OU LE LEVIER DE VlTESSES. La vue veTS I'avant pourrait etre obstruee ou les mouvements genes, etc., et provoquer un accident grave. 4 UTILICE ESTE PRODUCTO CON APLICACIONES MOVILES DE 12 V. Si se emplea para otra aplicacion distinta de la prevista, podrfa producirse un incendio, una descarga electrica u otras lesiones. NO INTRODUZCA LAS MANOS, LOS DEDOS NI OTROS OBJETOS EXTRANOS EN LAS RANURAS DE INSERCION 0 EN LAS ABERTURAS, Si 10 hiciera, podria sufrir heridas u ocasionar daiios al equipo. REALICE LAS CONEXIONES CORRECTAMENTE. Una conexion incorrecta puede producir un incendio 0 dailar el equipo. ANTES DE EFECTUAR EL CABLEADO. DESCONECTE El CABLE DEL TERMINAL NEGATIVO DE LA BATERiA. De no hacerlo asf, podria ocasionar una descarga electrica 0 heridas debido a cortocircuitos electricos. IMPIDA QUE LOS CABLES SE ENREDEN CON LOS OBJETOS SITUADOS ALREDEDOR. Disponga la instalacion eJectrica y los cables conforme a 10 descrito en el manual para evitar obstaculos durante la conduccion. Los cables que obstaculizan la conduccion 0 que cuelgan de panes del vehfculo como el volante de direccion, la palanca de cambios, los pedales de freno, etc., se consideran extremadamente peligrosos. NO EMPALME CABLES ELECTRICOS. Nunca corte el aislamiento de un cable para suministrar energfa a otro equipo. Esto hace que la capacidad portadora del cable se supere y puede ser la causa de incendios 0 descargas electricas. EVITE DANAR LOS TUBOS YEl CABLEADO CUANDO TALADRE AGUJEROS. Si taladra agujeros en el chasis durante la instalacion, tome las precauciones necesarias para no rozar, daiiar u obstruir los tubos, las tuberias de combustible, los depositos 0 el cableado electrico. De 10 contrario, podrfa provocar un incendio. NO UTllICE TUERCAS 0 PERNOS EN EL SISTEMA DE FRENOS 0 DE DIRECCION PARA REALIZAR LAS CONEXIONES AMASA. Los pemos 0 tuercas empleados en los sistemas de freno 0 de direccion (0 en cualquier otro sistema relacionado con la seguridad del vehfculo), o los depositos, NUNCA deben utilizarse para instalaciones de cableado 0 conexion amasa. Si utiliza tales panes podra incapacitar el control del vehfculo y provocar un incendio, etc. NO INSTALE EL EQUIPO EN ll~GARES QUE PUEDAN INTERFERIR CON LA OPERACION DEL VEHICULO, COMO EL VOLANTE DE DIRECCION 0 LA CAJA DE CAMBIOS DE VELOCIDAD. Esto podrfa obstaculizar la visibilidad y dificultar el movimiento, etc. y provocar accidentes graves.

Failure to heed them can result in injury or material property damage. HALT USE IMMEDIATELY IF APROBLEM APPEARS. Failure to do so may cause personal injury or damage to the product. Return it to your authorized Alpine dealer or the nearest Alpine Service Center for repairing. DO NOT MIX NEW BATTERIES WITH OLD BATTERIES, INSERT WITH THE CORRECT BATTERY POLARITY. When inserting the batteries, be sure to observe proper polarity (+ and -) as instructed. Rupture or chemical leakage from the battery may cause fire or personal injury. HAVE THE WIRING AND INSTALLATION DONE BY EXPERTS. The wiring and installation of this unit requires special technical skill and experience. To ensure safety, always contact the dealer where you purchased this product to have the work done. USE SPECIFIED ACCESSORY PARTS AND INSTALL THEM SECURELY. Be sure to use only the specified accessory parts. Use of other than designated parts may damage this unit internally or may not securely install the unit in place. This may cause parts to become loose resulting in hazards or product failure. ARRANGE THE WIRING SO IT IS NOT CRIMPED OR PINCHED BY ASHARP METAL EDGE. Route the cables and wiring away from moving parts (like the seat rails) or sharp or pointed edges. This will prevent crimping and damage to the wiring. If wiring passes through a hole in metal, use a rubber grommet to prevent the wire's insulation from being cut by the metal edge of the hole. DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WITH HIGH MOISTURE OR DUST. Avoid installing the unit in locations with high incidence of moisture or dust. Moisture or dust that penetrates into this unit may result in product failure. ~ATTENTION Ce symbole designe des instructions importantes. Le non-respect de ces instructions peut entrainer des blessures ou des degats materiels. INTERROMPRE TOUTE UTILISATION EN CAS DE PROBLEME. Le non-respect de cette precaution peut entrainer des blessures ou endommager l'appareiJ. Retourner l'appareil aupres du distributeur Alpine agree ou un centre de service apres-vente Alpine en vue de la reparation. NE PAS UTiLISER EN MEME TEMPS DES PILES USEES ET DES PILES NEUVES. RESPECTEZ AUSSILA POLARITE DES PILES. Quand vous inserez les piles, veillez 11 respecter la polarite (+) et (-), comme indique. Une rupture ou une fuite des piles peuvent causer un incendie ou des blessures corporelles. FAIRE INSTALLER LE CABLAGE ET L'APPAREIL PAR DES EXPERTS. Le cablage et l'installation de cet appareil requiert des competences techniques et de l'experience. Pour garantir la securite, faire proceder 11 "installation de cet appareil par Ie distributeur qui vous I'a vendu. UTILISER LES ACCESSOIRES SPECIFIES ET LES INSTALLER CORRECTEMENT, Utiliser uniquement les accessoires specifies. L'utilisation d'autres composants que les composants specifies peut causer des dommages . internes 11 cet appareil ou son installation risque de ne pas etre effectuee correctement. Les pieces utilisees risquent de se desserrer et de provoquer des dommages ou une defaillance de l'appareil. FAIRE CHEMINER LE CABLAGE DE MANIERE ANE PAS LE COINCER CONTRE UNE ARETE METALLIQUE. Faire cheminer les cables 11 l'ecart des pieces mobiles (comme les rails d'un siege) et des aretes acerees ou pointues. Cela evitera ainsi de coincer et d'endommager les cables. Si un cable passe dans un orifice metallique, utiliser un passe-cloison en caoutchouc pour eviter que la gaine isolante du cable ne soit endommagee par Ie rebord metalIique de l'orifice. NE PAS INSTALLER ADES ENDROITS TRES HUMIOES OU POUSSIEREUX. Eviter d'installer l'appareil 11 des endroits soumis 11 une forte humidite ou 11 de la poussiere en exces. La penetration d'humidite ou de poussiere 11 l'interieur de cet appareil risque de provoquer une defaillance. 5 ~PRUDENCIA Este simbolo indica que las instrucciones son importantes. De no tenerse en cuenta, podria ocasionarse heridas graves 0 daiios materiales. DEJE DE USAR LA UNlOAD INMEDIATAMENTE SI APARECE ALGUN PROBLEMA. Su uso en estas condiciones podrfa ocasionar lesiones personales 0 dalloS al producto. Lleve la unidad a un distribuidor Alpine autorizado o aI Centro de servicio Alpine mas pr6ximo para repararla. NO MEZCLE PILAS NUEVAS CON VIEJAS. INSERTELAS CON LAS POLARIOADES CORRECTAMENTE ORIENTADAS, Cuando las inserte en su compartimento, cerci6rese de colocarlas con las polaridades (+ y -) como se indica. La rotura 0 la fuga de sustancias quimicas de la baterfa podra ocasionar un incendio 0 heridas personales. CONFIE EL CABLEADO YLA INSTALAClllN APROFESIONALES, El cableado y la instalaci6n de este equipo requieren una competencia y experiencia tecnica confirmada. Para garantizar la seguridad, p6ngase siempre en contacto con el distribuidor al que ha comprado el equipo para confiarle estas tareas. UTILICE LOS ACCESORIOS ESPECIFICADOS EINSTALELOS CORRECTAMENTE. Asegurese de utilizar los accesorios especificados solamente. La utilizaci6n de otras piezas no designadas puede ser la causa de dalloS en el interior de la unidad 0 de una instalaci6n incorrecta. Las piezas pueden aflojarse, 10 que, ademas de ser peligroso, puede provocar averfas. DlSPONGA EL CABLEADO DE FORMA QUE LOS CABLES NO SE DOBLEN, NO SE CONTRAIGAN NI ROCEN UN BORDE METALICO AFILADO. Aleje los cables y el cableado de piezas m6viles (como los railes de los asientos) 0 de hordes puntiagudos 0 afilados. De esta forma evitara dobleces y daiios en el cableado. Si los cables se introducen por un orificio de metal, utilice una arandela de goma para evitar que el borde metalico del orificio corte eJ aislamiento del cable. NO INSTALE LA UNlOAD EN LUGARES MUY HUMEDOS 0 LLENOS DE POLVO. Evite instalar la unidad en lugares con altos indices de humedad 0 polvo. Si entra polvo 0 humedad, el equipo puede averiarse. ~CAUTION This symbol means important instructions. Failure to heed them can result in injury or material property damage. HALT USE IMMEDIATELY IF APROBLEM APPEARS. Failure to do so may cause personal injury or damage to the product. Return it to your authorized Alpine dealer or the nearest Alpine Service Center for repairing. DO NOT MIX NEW BATTERIES WITH OLD BATTERIES, INSERT WITH THE CORRECT BATTERY POLARITY. When inserting the batteries, be sure to observe proper polarity (+ and -) as instructed. Rupture or chemical leakage from the battery may cause fire or personal injury. HAVE THE WIRING AND INSTALLATION DONE BY EXPERTS. The wiring and installation of this unit requires special technical skill and experience. To ensure safety, always contact the dealer where you purchased this product to have the work done. USE SPECIFIED ACCESSORY PARTS AND INSTALL THEM SECURELY. Be sure to use only the specified accessory parts. Use of other than designated parts may damage this unit internally or may not securely install the unit in place. This may cause parts to become loose resulting in hazards or product failure. ARRANGE THE WIRING SO IT IS NOT CRIMPED OR PINCHED BY ASHARP METAL EDGE. Route the cables and wiring away from moving parts (like the seat rails) or sharp or pointed edges. This will prevent crimping and damage to the wiring. If wiring passes through a hole in metal, use a rubber grommet to prevent the wire's insulation from being cut by the metal edge of the hole. DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WITH HIGH MOISTURE OR DUST. Avoid installing the unit in locations with high incidence of moisture or dust. Moisture or dust that penetrates into this unit may result in product failure. ~ATTENTION Ce symbole designe des instructions importantes. Le non-respect de ces instructions peut entrainer des blessures ou des degats materiels. INTERROMPRE TOUTE UTILISATION EN CAS DE PROBLEME. Le non-respect de cette precaution peut entrainer des blessures ou endommager l'appareiJ. Retourner l'appareil aupres du distributeur Alpine agree ou un centre de service apres-vente Alpine en vue de la reparation. NE PAS UTiLISER EN MEME TEMPS DES PILES USEES ET DES PILES NEUVES. RESPECTEZ AUSSILA POLARITE DES PILES. Quand vous inserez les piles, veillez 11 respecter la polarite (+) et (-), comme indique. Une rupture ou une fuite des piles peuvent causer un incendie ou des blessures corporelles. FAIRE INSTALLER LE CABLAGE ET L'APPAREIL PAR DES EXPERTS. Le cablage et l'installation de cet appareil requiert des competences techniques et de l'experience. Pour garantir la securite, faire proceder 11 "installation de cet appareil par Ie distributeur qui vous I'a vendu. UTILISER LES ACCESSOIRES SPECIFIES ET LES INSTALLER CORRECTEMENT, Utiliser uniquement les accessoires specifies. L'utilisation d'autres composants que les composants specifies peut causer des dommages . internes 11 cet appareil ou son installation risque de ne pas etre effectuee correctement. Les pieces utilisees risquent de se desserrer et de provoquer des dommages ou une defaillance de l'appareil. FAIRE CHEMINER LE CABLAGE DE MANIERE ANE PAS LE COINCER CONTRE UNE ARETE METALLIQUE. Faire cheminer les cables 11 l'ecart des pieces mobiles (comme les rails d'un siege) et des aretes acerees ou pointues. Cela evitera ainsi de coincer et d'endommager les cables. Si un cable passe dans un orifice metallique, utiliser un passe-cloison en caoutchouc pour eviter que la gaine isolante du cable ne soit endommagee par Ie rebord metalIique de l'orifice. NE PAS INSTALLER ADES ENDROITS TRES HUMIOES OU POUSSIEREUX. Eviter d'installer l'appareil 11 des endroits soumis 11 une forte humidite ou 11 de la poussiere en exces. La penetration d'humidite ou de poussiere 11 l'interieur de cet appareil risque de provoquer une defaillance. 5 ~PRUDENCIA Este simbolo indica que las instrucciones son importantes. De no tenerse en cuenta, podria ocasionarse heridas graves 0 daiios materiales. DEJE DE USAR LA UNlOAD INMEDIATAMENTE SI APARECE ALGUN PROBLEMA. Su uso en estas condiciones podrfa ocasionar lesiones personales 0 dalloS al producto. Lleve la unidad a un distribuidor Alpine autorizado o aI Centro de servicio Alpine mas pr6ximo para repararla. NO MEZCLE PILAS NUEVAS CON VIEJAS. INSERTELAS CON LAS POLARIOADES CORRECTAMENTE ORIENTADAS, Cuando las inserte en su compartimento, cerci6rese de colocarlas con las polaridades (+ y -) como se indica. La rotura 0 la fuga de sustancias quimicas de la baterfa podra ocasionar un incendio 0 heridas personales. CONFIE EL CABLEADO YLA INSTALAClllN APROFESIONALES, El cableado y la instalaci6n de este equipo requieren una competencia y experiencia tecnica confirmada. Para garantizar la seguridad, p6ngase siempre en contacto con el distribuidor al que ha comprado el equipo para confiarle estas tareas. UTILICE LOS ACCESORIOS ESPECIFICADOS EINSTALELOS CORRECTAMENTE. Asegurese de utilizar los accesorios especificados solamente. La utilizaci6n de otras piezas no designadas puede ser la causa de dalloS en el interior de la unidad 0 de una instalaci6n incorrecta. Las piezas pueden aflojarse, 10 que, ademas de ser peligroso, puede provocar averfas. DlSPONGA EL CABLEADO DE FORMA QUE LOS CABLES NO SE DOBLEN, NO SE CONTRAIGAN NI ROCEN UN BORDE METALICO AFILADO. Aleje los cables y el cableado de piezas m6viles (como los railes de los asientos) 0 de hordes puntiagudos 0 afilados. De esta forma evitara dobleces y daiios en el cableado. Si los cables se introducen por un orificio de metal, utilice una arandela de goma para evitar que el borde metalico del orificio corte eJ aislamiento del cable. NO INSTALE LA UNlOAD EN LUGARES MUY HUMEDOS 0 LLENOS DE POLVO. Evite instalar la unidad en lugares con altos indices de humedad 0 polvo. Si entra polvo 0 humedad, el equipo puede averiarse.

CDA-98861CDA-9884 English Franrais Espaiiol Turning Power On Mise sous tension Encendido de la unidad Press any button (except VIEW of Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche (sauf Pulse cualquier bot6n (excepto VIEW en el CDA-9884) to turn power on. sur la touche VIEW du CDA-9884) pour modelo CDA-9884) para encender la • mettre I'appareil sous tension. alimentaci6n. Press and hold SOURCEJ for at least 2 Maintenez la touche SOURCEJ Mantenga pulsado SOURCEJ durante, seconds to turn off the unit. enfoncee pendant 2 secondes au moins al menos, 2 segundos para apagar la pour mettre I'appareil hors tension. unidad. Changing the Source Changement de source Cambio de la fuente • TUNER ~ DISC ~ USB *1 ~ IPod ~ ~ TUNER ~ DISC ~ USB *1 ~ iPod ~ ~ TUNER ~ DISC ~ USB*] ~ IPod~ ~ TUNER TUNER TUNER *1 CDA-9886 only. *1 (CDA-9886 uniquement) *] (Unicamente en el modelo CDA-9886) *2 Only when the iPod is connected. ~ Uniquement quand l'iPod est raccordi. ~ Unicamente cuando el iPod estti conectado. • Adjusting Volume Reglage du volume Ajuste del volumen • • • ~ Displaying the Text Affichage du texte Visualizaci6n de texto The display will change every time the L'affichage change chaque fois que vous EI visualizador cambiar;~ cada vez que button is pressed. appuyez sur cette touche. presione el bot6n. OttiTE MUTE ON MUTE ON MUTE ON MUTE OFF MUTE OFF MUTE OFF 6 Getting Started/Mise en route/Primeros pasos CDA-98861CDA-9884 English Franrais Espaiiol Turning Power On Mise sous tension Encendido de la unidad Press any button (except VIEW of Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche (sauf Pulse cualquier bot6n (excepto VIEW en el CDA-9884) to turn power on. sur la touche VIEW du CDA-9884) pour modelo CDA-9884) para encender la • mettre I'appareil sous tension. alimentaci6n. Press and hold SOURCEJ for at least 2 Maintenez la touche SOURCEJ Mantenga pulsado SOURCEJ durante, seconds to turn off the unit. enfoncee pendant 2 secondes au moins al menos, 2 segundos para apagar la pour mettre I'appareil hors tension. unidad. Changing the Source Changement de source Cambio de la fuente • TUNER ~ DISC ~ USB *1 ~ IPod ~ ~ TUNER ~ DISC ~ USB *1 ~ iPod ~ ~ TUNER ~ DISC ~ USB*] ~ IPod~ ~ TUNER TUNER TUNER *1 CDA-9886 only. *1 (CDA-9886 uniquement) *] (Unicamente en el modelo CDA-9886) *2 Only when the iPod is connected. ~ Uniquement quand l'iPod est raccordi. ~ Unicamente cuando el iPod estti conectado. • Adjusting Volume Reglage du volume Ajuste del volumen • • • ~ Displaying the Text Affichage du texte Visualizaci6n de texto The display will change every time the L'affichage change chaque fois que vous EI visualizador cambiar;~ cada vez que button is pressed. appuyez sur cette touche. presione el bot6n. OttiTE MUTE ON MUTE ON MUTE ON MUTE OFF MUTE OFF MUTE OFF 6

Select the TUNER mode. Changing the Band F1(FM1) ~ F2(FM2) ~ AM ~ F1(FM1) Presetting Stations Automatically Press and hold for at least 2 seconds. The tuner will automatically seek and store 6 strong stations in the selected band. Tuning to Preset Stations Rappel du mode TUNER Selectionnez Ie mode TUNER. Changement de frequence F1(FM1) ~ F2(FM2) ~ AM ~ F1(FM1) Prereglage automatique des stations Maintenez cette touche enfoncee pendant au moins 2 secondes. Le tuner recherche et memorise automatiquement les 6 stations les plus puissantes sur la gamme selectionnee. Accord d'une station prereglee 7 Espaiiol Invocaci6n del modo TUNER Seleccione el modo TUNER. Cambio de la banda F1(FM1) ~ F2(FM2) ~ AM ~ F1(FM1) Almacenamiento automatico de emisoras Pulse y mantenga presionado durante, al menos, 2 segundos. EI sintonizador buscara y almacenara automaticamente 6 emisoras de serial intensa en la banda seleccionada. Sintonia de emisoras memorizadas Radio CDA-9886/CDA-9884 .~--------------_._---- ---------_ .. ---~-_._._- _.- , - -- ----, ._~._-- .- . _._-- •• ----- English Recalling the TUNER Mode Select the TUNER mode. Changing the Band F1(FM1) ~ F2(FM2) ~ AM ~ F1(FM1) Presetting Stations Automatically Press and hold for at least 2 seconds. The tuner will automatically seek and store 6 strong stations in the selected band. Tuning to Preset Stations Rappel du mode TUNER Selectionnez Ie mode TUNER. Changement de frequence F1(FM1) ~ F2(FM2) ~ AM ~ F1(FM1) Prereglage automatique des stations Maintenez cette touche enfoncee pendant au moins 2 secondes. Le tuner recherche et memorise automatiquement les 6 stations les plus puissantes sur la gamme selectionnee. Accord d'une station prereglee 7 Espaiiol Invocaci6n del modo TUNER Seleccione el modo TUNER. Cambio de la banda F1(FM1) ~ F2(FM2) ~ AM ~ F1(FM1) Almacenamiento automatico de emisoras Pulse y mantenga presionado durante, al menos, 2 segundos. EI sintonizador buscara y almacenara automaticamente 6 emisoras de serial intensa en la banda seleccionada. Sintonia de emisoras memorizadas

memory with the same controls and modes as playback of CDs containing MP3No/MNMC. (CDA-9886 Only) / Une cle memoire USB peut etre connectee au CDA-9886. Cet appareil peut lire des fichiers de la memoire USB en utilisant les memes commandes et les memes modes que s'il s'agissait de la lecture de CD contenant des fichiers MP3No/MNMC. (CDA-9886 uniquement) / Es posible conectar Un dispositivo de memoria USB a un CDA-9886. Esta unidad permite reproducir archivos almacenados en una memoria USB con los mismos modos y controles que los utilizados en la reproducion de discos CD que contengan archivos en los formatos MP3/ WMNAAC. (Unicamente en el modelo CDA-9886) English Franfais Espaiiol ,. Pause and Playback Pause et lecture Pausa y reproduccion Selecting the desired song Selection du morceau de votre Seleccion de la cancion •• Press and release the ~ or ~ to choix deseada skip to the beginning of the current song or Appuyez sur la touche ~ ou ~ , Pulse y suelte ~ 0 ~ para omitir el the next song. puis relachez-Ia pour aller au debut du principio de la cancion actual 0 de la morceau actuel ou du morceau precedent. siguiente. Press and hold ~ or ~ to fast Maintenez la touche ~ ou ~ Pulse y mantenga presionado ~ 0 backward or fast forward. enfoncee pour effectuer une recherche ~ para el avance 0 el retroceso rapido. rapide vers I'arriere ou vers I'avant. a. Selecting the desired folder Selection du dossier de votre Seleccion de la carpeta (MP3/WMAlAAC) choix (MP3/WMAlAAC) deseada (MP3/WMA/AAC) 8 CD/MP3/WMA/AAC -- -----_._- CDA-9886/CDA-9884 o • A USB memory device may be connected to CDA-9886. This unit can plays back files in the USB memory with the same controls and modes as playback of CDs containing MP3No/MNMC. (CDA-9886 Only) / Une cle memoire USB peut etre connectee au CDA-9886. Cet appareil peut lire des fichiers de la memoire USB en utilisant les memes commandes et les memes modes que s'il s'agissait de la lecture de CD contenant des fichiers MP3No/MNMC. (CDA-9886 uniquement) / Es posible conectar Un dispositivo de memoria USB a un CDA-9886. Esta unidad permite reproducir archivos almacenados en una memoria USB con los mismos modos y controles que los utilizados en la reproducion de discos CD que contengan archivos en los formatos MP3/ WMNAAC. (Unicamente en el modelo CDA-9886) English Franfais Espaiiol ,. Pause and Playback Pause et lecture Pausa y reproduccion Selecting the desired song Selection du morceau de votre Seleccion de la cancion •• Press and release the ~ or ~ to choix deseada skip to the beginning of the current song or Appuyez sur la touche ~ ou ~ , Pulse y suelte ~ 0 ~ para omitir el the next song. puis relachez-Ia pour aller au debut du principio de la cancion actual 0 de la morceau actuel ou du morceau precedent. siguiente. Press and hold ~ or ~ to fast Maintenez la touche ~ ou ~ Pulse y mantenga presionado ~ 0 backward or fast forward. enfoncee pour effectuer une recherche ~ para el avance 0 el retroceso rapido. rapide vers I'arriere ou vers I'avant. a. Selecting the desired folder Selection du dossier de votre Seleccion de la carpeta (MP3/WMAlAAC) choix (MP3/WMAlAAC) deseada (MP3/WMA/AAC) 8

MJ.X. (Lecture aleatoire) M.I.X. (Reproduccion aleatoria) M.I.X. : The tracks are played back M.I.X. : Les pistes sont lues dans un M.I.X. : Las pistas se reproducen in random sequence. (CD) ordre aleatoire. (CD) en secuencia aleatoria. CJ M.I.X. : Only files in a folder are CJ M.I.X. : 8euls les fichiers d'un (CD) lIB played back in random dossier sont Ius dans un CJ M.I.X. : 8610 se reproducen en sequence. ordre aleatoire. secuencia aleatoria los (MP3/WMNAAC) (MP3/WMA/AAC) archivos incluidos en una @) M.I.X. : The files are played back in @) M.I.X. : Les fichiers sont Ius dans un carpeta. (MP3/WMNAAC) random sequence. ordre aleatoire. @) M.I.X. : Los archivos se reproducen (MP3/WMA/AAC) (MP3/WMA/AAC) en secuencia aleatoria. (off) : Cancel (off) : Annulation (MP3/WMNAAC) (off) : Cancelar Repeat Play Lecture repetee Repetici6n de reproducci6n RPT : Only a track is repeatedly RPT : Une seule piste est lue RPT : 8610 se reproduce varias - played back. d'une maniere repetee. veces una pista. RPT CJ : Only files in a folder are RPT CJ : 8euls les fichiers d'un RPT CJ : 8610 se reproducen varias repeatedly played back. dossier sont Ius d'une veces los archivos incluidos (MP3/WMNAAC) maniere repetee. en una carpeta. (off) : Cancel (MP3/WMA/AAC) (MP3/WMNAAC) (off) : Annulation (off) : Cancelar .., Open the front panel Ouvrez Ie panneau avant Apertura del panel frontal ----------- ------------------ ------------------ ~-----------------_. II Eject Ejection Expulsar • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks ofMicrosoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. / Windows Media et Ie logo Windows sont des marques ou des marques deposees de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis etl ou dans d'autres pays. / Windows Media y ellogotipo de Windows son marcas comerciales 0 marcas registradas de Microsoft Corporation en los Estados Unidos de America y/u otros parses. 9 M.I.X. (Random Play) MJ.X. (Lecture aleatoire) M.I.X. (Reproduccion aleatoria) M.I.X. : The tracks are played back M.I.X. : Les pistes sont lues dans un M.I.X. : Las pistas se reproducen in random sequence. (CD) ordre aleatoire. (CD) en secuencia aleatoria. CJ M.I.X. : Only files in a folder are CJ M.I.X. : 8euls les fichiers d'un (CD) lIB played back in random dossier sont Ius dans un CJ M.I.X. : 8610 se reproducen en sequence. ordre aleatoire. secuencia aleatoria los (MP3/WMNAAC) (MP3/WMA/AAC) archivos incluidos en una @) M.I.X. : The files are played back in @) M.I.X. : Les fichiers sont Ius dans un carpeta. (MP3/WMNAAC) random sequence. ordre aleatoire. @) M.I.X. : Los archivos se reproducen (MP3/WMA/AAC) (MP3/WMA/AAC) en secuencia aleatoria. (off) : Cancel (off) : Annulation (MP3/WMNAAC) (off) : Cancelar Repeat Play Lecture repetee Repetici6n de reproducci6n RPT : Only a track is repeatedly RPT : Une seule piste est lue RPT : 8610 se reproduce varias - played back. d'une maniere repetee. veces una pista. RPT CJ : Only files in a folder are RPT CJ : 8euls les fichiers d'un RPT CJ : 8610 se reproducen varias repeatedly played back. dossier sont Ius d'une veces los archivos incluidos (MP3/WMNAAC) maniere repetee. en una carpeta. (off) : Cancel (MP3/WMA/AAC) (MP3/WMNAAC) (off) : Annulation (off) : Cancelar .., Open the front panel Ouvrez Ie panneau avant Apertura del panel frontal ----------- ------------------ ------------------ ~-----------------_. II Eject Ejection Expulsar • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks ofMicrosoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. / Windows Media et Ie logo Windows sont des marques ou des marques deposees de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis etl ou dans d'autres pays. / Windows Media y ellogotipo de Windows son marcas comerciales 0 marcas registradas de Microsoft Corporation en los Estados Unidos de America y/u otros parses. 9

CDA-9886/CDA-9884 o .... _-------===~= ~~ ..-;c.,=-~c:-~_-- _ ~~:~~~ .~:~;~~,~-,-.--:~.~~ ::-_=-:~=::=:=~'_~ifii'15i~t=_==_ ==-~--r.= -- ~----=-~_..........-=~__.. __ _ _. _.-...----- ~fiji -!: o~':;:;'~'_ ~i '-';1 English Franfais Espanol An iPod@ can be connected to this unit by Vous pouvez raccorder un iPod@ a cet Puede conectar un iPod@ a esta unidad using the proprietary ALPINE FULL appareil a I'aide du cable de mediante el cable de conexi6n exclusivo SPEEDTM Connection Cable (KCE-422i) raccordement proprietaire ALPINE FULL ALPINE FULL SPEEDTM (KCE-422i) (sold separately). When this unit is SPEEDTM (KCE-422i) (vendu separement). (vendido por separado). Si la unidad esta connected by using the cable, the controls Lorsque vous raccordez I'appareil a I'aide conectada mediante el cable, los controles on the iPod are not functional. de ce cable, les commandes de l'iPod ne del iPod no estan operativos. iPod is a trademark ofApple Inc., registered in the fonctionnent pas. iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Inc., U.S, and other countries. iPod est une marque d'Apple Inc., depose aux registrada en EE.UU. y en otros paises. Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. • Recalling the iPod Mode Rappel du mode iPod Invocaci6n del modo iPod Select the iPod mode. Selectionnez Ie mode iPod. Seleccione el modo iPod. ,. Pause and Playback Pause et lecture Pausa y reproducci6n 10 iPod® (Optional)/ iPod® (en Optional)/ iPod® (opcional) CDA-9886/CDA-9884 o .... _-------===~= ~~ ..-;c.,=-~c:-~_-- _ ~~:~~~ .~:~;~~,~-,-.--:~.~~ ::-_=-:~=::=:=~'_~ifii'15i~t=_==_ ==-~--r.= -- ~----=-~_..........-=~__.. __ _ _. _.-...----- ~fiji -!: o~':;:;'~'_ ~i '-';1 English Franfais Espanol An iPod@ can be connected to this unit by Vous pouvez raccorder un iPod@ a cet Puede conectar un iPod@ a esta unidad using the proprietary ALPINE FULL appareil a I'aide du cable de mediante el cable de conexi6n exclusivo SPEEDTM Connection Cable (KCE-422i) raccordement proprietaire ALPINE FULL ALPINE FULL SPEEDTM (KCE-422i) (sold separately). When this unit is SPEEDTM (KCE-422i) (vendu separement). (vendido por separado). Si la unidad esta connected by using the cable, the controls Lorsque vous raccordez I'appareil a I'aide conectada mediante el cable, los controles on the iPod are not functional. de ce cable, les commandes de l'iPod ne del iPod no estan operativos. iPod is a trademark ofApple Inc., registered in the fonctionnent pas. iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Inc., U.S, and other countries. iPod est une marque d'Apple Inc., depose aux registrada en EE.UU. y en otros paises. Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. • Recalling the iPod Mode Rappel du mode iPod Invocaci6n del modo iPod Select the iPod mode. Selectionnez Ie mode iPod. Seleccione el modo iPod. ,. Pause and Playback Pause et lecture Pausa y reproducci6n 10

Press and release the ~ or ~ to skip to the beginning of the current song or the next song. Press and hold ~ or ~ to fast backward or fast forward through the current song. Random Play Shuffle (M.I.X.) CJ M.I.X. (Shuffle Albums) : Album shuffle playback plays back all songs in order, then randomly selects the next album. M.I.X. (Shuffle Songs) : Song shuffle randomly plays back songs within a selected category (playlist, album, etc.). (off) : Cancel Random Play Shuffle All M.I.X. : Shuffle ALL plays all songs in the iPod randomly. (off) : Cancel Repeat Play RPT Only a song is repeatedly played back. (off) Cancel Selection du morceau de votre choix Appuyez sur la touche ~ ou ~ , puis relachez-Ia pour aller au debut du morceau actuel ou du morceau precedent. Maintenez la touche ~ ou ~ enfoncee pour effectuer une recherche rapide vers I'arriere ou vers I'avant. Lecture aleatoire (M.I.X.) CJ M.I.X. (Lecture aleatoire des albums) : La lecture aleatoire de I'album lit tous les morceaux dans I'ordre, puis selectionne au hasard I'album suivant. M.I.X. (Lecture aleatoire des morceaux) : Cette fonction lit de maniere aleatoire les morceaux d'une categorie choisie (Iiste d'ecoute, album, etc.). (off) : Annulation Lecture aleatoire ALL M.I.X. : La lecture aleatoire ALL lit tous les morceaux de l'iPod de maniere aleatoire. (off) : Annulation Lecture repetee RPT : Un seul marceau est lu d'une maniere repetee. (off) : Annulation 11 Selecci6n de la canci6n deseada Pulse y suelte ~ 0 ~ para omitir el principio de la cancion actual 0 de la siguiente. Pulse y mantenga presionado ~ 0 ~ para el avance 0 el retroceso rapido. Reproducci6n aleatoria (M.I.X.) CJ M.I.X. (Reproducir albumes de forma aleatoria) : La reproducci6n aleatoria de albumes reproduce todas las canciones en orden y, a continuaci6n, selecciona el siguiente album de forma aleatoria. M.I.X. (Reproducir canciones de forma aleatoria) : La reproducci6n aleatoria de canciones reproduce las canciones de una categoria seleccionada (Iista de reproducci6n, album, etc.). (off) : Cancelar Reproducci6n aleatoria Reproducir todo de forma aleatoria M.I.X. : La reproducci6n de todo de forma aleatoria reproduce todas las canciones del iPod de forma aleataria. (off) : Cancelar Repetici6n de reproducci6n RPT : S610 se reproduce varias veces una canci6n. (off) : Cancelar •• - - Selecting the desired song Press and release the ~ or ~ to skip to the beginning of the current song or the next song. Press and hold ~ or ~ to fast backward or fast forward through the current song. Random Play Shuffle (M.I.X.) CJ M.I.X. (Shuffle Albums) : Album shuffle playback plays back all songs in order, then randomly selects the next album. M.I.X. (Shuffle Songs) : Song shuffle randomly plays back songs within a selected category (playlist, album, etc.). (off) : Cancel Random Play Shuffle All M.I.X. : Shuffle ALL plays all songs in the iPod randomly. (off) : Cancel Repeat Play RPT Only a song is repeatedly played back. (off) Cancel Selection du morceau de votre choix Appuyez sur la touche ~ ou ~ , puis relachez-Ia pour aller au debut du morceau actuel ou du morceau precedent. Maintenez la touche ~ ou ~ enfoncee pour effectuer une recherche rapide vers I'arriere ou vers I'avant. Lecture aleatoire (M.I.X.) CJ M.I.X. (Lecture aleatoire des albums) : La lecture aleatoire de I'album lit tous les morceaux dans I'ordre, puis selectionne au hasard I'album suivant. M.I.X. (Lecture aleatoire des morceaux) : Cette fonction lit de maniere aleatoire les morceaux d'une categorie choisie (Iiste d'ecoute, album, etc.). (off) : Annulation Lecture aleatoire ALL M.I.X. : La lecture aleatoire ALL lit tous les morceaux de l'iPod de maniere aleatoire. (off) : Annulation Lecture repetee RPT : Un seul marceau est lu d'une maniere repetee. (off) : Annulation 11 Selecci6n de la canci6n deseada Pulse y suelte ~ 0 ~ para omitir el principio de la cancion actual 0 de la siguiente. Pulse y mantenga presionado ~ 0 ~ para el avance 0 el retroceso rapido. Reproducci6n aleatoria (M.I.X.) CJ M.I.X. (Reproducir albumes de forma aleatoria) : La reproducci6n aleatoria de albumes reproduce todas las canciones en orden y, a continuaci6n, selecciona el siguiente album de forma aleatoria. M.I.X. (Reproducir canciones de forma aleatoria) : La reproducci6n aleatoria de canciones reproduce las canciones de una categoria seleccionada (Iista de reproducci6n, album, etc.). (off) : Cancelar Reproducci6n aleatoria Reproducir todo de forma aleatoria M.I.X. : La reproducci6n de todo de forma aleatoria reproduce todas las canciones del iPod de forma aleataria. (off) : Cancelar Repetici6n de reproducci6n RPT : S610 se reproduce varias veces una canci6n. (off) : Cancelar

CDA-9886/CDA-9884 o Playlist/Liste d'ecoute/Lista de reproducci6n ArtistlArtistelArtista Album/Album/Album Song/Morceau/Canci6n PodcastlPodcastlPodcast Genre/Genre/Gemero ComposerICompositeurICompositor Audiobook/Livre parle/Audiolibro Song/Morceau/Canci6n Album/Album/Album Song/Morceau/Canci6n. Episode/Episode/Episodio ArtistlArtiste/Artista Album/Album/Album Song/Morceau/Canci6n Album/Album/Album Song/Morceau/Canci6n Song/Morceau/Canci6n • English Activate the search selection mode. Activez Ie mode de selection de recherche. 12 Espafiol Active el modo de seleccion de busqueda. ~earcning for adesired ~ong (i~od)/Recnercne d'un morceau sounaite (i~od)/Busqueda de 10 cancion deseada (i~od) CDA-9886/CDA-9884 o Playlist/Liste d'ecoute/Lista de reproducci6n ArtistlArtistelArtista Album/Album/Album Song/Morceau/Canci6n PodcastlPodcastlPodcast Genre/Genre/Gemero ComposerICompositeurICompositor Audiobook/Livre parle/Audiolibro Song/Morceau/Canci6n Album/Album/Album Song/Morceau/Canci6n. Episode/Episode/Episodio ArtistlArtiste/Artista Album/Album/Album Song/Morceau/Canci6n Album/Album/Album Song/Morceau/Canci6n Song/Morceau/Canci6n • English Activate the search selection mode. Activez Ie mode de selection de recherche. 12 Espafiol Active el modo de seleccion de busqueda.

Modo de busqueda de canciones: Se reproducira la canci6n seleccionada. Modo de busqueda de otros: Prosigue hasta el siguiente nivel jerarquico. Busque un titulo realizando los pasos 4 y 5 repetidamente. • Seleccione el modo de busqueda deseado. • Introducir. Seleccione el titulo deseado. PLAYLlST/ARTIST/ALBUMISONGI PODCASVGENR~COMPOSE~ AUDIOBOOK Introducir. Tras mantener pulsado ~lENT por 10 meno~ 2 segundos en cadajerarquia (salvo en CANCION y AUDIOLlBRO), todas las canciones de la jerarquia seleccionada se reproduciran. Si se realiza la busqueda durante la reproduccion M.I.x., el modo de reproduccion M.I.x. se cancelara. Autres modes de recherche: Passez au niveau de hierarchie suivant. Recherchez un titre en suivant plusieurs fois les etapes 4 et 5. Mode de recherche par marceau: La lecture du morceau selectionne commence. • Selectionnez Ie mode de recherche de votre choix. Accedez ala selection. • PLAYLlST/ARTIST/ALBUMlSONGI PODCASVGENR~COMPOSE~ AUDIOBOOK Selectionnez Ie titre de votre choix. Accedez ala selection. Apres avoir appuye sur ~lENT pendant 2 secondes au moins au sem {j'une hierarchie (sauf la hierarchie SONG et AUDIOBOOK), tous les morceaux de la hierarchie selectionnee sont Ius. Lorsque la recherche est effectuee pendant la lecture M.I.x., Ie mode de lecture M.I.X. est annuli. Song Search mode: The selected song is played back. Others Search mode: Proceeds to the next hierarchy level. Search for a title by performing steps 4 and 5 repeatedly. • • Select the desired search mode. PLAYLlST/ARTIST/ALBUMlSONGI PODCASVGENR~COMPOSE~ AUDIOBOOK Enter. After pressing and holding ~/ENTfor at least 2 seconds while in each hierarchy (except SONG and AUDIOBOOK hierarchy), all songs ofthe selected hierarchy are played back. When search is made during M.I.X. play, the M.I.X. play mode will be canceled. • • • • 13 Enter. Select the desired title. Modo de busqueda de canciones: Se reproducira la canci6n seleccionada. Modo de busqueda de otros: Prosigue hasta el siguiente nivel jerarquico. Busque un titulo realizando los pasos 4 y 5 repetidamente. • Seleccione el modo de busqueda deseado. • Introducir. Seleccione el titulo deseado. PLAYLlST/ARTIST/ALBUMISONGI PODCASVGENR~COMPOSE~ AUDIOBOOK Introducir. Tras mantener pulsado ~lENT por 10 meno~ 2 segundos en cadajerarquia (salvo en CANCION y AUDIOLlBRO), todas las canciones de la jerarquia seleccionada se reproduciran. Si se realiza la busqueda durante la reproduccion M.I.x., el modo de reproduccion M.I.x. se cancelara. Autres modes de recherche: Passez au niveau de hierarchie suivant. Recherchez un titre en suivant plusieurs fois les etapes 4 et 5. Mode de recherche par marceau: La lecture du morceau selectionne commence. • Selectionnez Ie mode de recherche de votre choix. Accedez ala selection. • PLAYLlST/ARTIST/ALBUMlSONGI PODCASVGENR~COMPOSE~ AUDIOBOOK Selectionnez Ie titre de votre choix. Accedez ala selection. Apres avoir appuye sur ~lENT pendant 2 secondes au moins au sem {j'une hierarchie (sauf la hierarchie SONG et AUDIOBOOK), tous les morceaux de la hierarchie selectionnee sont Ius. Lorsque la recherche est effectuee pendant la lecture M.I.x., Ie mode de lecture M.I.X. est annuli. Song Search mode: The selected song is played back. Others Search mode: Proceeds to the next hierarchy level. Search for a title by performing steps 4 and 5 repeatedly. • • Select the desired search mode. PLAYLlST/ARTIST/ALBUMlSONGI PODCASVGENR~COMPOSE~ AUDIOBOOK Enter. After pressing and holding ~/ENTfor at least 2 seconds while in each hierarchy (except SONG and AUDIOBOOK hierarchy), all songs ofthe selected hierarchy are played back. When search is made during M.I.X. play, the M.I.X. play mode will be canceled. • • • • 13

CDA-9886/CDA-9884 • The Calendar can also be setJor CDA-9886. / II est egalement possible de configurer Ie Calendrier sur Ie CDA-9886. / Tambien es posible ajustar el calendario en el modelo CDA-9886. CDA-9886 : CDA-9884 ~_~~~~E_n....;g;...l_is_h......."=-",...."..,..."...,_--+_......."~~~~F._ra_n.;.f_ar_·s....,,.....,....,...,......,..._-+-_---,,,......-~~_E_s.;.p_a_no_l......."=-"'....,,..~~_ I CDA-9886 CDA-9884 CDA-9886 CDA-9884 CDA-9886 CDA-9884 Activate the SETUP mode. Activez Ie mode SETUP. Permite activar el modo de Press and hold for at least 2 seconds. Maintenez cette touche enfoncee configuracion. pendant au moins 2 secondes. Mantenga pulsado durante, al menos, 2 segundos. • I Seleccione el modo CLOCK I ADJUST. • • Introducir. Permite seleccionar el modo general. Permite seleccionar el modo de ajuste del reloj. • • Selectionnez Ie mode General. Selectionnez Ie mode Clock Adjust. • , Selectionnez , Ie mode I--A:"'"c-c-e--:d-ez-a"'="'la-....J, CLOCK selection. ,ADJUST. • : Select the CLOCK I ADJUST I mode. • • Select the General mode. Select the Clock Adjust mode. Enter. .. .: I.i· I ~ ---' •• 14 Setting Time/Regloge de I'heure/Ajuste de 10 horo CDA-9886/CDA-9884 • The Calendar can also be setJor CDA-9886. / II est egalement possible de configurer Ie Calendrier sur Ie CDA-9886. / Tambien es posible ajustar el calendario en el modelo CDA-9886. CDA-9886 : CDA-9884 ~_~~~~E_n....;g;...l_is_h......."=-",...."..,..."...,_--+_......."~~~~F._ra_n.;.f_ar_·s....,,.....,....,...,......,..._-+-_---,,,......-~~_E_s.;.p_a_no_l......."=-"'....,,..~~_ I CDA-9886 CDA-9884 CDA-9886 CDA-9884 CDA-9886 CDA-9884 Activate the SETUP mode. Activez Ie mode SETUP. Permite activar el modo de Press and hold for at least 2 seconds. Maintenez cette touche enfoncee configuracion. pendant au moins 2 secondes. Mantenga pulsado durante, al menos, 2 segundos. • I Seleccione el modo CLOCK I ADJUST. • • Introducir. Permite seleccionar el modo general. Permite seleccionar el modo de ajuste del reloj. • • Selectionnez Ie mode General. Selectionnez Ie mode Clock Adjust. • , Selectionnez , Ie mode I--A:"'"c-c-e--:d-ez-a"'="'la-....J, CLOCK selection. ,ADJUST. • : Select the CLOCK I ADJUST I mode. • • Select the General mode. Select the Clock Adjust mode. Enter. .. .: I.i· I ~ ---' •• 14

Press and hold for at least 2 seconds. • I Ajuste las I horas. I Introducir. I Repita la I seleccion de 4 y I 5 para ajustar los , meses, dias, I horas y minutos. • Introducir. Permite ajustar los anos. Introducir. Repetez les etapes 4 et 5 pour regler res mois, les jours, les heures et les minutes. Permite volver al modo normal. Mantenga pulsado durante, al menos, 2 segundos. I Reglez les I heures. I Accedez a la : selection. I Repetez les I etapes 4 et 5 , pour regler les mois. • Reglez les annees. Accedez a la selection. Accedez ala selection. Repetez les etapes 4 et 5 pour regler les mois, les jours, les heures et les minutes. Revenez au mode normal. Maintenez cette touche enfoncee pendant au moins 2 secondes. I Adjust the hours. I Enter. I Repeat 4 and 5 to I adjust minutes. Enter. Adjust the years. Enter. Repeat 4 and 5 to adjust months, days, hours and minutes. • • ... • 15 Return to normal mode. Press and hold for at least 2 seconds. • I Ajuste las I horas. I Introducir. I Repita la I seleccion de 4 y I 5 para ajustar los , meses, dias, I horas y minutos. • Introducir. Permite ajustar los anos. Introducir. Repetez les etapes 4 et 5 pour regler res mois, les jours, les heures et les minutes. Permite volver al modo normal. Mantenga pulsado durante, al menos, 2 segundos. I Reglez les I heures. I Accedez a la : selection. I Repetez les I etapes 4 et 5 , pour regler les mois. • Reglez les annees. Accedez a la selection. Accedez ala selection. Repetez les etapes 4 et 5 pour regler les mois, les jours, les heures et les minutes. Revenez au mode normal. Maintenez cette touche enfoncee pendant au moins 2 secondes. I Adjust the hours. I Enter. I Repeat 4 and 5 to I adjust minutes. Enter. Adjust the years. Enter. Repeat 4 and 5 to adjust months, days, hours and minutes. • • ... • 15

system, be aware ofthe factory installed components (e.g. on-board computer). Do not tap into these leads to provide powerfor this unit. When connecting the CDA-9886/CDA-9884 to the fuse box, make sure thefuse for the intended circuit ofthe CDA-9886/CDA-9884 has the appropriate amperage. Failure to do so may result in damage to the unit and/or the vehicle. When in doubt, consult your Alpine dealer. o The main unit must be mounted within 35 degrees ofthe horizontal plane, back to front. Leu ~n'" I' ::(~ l[ .1:,' 1 Mounting Sleeve (Included) Dashboard Pressure Plates* * Ifthe installed mounting sleeve is loose in the dashboard, the pressure plates may be bent slightly /0 remedy the problem. o Lars de la connexion des dibles au systeme electrique du vehicule, ilfaut etre conscient des composants installes en usine (tel qu'un ordinateur de bord). S'assurer de ne pas brancher aces conducteurs pourfoumir I'alimentation a cette unite. Lars de la connexion du CDA-9886/ CDA-9884 au boitier afusible, s'assurer que Ie fusible du circuit designe pour Ie CDA-9886/CDA-9884 a l'amperage approprie. Sinon, I'unite et/ou Ie vehicule peuven/ etre endommagis. En cas de doute, consulter Ie revendeur Alpine. o L'uniti principale doit etre fixee a moins de 35 degres du plan horizontal, de l'arriere vers l'avant. Moln.de,., /«~ l[ J: 1 Gaine de montage (fournle) Tableau de bord Plaques de compresslon* * Si la gaine de montage installee n'epouse pas bien la fonne du tableau de bord, les plaques de compression peuvent etre ligerement plie pour remedier au probleme. 16 o Cuando haga las conexiones al sistema electrico del vehfculo, tenga en cuenta los componentes que vienen instalados de fabrica (como un computador incorporado, por ejemplo). No conecte a estos conduc/ores para proporcionar alimentaci6n a esta unidad. Al conectar el CDA-9886/CDA-9884 a la caja defusibles, asegurese de que elfusible designado para el circuito del CDA-9886/ CDA-9884 sea del amperaje adecuado. De Lo contrario, la unidad y/o el vehfculo podran sufrir danos. Cuando tenga dudas, consulte a su distribuidor Alpine. o Monte la unidad principal en un angulo de 35 grados en relaci6n con el plano horizontal, desde atrds hacia adelante. Monoode,.· I' .<~ l[ J: 1 Manguito de montaje (Incluido) Salpicadero Placas de presion* * Si el manguito de montaje instalado en el salpicadero estdjlojo, las pIacas de presi6n pueden doblarse un poco para solventar el problema. InstaIlation/lnstaIlation/lnstalacion o When making connections to the vehicle's electrical system, be aware ofthe factory installed components (e.g. on-board computer). Do not tap into these leads to provide powerfor this unit. When connecting the CDA-9886/CDA-9884 to the fuse box, make sure thefuse for the intended circuit ofthe CDA-9886/CDA-9884 has the appropriate amperage. Failure to do so may result in damage to the unit and/or the vehicle. When in doubt, consult your Alpine dealer. o The main unit must be mounted within 35 degrees ofthe horizontal plane, back to front. Leu ~n'" I' ::(~ l[ .1:,' 1 Mounting Sleeve (Included) Dashboard Pressure Plates* * Ifthe installed mounting sleeve is loose in the dashboard, the pressure plates may be bent slightly /0 remedy the problem. o Lars de la connexion des dibles au systeme electrique du vehicule, ilfaut etre conscient des composants installes en usine (tel qu'un ordinateur de bord). S'assurer de ne pas brancher aces conducteurs pourfoumir I'alimentation a cette unite. Lars de la connexion du CDA-9886/ CDA-9884 au boitier afusible, s'assurer que Ie fusible du circuit designe pour Ie CDA-9886/CDA-9884 a l'amperage approprie. Sinon, I'unite et/ou Ie vehicule peuven/ etre endommagis. En cas de doute, consulter Ie revendeur Alpine. o L'uniti principale doit etre fixee a moins de 35 degres du plan horizontal, de l'arriere vers l'avant. Moln.de,., /«~ l[ J: 1 Gaine de montage (fournle) Tableau de bord Plaques de compresslon* * Si la gaine de montage installee n'epouse pas bien la fonne du tableau de bord, les plaques de compression peuvent etre ligerement plie pour remedier au probleme. 16 o Cuando haga las conexiones al sistema electrico del vehfculo, tenga en cuenta los componentes que vienen instalados de fabrica (como un computador incorporado, por ejemplo). No conecte a estos conduc/ores para proporcionar alimentaci6n a esta unidad. Al conectar el CDA-9886/CDA-9884 a la caja defusibles, asegurese de que elfusible designado para el circuito del CDA-9886/ CDA-9884 sea del amperaje adecuado. De Lo contrario, la unidad y/o el vehfculo podran sufrir danos. Cuando tenga dudas, consulte a su distribuidor Alpine. o Monte la unidad principal en un angulo de 35 grados en relaci6n con el plano horizontal, desde atrds hacia adelante. Monoode,.· I' .<~ l[ J: 1 Manguito de montaje (Incluido) Salpicadero Placas de presion* * Si el manguito de montaje instalado en el salpicadero estdjlojo, las pIacas de presi6n pueden doblarse un poco para solventar el problema.

Clnta metalilicade montale Cable de tierra Tuerca hexagonal (MS) Attache de montage metallique Hex Nut (MS) Metal Mounting Strap Ground Lead Chassis Chassis Chasls Secure the ground lead of the unit to a clean metal spot using a screw (*1) already attached to the vehicle's chassis. • For the screw marked "~", use an appropriate screwfor the chosen mounting location. Raccordez Ie fll de terre de I'apparell a un point metallique propre it I'aide d'une vis (*1) deja fixee au chAssis du vehicule. • Pour la vis « ~ », utilisez une vis appropriee a l'emplacement de montage choisi. Fije el cable de tierra de la unldad en un punto metalico desnudo con un tornillo (~) ya fijado al chasis del vehiculo. • Para el tornillo con la marca "~", utilice un tornillo adecuado para la ubicacion de montaje elegida. 3 3 3 Slide the CDA-9886/CDA-9884 into the dashboard until it clicks. This ensures that the unit is properly locked and will not accidentally come out from the dashboard. Glissez Ie CDA-98861CDA-9884 dans Ie tableau de bord jusqu's ce qu'll emette un declic. De cette fa~on, I'apparell sera convenablement fixe et II ne risquera pas de tomber accidentellement du tableau de bordo Desllce el CDA-98861CDA-9884 hacia el interior del salplcadero hasta que escuche un chasquldo. Eso permlte asegurarse de que la unldad queda correctamente fijada y no se salga accidentalmente del salpicadero. 17 2 2 2 Screw Vis Tornillo Ecrou asix pans (MS) Clnta metalilicade montale Cable de tierra Tuerca hexagonal (MS) Attache de montage metallique Hex Nut (MS) Metal Mounting Strap Ground Lead Chassis Chassis Chasls Secure the ground lead of the unit to a clean metal spot using a screw (*1) already attached to the vehicle's chassis. • For the screw marked "~", use an appropriate screwfor the chosen mounting location. Raccordez Ie fll de terre de I'apparell a un point metallique propre it I'aide d'une vis (*1) deja fixee au chAssis du vehicule. • Pour la vis « ~ », utilisez une vis appropriee a l'emplacement de montage choisi. Fije el cable de tierra de la unldad en un punto metalico desnudo con un tornillo (~) ya fijado al chasis del vehiculo. • Para el tornillo con la marca "~", utilice un tornillo adecuado para la ubicacion de montaje elegida. 3 3 3 Slide the CDA-9886/CDA-9884 into the dashboard until it clicks. This ensures that the unit is properly locked and will not accidentally come out from the dashboard. Glissez Ie CDA-98861CDA-9884 dans Ie tableau de bord jusqu's ce qu'll emette un declic. De cette fa~on, I'apparell sera convenablement fixe et II ne risquera pas de tomber accidentellement du tableau de bordo Desllce el CDA-98861CDA-9884 hacia el interior del salplcadero hasta que escuche un chasquldo. Eso permlte asegurarse de que la unldad queda correctamente fijada y no se salga accidentalmente del salpicadero. 17

egaliseur/Ai telelono del vehiculo ampllllcador 0 al ecualizador ers Ie iii d'eclairage du combine unto de instrumentos nrc:=J CDA-9886 Only ory rately) FULL SPEEDTII Connection Cable (KCE-422i) (sold separately) dD To iPod/Vers l'iPodf ""tD AI iPod ~qJJ ~ '" TAntenna (Blue) / (Bleu) / (Azul) POWER ANT ~ 0-- To power antennalVers I'antenne electriquel IBluelWhite\ / IBleu/Blanc) / (AzuVBlanco) REMOTE TURN-ON - To amplifier or equalizerNers I'amplificateur ou " (Rose/Noir) / (Pink/Black) / (Rosa/Negro) AUDIO INTERRUPT IN To veIlide phone{Vers Ie telephone du veIliculltiAI (Orange) / (Orange) / (Naranja) ~ ILLUMINATION -'=' To the instrument cluster illumination IeacW (Red) / (Rouae) / (Roio IGNITION ~ d'instrumentiAI cable de iluminacion del conj 0 (Yellow) / (Jaune) / (Amarillo) BATTERY Ignition Key 1 - (Black) / (Noir) / (Negro) GND J~J. ~ re Battery I6l - @ Cable (sold separately) @_: (Gris) / (Gris) / (Gray) ~----------, USB mem ~-------, I f SPEAKER RIGHT FRONT $ ~akers (sold sepa 1 I e Front Right ------ .. I I l~ray/Blac~~{/~ns/NOlf) frl(GrislNeg~'iJE e ' , I ~----- " I VioleVBlack / VioleVNoir iiVioletai eorol ~ , I I I f SPEAKER RIGHT REAR e ~ -:- -caA~9i46 ~ ~ : ---::'-_~~_"'_I_: I Rear Right I 1\,' : I l 1Violet) / (Violet) / (Violeta) $ :~~ Green) / (Vert) / (Verde) FUSE lOA f SPEAKER LEFT REAR $ ~ .eb '----~ Rear Left (GreenIBlack) / (VertlNoir) / (Verde/Negro) e l ~ (White/Black)/ IBlanc/Nofrl ; IBlanco/Neorol ~~'I J SPEAKER LEFT FRONT e ~ FrontLeft IIIYI *P ~ 5 ~! (Wh~e) / (Blanc) / (Blanco) $ ~l e I CD Changer I QDJ[OD Ai-NET Cable (Included with CD Changer) (sold separately) Speakers I ~ Rear Left Amplifier Rear Right RCA Extension Cable (sold separately) I ~ Front Left Amplifier Front Right Ell Amplifier Subwoofers Ell * The LabeL is attached on the bottom ofthe unit. / L'etiquette est apposee au bas de L'appareil. / La etiqueta se fija en La parte inferior de La unidad. 18 Connections/Raccordements/Conexiones A la antena electrica egaliseur/Ai telelono del vehiculo ampllllcador 0 al ecualizador ers Ie iii d'eclairage du combine unto de instrumentos nrc:=J CDA-9886 Only ory rately) FULL SPEEDTII Connection Cable (KCE-422i) (sold separately) dD To iPod/Vers l'iPodf ""tD AI iPod ~qJJ ~ '" TAntenna (Blue) / (Bleu) / (Azul) POWER ANT ~ 0-- To power antennalVers I'antenne electriquel IBluelWhite\ / IBleu/Blanc) / (AzuVBlanco) REMOTE TURN-ON - To amplifier or equalizerNers I'amplificateur ou " (Rose/Noir) / (Pink/Black) / (Rosa/Negro) AUDIO INTERRUPT IN To veIlide phone{Vers Ie telephone du veIliculltiAI (Orange) / (Orange) / (Naranja) ~ ILLUMINATION -'=' To the instrument cluster illumination IeacW (Red) / (Rouae) / (Roio IGNITION ~ d'instrumentiAI cable de iluminacion del conj 0 (Yellow) / (Jaune) / (Amarillo) BATTERY Ignition Key 1 - (Black) / (Noir) / (Negro) GND J~J. ~ re Battery I6l - @ Cable (sold separately) @_: (Gris) / (Gris) / (Gray) ~----------, USB mem ~-------, I f SPEAKER RIGHT FRONT $ ~akers (sold sepa 1 I e Front Right ------ .. I I l~ray/Blac~~{/~ns/NOlf) frl(GrislNeg~'iJE e ' , I ~----- " I VioleVBlack / VioleVNoir iiVioletai eorol ~ , I I I f SPEAKER RIGHT REAR e ~ -:- -caA~9i46 ~ ~ : ---::'-_~~_"'_I_: I Rear Right I 1\,' : I l 1Violet) / (Violet) / (Violeta) $ :~~ Green) / (Vert) / (Verde) FUSE lOA f SPEAKER LEFT REAR $ ~ .eb '----~ Rear Left (GreenIBlack) / (VertlNoir) / (Verde/Negro) e l ~ (White/Black)/ IBlanc/Nofrl ; IBlanco/Neorol ~~'I J SPEAKER LEFT FRONT e ~ FrontLeft IIIYI *P ~ 5 ~! (Wh~e) / (Blanc) / (Blanco) $ ~l e I CD Changer I QDJ[OD Ai-NET Cable (Included with CD Changer) (sold separately) Speakers I ~ Rear Left Amplifier Rear Right RCA Extension Cable (sold separately) I ~ Front Left Amplifier Front Right Ell Amplifier Subwoofers Ell * The LabeL is attached on the bottom ofthe unit. / L'etiquette est apposee au bas de L'appareil. / La etiqueta se fija en La parte inferior de La unidad. 18

INC. (Alpine) sont heureuses de vous offrir cette garantie. Nous vous suggerons de Ie lire attentivement et en entier. Si vous avez la moindre question, veuillez contacter I'un de nos concessionnaires ou appeler directement Alpine aux numeros listes ci-dessous. • PRODUITS COUVERTS PAR LA GARANTIE Cette garantie couvre les produits audio de voiture et les accessoires connexes ("Ie produit"). Elle ne couvre les produits que dans Ie pays oli ils ont ete achetes. • DUREE DE LA GARANTIE Cette garantie est en vigueur pendant un an a partir de la date du premier achat du client. • PERSONNES PROTEGEES PAR LA GARANTIE Seul I'acheteur original du produit, s'i1 resisde aux Etats-Unis, a Porto Rico ou au Canada, peut se prevaloir de la garantie. • CE QUI EST COUVERT Cette garantie couvre tous les defauts de materiaux et de fabrication (pieces et main d'oouvre) du produit. • CE QUI N'EST PAS COUVERT Cette garantie ne couvre pas ce qui suit: CD Les dommages survenus durant Ie transport des produits renvoyes a Alpine pour etre repares (Ies reclamations doivent etre adressees au transporteur); ® Les degats provoques par un accident ou une mauvaise utilisation, y compris des bobines acoustiques grillees suite a une surexcitation des enceintes (augmentation du niveau de I'amplificateur jusqu'a atteindre un effet de distorsion ou d'ecretage), une defaillance mecanique des enceintes (perforations, dechirures ou fentes), panneaux LCD fissures ou endommages, disques durs endommages ou ayant subi une chute. @ Tout degat provoque par negligence, usage inapproprie, mauvaise utilisation ou par Ie non-respect des instructions indiquees dans Ie manuel de I'utilisateur. @ Les dommages dus a la force majeure, notamment aux tremblements de terre, au feu, aux inondations, aux tempetes ou aux autres cataclysmes naturels; Les frais ou les depenses relatifs a l'enlEwement ou a la reinstallation du produit; ® Les services rendus par une personne, physique ou morale non autorisee; ® Les produits dont Ie numero de serie a ete efface, moditie ou retire; (j) Les produits qui ont ete adaptes ou modifies sans Ie consentement d'Alpine; @ Les produits qui ne sont pas distribues par Alpine aux Etats-Unis, a Porto Rico ou au Canada; ® Les produits qui n'ont pas ete achetes par I'entremise d'un concessionnaire Alpine autorise; , GARANTIE LlMITEE Fideles a leur engagement de ne fournir que des produits de qualite, ALPINE ELECTRONIQUE DE ~AMERIQUE, INC. et ALPINE ELECTRONIQUE DU CANADA, INC. (Alpine) sont heureuses de vous offrir cette garantie. Nous vous suggerons de Ie lire attentivement et en entier. Si vous avez la moindre question, veuillez contacter I'un de nos concessionnaires ou appeler directement Alpine aux numeros listes ci-dessous. • PRODUITS COUVERTS PAR LA GARANTIE Cette garantie couvre les produits audio de voiture et les accessoires connexes ("Ie produit"). Elle ne couvre les produits que dans Ie pays oli ils ont ete achetes. • DUREE DE LA GARANTIE Cette garantie est en vigueur pendant un an a partir de la date du premier achat du client. • PERSONNES PROTEGEES PAR LA GARANTIE Seul I'acheteur original du produit, s'i1 resisde aux Etats-Unis, a Porto Rico ou au Canada, peut se prevaloir de la garantie. • CE QUI EST COUVERT Cette garantie couvre tous les defauts de materiaux et de fabrication (pieces et main d'oouvre) du produit. • CE QUI N'EST PAS COUVERT Cette garantie ne couvre pas ce qui suit: CD Les dommages survenus durant Ie transport des produits renvoyes a Alpine pour etre repares (Ies reclamations doivent etre adressees au transporteur); ® Les degats provoques par un accident ou une mauvaise utilisation, y compris des bobines acoustiques grillees suite a une surexcitation des enceintes (augmentation du niveau de I'amplificateur jusqu'a atteindre un effet de distorsion ou d'ecretage), une defaillance mecanique des enceintes (perforations, dechirures ou fentes), panneaux LCD fissures ou endommages, disques durs endommages ou ayant subi une chute. @ Tout degat provoque par negligence, usage inapproprie, mauvaise utilisation ou par Ie non-respect des instructions indiquees dans Ie manuel de I'utilisateur. @ Les dommages dus a la force majeure, notamment aux tremblements de terre, au feu, aux inondations, aux tempetes ou aux autres cataclysmes naturels; Les frais ou les depenses relatifs a l'enlEwement ou a la reinstallation du produit; ® Les services rendus par une personne, physique ou morale non autorisee; ® Les produits dont Ie numero de serie a ete efface, moditie ou retire; (j) Les produits qui ont ete adaptes ou modifies sans Ie consentement d'Alpine; @ Les produits qui ne sont pas distribues par Alpine aux Etats-Unis, a Porto Rico ou au Canada; ® Les produits qui n'ont pas ete achetes par I'entremise d'un concessionnaire Alpine autorise;

CD II vous faut remettre Ie produit necessitant des reparations a un centre de service autorise Alpine ou a Alpine meme et en assumer les frais de transport. Alpine a Ie choix entre reparer Ie produit ou Ie remplacer par un produit neuf ou revise, Ie tout sans frais pour vous. Si les reparations sont couvertes par la garantie et si Ie produit a ete envoye a un centre de service Alpine ou a Alpine, Ie paiement des frais de reexpedition du produit incombe Alpine. @ Vous devez donner une description detaillee des problemes qui sont a I'origine de votre demande de reparation. @) Vous devez joindre la preuve de votre achat du produit. @ Vous devez emballer soigneusement Ie produit pour eviter tout dommage durant son transport. Pour eviter la perte de I'envoi, il est conseille de choisir un transporteur qui propose un service de suivi des envois. • LIMITATION DES GARANTIES TACITES LA DUREE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES, Y COMPRIS LA GARANTIE D'ADAPTATION AL.:UTILISATION ET LA GARANTIE DE QUALITE LOYALE ET MARCHANDE, EST L1MITEE ACELLE DE LA GARANTIE EXPRESSE DETERMINEE CI-DESSUS. PERSONNE N'EST AUTORISE A ENGAGER AUTREMENT LA RESPONSABILITE D'ALPINE EN VERTU DE LA VENTE D'UN PRODUIT. • EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE ALPINE STIPULE EXPRESSEMENT QU'ELLE N'EST PAS RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES-INTERETS ET DOMMAGES INDIRECTS PROVOQUES PAR LE PRODUIT. LES DOMMAGES-INTERETS SONT LES FRAIS DE TRANSPORT DU PRODUIT VERS UN CENTRE DE SERVICE ALPINE, LA PERTE DE TEMPS DE L.:ACHETEUR ORIGINAL, LA PERTE D'UTILISATION DU PRODUIT, LES BILLETS D'AUTOBUS, LA LOCATION DE VOITURES ET TOUS LES AUTRES FRAIS LIES ALA GARDE DU PRODUIT. LES DOMMAGES INDIRECTS SONT LES FRAIS DE REPARATION au DE REMPLACEMENT D'AUTRES BIENS ENDOMMAGES SUITE AU MAUVAIS FONCTIONNEMENT DU PRODUIT. LES RECOURS PREVUS PAR LES PRESENTES EXCLUENT ET REMPLACENT TOUTE AUTRE FORME DE RECOURS. • LIEN ENTRE LA GARANTIE ET LA LOI La garantie vous donne des droits specifiques, mais vous pouvez aussi jouir d'autres droits, qui varient d'un etat ou d'une province a I'autre. En outre, certains etats et certaines provinces interdisent de limiter la duree des garanties tacites ou d'exclure les dommages accessoires ou indirects. Dans ce cas, les limites et les exclusions de la garantie peuvent ne pas s'appliquer a vous. • CLAUSE APPLICABLE AU CANADA SEULEMENT Pour que la garantie soit valable, iI faut qu'un centre d'installation autorise ait installe Ie systeme audio pour I'auto dans votre vehicule et qu'i1 ait ensuite appose son cachet sur la garantie. • NUMEROS 0'APPEL DU SERVICE ALA CLIENTELE Si vous avez besoin de nos services, veuillez appeler Alpine aux numeros ci- dessous pour Ie centre de service autorise Alpine Ie plus proche. AUDIO DE VOITURE 1-800-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) NAVIGATION 1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357) Ou visitez notre site Web a I'adresse http://www.alpine-usa.com ALPINE ELECTRONIQUE DE L'AMERIQUE, INC., 19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance, California 90501, U.S.A. ALPINE ELECTRONIQUE DU CANADA, INC., 777 Supertest Road, Toronto, Ontario M3J 2M9, Canada N'envoyez aucun produit aces adresses. Appelez notre numero gratuit ou visitez notre site Web si vous recherchez un centre de service. • COMMENT SE PREVALOIR DE LA GARANTIE CD II vous faut remettre Ie produit necessitant des reparations a un centre de service autorise Alpine ou a Alpine meme et en assumer les frais de transport. Alpine a Ie choix entre reparer Ie produit ou Ie remplacer par un produit neuf ou revise, Ie tout sans frais pour vous. Si les reparations sont couvertes par la garantie et si Ie produit a ete envoye a un centre de service Alpine ou a Alpine, Ie paiement des frais de reexpedition du produit incombe Alpine. @ Vous devez donner une description detaillee des problemes qui sont a I'origine de votre demande de reparation. @) Vous devez joindre la preuve de votre achat du produit. @ Vous devez emballer soigneusement Ie produit pour eviter tout dommage durant son transport. Pour eviter la perte de I'envoi, il est conseille de choisir un transporteur qui propose un service de suivi des envois. • LIMITATION DES GARANTIES TACITES LA DUREE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES, Y COMPRIS LA GARANTIE D'ADAPTATION AL.:UTILISATION ET LA GARANTIE DE QUALITE LOYALE ET MARCHANDE, EST L1MITEE ACELLE DE LA GARANTIE EXPRESSE DETERMINEE CI-DESSUS. PERSONNE N'EST AUTORISE A ENGAGER AUTREMENT LA RESPONSABILITE D'ALPINE EN VERTU DE LA VENTE D'UN PRODUIT. • EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE ALPINE STIPULE EXPRESSEMENT QU'ELLE N'EST PAS RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES-INTERETS ET DOMMAGES INDIRECTS PROVOQUES PAR LE PRODUIT. LES DOMMAGES-INTERETS SONT LES FRAIS DE TRANSPORT DU PRODUIT VERS UN CENTRE DE SERVICE ALPINE, LA PERTE DE TEMPS DE L.:ACHETEUR ORIGINAL, LA PERTE D'UTILISATION DU PRODUIT, LES BILLETS D'AUTOBUS, LA LOCATION DE VOITURES ET TOUS LES AUTRES FRAIS LIES ALA GARDE DU PRODUIT. LES DOMMAGES INDIRECTS SONT LES FRAIS DE REPARATION au DE REMPLACEMENT D'AUTRES BIENS ENDOMMAGES SUITE AU MAUVAIS FONCTIONNEMENT DU PRODUIT. LES RECOURS PREVUS PAR LES PRESENTES EXCLUENT ET REMPLACENT TOUTE AUTRE FORME DE RECOURS. • LIEN ENTRE LA GARANTIE ET LA LOI La garantie vous donne des droits specifiques, mais vous pouvez aussi jouir d'autres droits, qui varient d'un etat ou d'une province a I'autre. En outre, certains etats et certaines provinces interdisent de limiter la duree des garanties tacites ou d'exclure les dommages accessoires ou indirects. Dans ce cas, les limites et les exclusions de la garantie peuvent ne pas s'appliquer a vous. • CLAUSE APPLICABLE AU CANADA SEULEMENT Pour que la garantie soit valable, iI faut qu'un centre d'installation autorise ait installe Ie systeme audio pour I'auto dans votre vehicule et qu'i1 ait ensuite appose son cachet sur la garantie. • NUMEROS 0'APPEL DU SERVICE ALA CLIENTELE Si vous avez besoin de nos services, veuillez appeler Alpine aux numeros ci- dessous pour Ie centre de service autorise Alpine Ie plus proche. AUDIO DE VOITURE 1-800-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) NAVIGATION 1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357) Ou visitez notre site Web a I'adresse http://www.alpine-usa.com ALPINE ELECTRONIQUE DE L'AMERIQUE, INC., 19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance, California 90501, U.S.A. ALPINE ELECTRONIQUE DU CANADA, INC., 777 Supertest Road, Toronto, Ontario M3J 2M9, Canada N'envoyez aucun produit aces adresses. Appelez notre numero gratuit ou visitez notre site Web si vous recherchez un centre de service.

Warranty. We suggest that you read it thoroughly. Should you have any questions, please contact your Dealer or contact Alpine at one of the telephone numbers listed below. • PRODUCTS COVERED: This Warranty covers Car Audio Products and Related Accessories ("the product"). Products purchased in the Canada are covered only in the Canada. Products purchased in the U.S.A. are covered only in the U.S.A. • LENGTH OF WARRANTY: This Warranty is in effect for one year from the date of the first consumer purchase. • WHO IS COVERED: This Warranty only covers the original purchaser of the product, who must reside in the United States, Puerto Rico or Canada. • WHAT IS COVERED: This Warranty covers defects in materials or workmanship (parts and labor) in the product. • WHAT IS NOT COVERED: This Warranty does not cover the following: CD Damage occurring during shipment of the product to Alpine for repair (claims must be presented to the carrier). ® Damage caused by accident or abuse, including burned voice coils caused by over-driving the speaker (amplifier level is turned up and driven into distortion or clipping). Speaker mechanical failure (e.g. punctures, tears or rips). Cracked or damaged LCD panels. Dropped or damaged hard drives. @ Damage caused by negligence, misuse, improper operation or failure to follow instructions contained in the Owner's manual. @ Damage caused by act of God, including without limitation, earthquake, fire, flood, storms or other acts of nature. Any cost or expense related to the removal or reinstallation of the product. ® Service performed by an unauthorized person, company or association. ® Any product which has the serial number defaced, altered or removed. (J) Any product which has been adjusted, altered or modified without Alpine's consent. ® Any product not distributed by Alpine within the United States, Puerto Rico or Canada. ® Any product not purchased from an Authorized Alpine Dealer. • HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE: CD You are responsible for delivery of the product to an Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine for repair and for payment of any initial shipping charges. Alpine will, at its option, repair or replace the product with a new or reconditioned product without charge. If the repairs are covered by the warranty, and if the product was shipped to an Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine, Alpine will pay the return shipping charges. @ You should provide a detailed description of the problem(s) for which service is required. @ You must supply proof of your purchase of the product. @ You must package the product securely to avoid damage during shipment. To prevent lost packages it is recommended to use a carrier that provides a tracking service. LIMITED WARRANTY ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC. AND ALPINE OF CANADA INC. ("Alpine"), are dedicated to quality craftsmanship and are pleased to offer this Warranty. We suggest that you read it thoroughly. Should you have any questions, please contact your Dealer or contact Alpine at one of the telephone numbers listed below. • PRODUCTS COVERED: This Warranty covers Car Audio Products and Related Accessories ("the product"). Products purchased in the Canada are covered only in the Canada. Products purchased in the U.S.A. are covered only in the U.S.A. • LENGTH OF WARRANTY: This Warranty is in effect for one year from the date of the first consumer purchase. • WHO IS COVERED: This Warranty only covers the original purchaser of the product, who must reside in the United States, Puerto Rico or Canada. • WHAT IS COVERED: This Warranty covers defects in materials or workmanship (parts and labor) in the product. • WHAT IS NOT COVERED: This Warranty does not cover the following: CD Damage occurring during shipment of the product to Alpine for repair (claims must be presented to the carrier). ® Damage caused by accident or abuse, including burned voice coils caused by over-driving the speaker (amplifier level is turned up and driven into distortion or clipping). Speaker mechanical failure (e.g. punctures, tears or rips). Cracked or damaged LCD panels. Dropped or damaged hard drives. @ Damage caused by negligence, misuse, improper operation or failure to follow instructions contained in the Owner's manual. @ Damage caused by act of God, including without limitation, earthquake, fire, flood, storms or other acts of nature. Any cost or expense related to the removal or reinstallation of the product. ® Service performed by an unauthorized person, company or association. ® Any product which has the serial number defaced, altered or removed. (J) Any product which has been adjusted, altered or modified without Alpine's consent. ® Any product not distributed by Alpine within the United States, Puerto Rico or Canada. ® Any product not purchased from an Authorized Alpine Dealer. • HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE: CD You are responsible for delivery of the product to an Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine for repair and for payment of any initial shipping charges. Alpine will, at its option, repair or replace the product with a new or reconditioned product without charge. If the repairs are covered by the warranty, and if the product was shipped to an Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine, Alpine will pay the return shipping charges. @ You should provide a detailed description of the problem(s) for which service is required. @ You must supply proof of your purchase of the product. @ You must package the product securely to avoid damage during shipment. To prevent lost packages it is recommended to use a carrier that provides a tracking service.

• HOW TO CONTACT CUSTOMER SERVICE: Should the product require service, please call the following number for your nearest Authorized Alpine Service Center. • HOW WE LIMIT IMPLIED WARRANTIES: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING FITNESS FOR USE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE PERIOD OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE AND NO PERSON IS AUTHORIZED TO ASSUME FOR ALPINE ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OF THE PRODUCT. • HOW WE EXCLUDE CERTAIN DAMAGES: ALPINE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE PRODUCT. THE TERM "INCIDENTAL DAMAGES" REFERS TO EXPENSES OF TRANSPORTING THE PRODUCT TO THE ALPINE SERVICE CENTER, LOSS OF THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER'S TIME, LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, BUS FARES, CAR RENTALS OR OTHERS COSTS RELATING TO THE CARE AND CUSTODY OF THE PRODUCT. THE TERM "CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES" REFERS TO THE COST OF REPAIRING OR REPLACING OTHER PROPERTY WHICH IS DAMAGED WHEN THIS PRODUCT DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY. THE REMEDIES PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS. • HOW STATE/PROVINCIAL LAW RELATES TO THE WARRANTY: This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state and province to province. In addition, some states/provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, and some do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. Accordingly, limitations as to these matters contained herein may not apply to you. • IN CANADA ONLY: This Warranty is not valid unless your Alpine car audio product has been installed in your vehicle by an Authorized Installation Center, and this warranty stamped upon installation by the installation center. CAR AUDIO NAVIGATION 1-800-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) 1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357) ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC., 19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance, California 90501, U.S.A. ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC., 777 Supertest Road, Toronto, Ontario M3J 2M9, Canada Do not send products to these addresses. Call the toll free telephone number or visit the website to locate a service center. Or visit our website at; http://www.alpine-usa.com • HOW TO CONTACT CUSTOMER SERVICE: Should the product require service, please call the following number for your nearest Authorized Alpine Service Center. • HOW WE LIMIT IMPLIED WARRANTIES: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING FITNESS FOR USE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE PERIOD OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE AND NO PERSON IS AUTHORIZED TO ASSUME FOR ALPINE ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OF THE PRODUCT. • HOW WE EXCLUDE CERTAIN DAMAGES: ALPINE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE PRODUCT. THE TERM "INCIDENTAL DAMAGES" REFERS TO EXPENSES OF TRANSPORTING THE PRODUCT TO THE ALPINE SERVICE CENTER, LOSS OF THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER'S TIME, LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, BUS FARES, CAR RENTALS OR OTHERS COSTS RELATING TO THE CARE AND CUSTODY OF THE PRODUCT. THE TERM "CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES" REFERS TO THE COST OF REPAIRING OR REPLACING OTHER PROPERTY WHICH IS DAMAGED WHEN THIS PRODUCT DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY. THE REMEDIES PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS. • HOW STATE/PROVINCIAL LAW RELATES TO THE WARRANTY: This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state and province to province. In addition, some states/provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, and some do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. Accordingly, limitations as to these matters contained herein may not apply to you. • IN CANADA ONLY: This Warranty is not valid unless your Alpine car audio product has been installed in your vehicle by an Authorized Installation Center, and this warranty stamped upon installation by the installation center. CAR AUDIO NAVIGATION 1-800-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) 1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357) ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC., 19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance, California 90501, U.S.A. ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC., 777 Supertest Road, Toronto, Ontario M3J 2M9, Canada Do not send products to these addresses. Call the toll free telephone number or visit the website to locate a service center.

(illD~~ DII3lTAL AUDIO I TEXT I AAC MP3 CDA-9886 H3'Radio® '!IREADY ~ 'RA~IO,.l REA 0 Y• USB PLAYBACK • OWNER'S MANUAL Please read before using this equipment. • MODE D'EMPLOI Veuillez lire avant d'utiliser cet appareil. • MANUAL DE OPERACI6N Lealo antes de utilizar este equipo. ALPINE ELECTRONICS MARKETING, INC. 1-1-8 Nishi Gotanda, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-0031, Japan Phone 03-5496-8231 ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC. 19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance, California 90501, U.S.A. Phone 1-8oo-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 777 Supertest Road, Toronto, Ontario M3J 2M9, Canada Phone 1-8OQ-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AUSTRALIA PlY. Lm. 161-165 Princes Highway, Hallam Victoria 3803, Australia Phone 03-8787-1200 ALPINE ELECTRONICS GmbH Frankfurter Ring 117, 80807 MOnchen, Germany Phone 089-32 42 640 ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF U.K. Lm. Alpine House Fletchamstead Highway, Coventry CV4 9TW, U.K. Phone 0870-33 33 763 ALPINE ELECTRONICS FRANCE S.A.R.L (RCS PONTOISE B 338101 280) 98, Rue de la Belle Etoile, Z.I. Paris Nord II, B.P. 50016, 95945 Roissy Charles de Gaulle Cedex, France Phone 01-48638989 ALPINE rTALIA S.p.A. Viale C. Colombo 8, 20090 Trezzano Sui Naviglio (MI). Italy Phone 02-484781 ALPINE ELECTRONICS DE ESPANA, S.A. Portal de Gamarra 36, Pabell6n, 32 01013 Vrloria (Alavaj-APOO 133, Spain Phone 945-283588 ALPINE ELECTRONICS (BENelUX) GmbH Leuvensesteenweg 510-B6, 1930 zaventem, Belgium Phone 02-725-1315 Designed by ALPINE Japan 68-09359Z32-B MP3JWMAlAAC CD Receiver (illD~~ DII3lTAL AUDIO I TEXT I AAC MP3 CDA-9886 H3'Radio® '!IREADY ~ 'RA~IO,.l REA 0 Y• USB PLAYBACK • OWNER'S MANUAL Please read before using this equipment. • MODE D'EMPLOI Veuillez lire avant d'utiliser cet appareil. • MANUAL DE OPERACI6N Lealo antes de utilizar este equipo. ALPINE ELECTRONICS MARKETING, INC. 1-1-8 Nishi Gotanda, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-0031, Japan Phone 03-5496-8231 ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC. 19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance, California 90501, U.S.A. Phone 1-8oo-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 777 Supertest Road, Toronto, Ontario M3J 2M9, Canada Phone 1-8OQ-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AUSTRALIA PlY. Lm. 161-165 Princes Highway, Hallam Victoria 3803, Australia Phone 03-8787-1200 ALPINE ELECTRONICS GmbH Frankfurter Ring 117, 80807 MOnchen, Germany Phone 089-32 42 640 ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF U.K. Lm. Alpine House Fletchamstead Highway, Coventry CV4 9TW, U.K. Phone 0870-33 33 763 ALPINE ELECTRONICS FRANCE S.A.R.L (RCS PONTOISE B 338101 280) 98, Rue de la Belle Etoile, Z.I. Paris Nord II, B.P. 50016, 95945 Roissy Charles de Gaulle Cedex, France Phone 01-48638989 ALPINE rTALIA S.p.A. Viale C. Colombo 8, 20090 Trezzano Sui Naviglio (MI). Italy Phone 02-484781 ALPINE ELECTRONICS DE ESPANA, S.A. Portal de Gamarra 36, Pabell6n, 32 01013 Vrtoria (Alavaj-APOO 133, Spain Phone 945-283588 ALPINE ELECTRONICS (BENelUX) GmbH Leuvensesteenweg 510-B6, 1930 zaventem, Belgium Phone 02-725-1315 Designed by ALPINE Japan 68-09359Z32-B

(Birthday Set) 19 Setting the Clock Display (Clock Mode) 19 Setting of Calendar Display Pattern Switching (Calendar) 19 Playing MP3IWMAlAAC Data (Play Mode) 19 Sound (Beep) Guide Function 20 Turning Mute Mode On/Off (INT Mute) 20 Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode 20 Setting the AUX+ Level (AUX IN GAIN) 20 Setting the External Digital Input 20 Setting the AUX Mode (V-Link) 20 Changer Name Setting 20 Connecting to an External Amplifier 20 Setting the Language Font 21 Demonstration 21 Dimmer Control 21 Dimmer Level Setting 21 Scroll Type Setting 21 Scroll Setting (Text Scroll) 21 Switching the Character Font 21 Switching the Animation Display Type (BGV Select) 21 Opening Message ON/OFF Setting 21 Displaying the Text 17 Displaying Time 18 Setting the Bass Control 14 Setting the Bass Center Frequency 14 Setting the Bass Bandwidth 14 Setting the Bass Level 15 Setting the Treble Control 15 Setting the Treble Center Frequency 15 Setting the Treble Level 15 Adjusting the High Pass Filter 15 Blackout Mode On and Off 16 Turning Loudness On/Off 16 Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF 16 Setting the Subwoofer System 16 Setting the Bluetooth IN Connection 19 f'3~ne" .rat·~ttinri"J!l!*0ff"!tJi)'%N't.·· u:a. 'Xl, 1iI.:p!IfipiA< .'. . .Diselay Sitting SETUP Other Functions Radio Playback 10 Repeat Play 11 M.I.X. (Random Play) 11 Searching for CD Text 11 FilelFolder Name Search (concerning MP3IWMNAAC) 12 Quick Search 12 About MP3IWMNAAC 12 CD/MP3IWMAlAAC WARNING 4 CAUTION 4 PRECAUTIONS 4 Listening to Radio 8 Presetting Stations Manually 9 Presetting Stations Automatically 9 Tuning to Preset Stations 9 Frequency Search Function 9 Receiving a Multicast Station (HD Radio mode only) 9 Sound Setting Adjusting Subwoofer LeveVBass Levelffreble Level/Balance (Between Left and Right)! Fader (Between Front and Rear)/Defeat 14 Setting the Subwoofer Level 14 Getting Started Accessory List 7 Turning Power On and Off 7 Detaching and Attaching the Front Panel 7 Initial System Start-Up 7 Adjusting Volume 8 Lowering Volume Quickly 8 Setting the Time and Calendar 8 WARNING Operating Instructions Contents i-EN ENGLISH Birthday Opening Message Setting (Birthday Set) 19 Setting the Clock Display (Clock Mode) 19 Setting of Calendar Display Pattern Switching (Calendar) 19 Playing MP3IWMAlAAC Data (Play Mode) 19 Sound (Beep) Guide Function 20 Turning Mute Mode On/Off (INT Mute) 20 Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode 20 Setting the AUX+ Level (AUX IN GAIN) 20 Setting the External Digital Input 20 Setting the AUX Mode (V-Link) 20 Changer Name Setting 20 Connecting to an External Amplifier 20 Setting the Language Font 21 Demonstration 21 Dimmer Control 21 Dimmer Level Setting 21 Scroll Type Setting 21 Scroll Setting (Text Scroll) 21 Switching the Character Font 21 Switching the Animation Display Type (BGV Select) 21 Opening Message ON/OFF Setting 21 Displaying the Text 17 Displaying Time 18 Setting the Bass Control 14 Setting the Bass Center Frequency 14 Setting the Bass Bandwidth 14 Setting the Bass Level 15 Setting the Treble Control 15 Setting the Treble Center Frequency 15 Setting the Treble Level 15 Adjusting the High Pass Filter 15 Blackout Mode On and Off 16 Turning Loudness On/Off 16 Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF 16 Setting the Subwoofer System 16 Setting the Bluetooth IN Connection 19 f'3~ne" .rat·~ttinri"J!l!*0ff"!tJi)'%N't.·· u:a. 'Xl, 1iI.:p!IfipiA< .'. . .Diselay setting SETUP Other Functions Radio Playback 10 Repeat Play 11 M.I.X. (Random Play) 11 Searching for CD Text 11 FilelFolder Name Search (concerning MP3IWMNAAC) 12 Quick Search 12 About MP3IWMNAAC 12 CD/MP3IWMAlAAC WARNING 4 CAUTION 4 PRECAUTIONS 4 Listening to Radio 8 Presetting Stations Manually 9 Presetting Stations Automatically 9 Tuning to Preset Stations 9 Frequency Search Function 9 Receiving a Multicast Station (HD Radio mode only) 9 Sound Setting Adjusting Subwoofer LeveVBass Levelffreble Level/Balance (Between Left and Right)! Fader (Between Front and Rear)lDefeat 14 Setting the Subwoofer Level 14 Getting Started Accessory List 7 Turning Power On and Off 7 Detaching and Attaching the Front Panel 7 Initial System Start-Up 7 Adjusting Volume 8 Lowering Volume Quickly 8 Setting the Time and Calendar 8 WARNING Operating Instructions Contents i-EN

Receiving Channels with the SAT Radio Receiver (Optional) 22 Checking the SAT Radio ill Number 22 Storing Channel Presets 23 Receiving Stored Channels 23 Storing the desired Sports Team (SIRIUS only) 23 Storing while receiving a game broadcast 23 Game Alert Setup 23 Storing the desired Song I Artist (SIRIUS only) 23 Recalling the stored information (SIRIUS only) 24 If more than 2 alert are found 24 Canceling the stored Alert Memory (SIRIUS only) 24 Search Function 24 Category Search mode 24 ChannellArtist/Song Search mode 24 Quick Search Function 24 Receiving Weather or Traffic Information from SAT Radio 25 Instant Replay Function (SIRIUS only) 25 Changing the Display 25 Setting the Auxiliary Data Field Display (XM only) 26 USB memory (Optional) Controlling USB memory (Optional) 26 Playing MP3IWMAlAAC Files with the USB memory (Optional) 26 iPod@ (Optional) Playback 27 Searching for a desired Song 27 Quick Search 28 Direct Search Function 28 Select Playlist/Artist/Album/Genre/ Composer 28 Random Play Shuffle (M.LX.) 28 Repeat Play 29 Displaying the Text 29 2-EN IMPRINT Operation (Optional) Changing MultEQ mode 29 Adjusting Subwoofer LeveVBass LevellTreble LevellFader (Between Front and Rear)1 Balance (Between Left and Right)/Black Out in MultEQ mode 30 Adjusting Sound Setting in Manual Mode 30 Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF 30 Setting the Subwoofer System 30 Setting the Subwoofer Phase 30 Setting the Subwoofer Channel (SUBW. Channel) 31 Equalizer Presets (Factory's EQ) 31 Setting the Response Slope for the High Range Speaker (TW Setup) 31 Setting the Filter type 31 Turning Media Xpander ON/OFF 31 Setting the MX LeveL 31 Setting EQ mode 31 Setting the Time Correction Unit (TCR Parameter) 31 Blackout Mode On and Off 31 Sound Field Adjustment 32 Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve 32 Adjusting the Graphic Equalizer Curve 32 Adjusting the Time Correction 32 Adjusting the Crossover Settings 32 Storing the Sound Field Adjustment Settings 33 Recalling the Stored Sound Field Adjustment Settings 33 About Time Correction 34 About the Crossover 35 About IMPRINT 36 Changer (Optional) Controlling CD Changer (Optional) 37 Playing MP3 Files with the CD Changer (Optional) 37 Multi-Changer Selection (Optional) 37 Remote Control Controls on Remote Control 38 Operating the Audio Processor 38 Battery Replacement 39 Information In Case of Difficulty .40 Specifications 43 SAT Radio Receiver (Optional) Receiving Channels with the SAT Radio Receiver (Optional) 22 Checking the SAT Radio ill Number 22 Storing Channel Presets 23 Receiving Stored Channels 23 Storing the desired Sports Team (SIRIUS only) 23 Storing while receiving a game broadcast 23 Game Alert Setup 23 Storing the desired Song I Artist (SIRIUS only) 23 Recalling the stored information (SIRIUS only) 24 If more than 2 alert are found 24 Canceling the stored Alert Memory (SIRIUS only) 24 Search Function 24 Category Search mode 24 ChannellArtist!Song Search mode 24 Quick Search Function 24 Receiving Weather or Traffic Information from SAT Radio 25 Instant Replay Function (SIRIUS only) 25 Changing the Display 25 Setting the Auxiliary Data Field Display (XM only) 26 USB memory (Optional) Controlling USB memory (Optional) 26 Playing MP3IWMAlAAC Files with the USB memory (Optional) 26 iPod@ (Optional) Playback 27 Searching for a desired Song 27 Quick Search 28 Direct Search Function 28 Select Playlist!Artist!Album/Genre/ Composer 28 Random Play Shuffle (M.LX.) 28 Repeat Play 29 Displaying the Text 29 2-EN IMPRINT Operation (Optional) Changing MultEQ mode 29 Adjusting Subwoofer LeveVBass LevellTreble LevellFader (Between Front and Rear)1 Balance (Between Left and Right)/Black Out in MultEQ mode 30 Adjusting Sound Setting in Manual Mode 30 Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF 30 Setting the Subwoofer System 30 Setting the Subwoofer Phase 30 Setting the Subwoofer Channel (SUBW. Channel) 31 Equalizer Presets (Factory's EQ) 31 Setting the Response Slope for the High Range Speaker (TW Setup) 31 Setting the Filter type 31 Turning Media Xpander ON/OFF 31 Setting the MX LeveL 31 Setting EQ mode 31 Setting the Time Correction Unit (TCR Parameter) 31 Blackout Mode On and Off 31 Sound Field Adjustment 32 Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve 32 Adjusting the Graphic Equalizer Curve 32 Adjusting the Time Correction 32 Adjusting the Crossover Settings 32 Storing the Sound Field Adjustment Settings 33 Recalling the Stored Sound Field Adjustment Settings 33 About Time Correction 34 About the Crossover 35 About IMPRINT 36 Changer (Optional) Controlling CD Changer (Optional) 37 Playing MP3 Files with the CD Changer (Optional) 37 Multi-Changer Selection (Optional) 37 Remote Control Controls on Remote Control 38 Operating the Audio Processor 38 Battery Replacement 39 Information In Case of Difficulty .40 Specifications 43

Warning 44 Caution 44 Precautions 44 Installation 45 Connections 47 LIMITED WARRANTY 3-EN Installation and Connections Warning 44 Caution 44 Precautions 44 Installation 45 Connections 47 LIMITED WARRANTY 3-EN

Failure to heed them can result in serious injury or death. DO NOT OPERATE ANY FUNCTION THAT TAKES YOUR ATIENTION AWAY FROM SAFELY DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE. Any function that requires your prolonged attention should only be performed after coming to a complete stop. Always stop the vehicle in a safe location before performing these functions. Failure to do so may result in an accident. KEEP THE VOLUME AT ALEVEL WHERE YOU CAN STILL HEAR OUTSIDE NOISES WHILE DRIVING. Excessive volume levels that obscure sounds such as emergency vehicle sirens or road warning signals (train crossings. etc.) can be dangerous and may result in an accident. LISTENING AT LOUD VOLUME LEVELS IN A CAR MAY ALSO CAUSE HEARING DAMAGE. MINIMIZE DISPLAY VIEWING WHILE DRIVING. Viewing the display may distract the driver from looking ahead of the vehicle and cause an accident. DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR ALTER. Doing so may result in an accident. fire or electric shock. USE ONLY IN CARS WITH A12 VOLT NEGATIVE GROUND. (Check with your dealer if you are not sure.) Failure to do so may result in fire. etc. KEEP SMALL OBJECTS SUCH AS BATIERIES OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN. Swallowing them may result in serious injury. If swallowed. consult a physician immediately. USE THE CORRECT AMPERE RATING WHEN REPLACING FUSES. Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock. DO NOT BLOCK VENTS OR RADIATOR PANELS. Doing so may cause heat to build up inside and may result in fire. USE THIS PRODUCT FOR MOBILE 12V APPLICATIONS. Use for other than its designed application may result in fire. electric shock or other injury. 4-EN DO NOT PLACE HANDS, FINGERS OR FOREIGN OBJECTS IN INSERTION SLOTS OR GAPS. Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to the product. &CAUTION This symbol means Important instructions. Failure to heed them can result in injury or material property damage. HALT USE IMMEDIATELY IF APROBLEM APPEARS. Failure to do so may cause personal injury or damage to the product. Return it to your authorized Alpine dealer or the nearest Alpine Service Center for repairing. DO NOT MIX NEW BATIERIES WITH OLD BATIERIES. INSERT WITH THE CORRECT BATIERY POLARITY. When inserting the batteries. be sure to observe proper polarity (+ and -) as instructed. Rupture or chemical leakage from the battery may cause fire or personal injury. &PRECAUTIONS Product Cleaning Use a soft dry cloth for periodic cleaning of the product. For more severe stains. please dampen the cloth with water only. Anything else has the chance of dissolving the paint or damaging the plastic. Temperature Be sure the temperature inside the vehicle is between +60°C (+140°F) and -10°C (+14°F) before turning your unit on. Moisture Condensation You may notice the CD playback sound wavering due to condensation. If this happens, remove the disc from the player and wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate. Damaged Disc Do not attempt to play cracked. warped, or damaged discs. Playing a bad disc could severely damage the playback mechanism. Maintenance If you have problems, do not attempt to repair the unit yourself. Return it to your Alpine dealer or the nearest Alpine Service Station for servicing. Operating Instructions WARNING &WARNING This symbol means important instructions. Failure to heed them can result in serious injury or death. DO NOT OPERATE ANY FUNCTION THAT TAKES YOUR ATIENTION AWAY FROM SAFELY DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE. Any function that requires your prolonged attention should only be performed after coming to a complete stop. Always stop the vehicle in a safe location before performing these functions. Failure to do so may result in an accident. KEEP THE VOLUME AT ALEVEL WHERE YOU CAN STILL HEAR OUTSIDE NOISES WHILE DRIVING. Excessive volume levels that obscure sounds such as emergency vehicle sirens or road warning signals (train crossings. etc.) can be dangerous and may result in an accident. LISTENING AT LOUD VOLUME LEVELS IN A CAR MAY ALSO CAUSE HEARING DAMAGE. MINIMIZE DISPLAY VIEWING WHILE DRIVING. Viewing the display may distract the driver from looking ahead of the vehicle and cause an accident. DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR ALTER. Doing so may result in an accident. fire or electric shock. USE ONLY IN CARS WITH A12 VOLT NEGATIVE GROUND. (Check with your dealer if you are not sure.) Failure to do so may result in fire. etc. KEEP SMALL OBJECTS SUCH AS BATIERIES OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN. Swallowing them may result in serious injury. If swallowed. consult a physician immediately. USE THE CORRECT AMPERE RATING WHEN REPLACING FUSES. Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock. DO NOT BLOCK VENTS OR RADIATOR PANELS. Doing so may cause heat to build up inside and may result in fire. USE THIS PRODUCT FOR MOBILE 12V APPLICATIONS. Use for other than its designed application may result in fire. electric shock or other injury. 4-EN DO NOT PLACE HANDS, FINGERS OR FOREIGN OBJECTS IN INSERTION SLOTS OR GAPS. Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to the product. &CAUTION This symbol means Important instructions. Failure to heed them can result in injury or material property damage. HALT USE IMMEDIATELY IF APROBLEM APPEARS. Failure to do so may cause personal injury or damage to the product. Return it to your authorized Alpine dealer or the nearest Alpine Service Center for repairing. DO NOT MIX NEW BATIERIES WITH OLD BATIERIES. INSERT WITH THE CORRECT BATIERY POLARITY. When inserting the batteries. be sure to observe proper polarity (+ and -) as instructed. Rupture or chemical leakage from the battery may cause fire or personal injury. &PRECAUTIONS Product Cleaning Use a soft dry cloth for periodic cleaning of the product. For more severe stains. please dampen the cloth with water only. Anything else has the chance of dissolving the paint or damaging the plastic. Temperature Be sure the temperature inside the vehicle is between +60°C (+140°F) and -10°C (+14°F) before turning your unit on. Moisture Condensation You may notice the CD playback sound wavering due to condensation. If this happens, remove the disc from the player and wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate. Damaged Disc Do not attempt to play cracked. warped, or damaged discs. Playing a bad disc could severely damage the playback mechanism. Maintenance If you have problems, do not attempt to repair the unit yourself. Return it to your Alpine dealer or the nearest Alpine Service Station for servicing.

Do not grip or pull out the disc while it is being pulled back into the player by the automatic reloading mechanism. Do not attempt to insert a disc into the unit when the unit power is off. Correct Handling Do not drop the disc while handling. Hold the disc so you will not leave fingerprints on the surface. Do not affix tape, paper, or gummed labels to the disc. Do not write on the disc. Disc Stabilizer Transparent Sheet CORRECT ~ ~ INCORRECT CORRECT X 0 ~ ~ Disc Accessories There are various accessories available on the market for protecting the disc surface and improving sound quality. However, most of them will influence the thickness and/or diameter ofthe disc. Using such accessories can cause the disc to be out of standard specifications and may create operational problems. We recommend not using these accessories on discs played in Alpine CD players. Disc Cleaning Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of the disc could cause the CD player to skip. For routine cleaning, wipe the playing surface with a clean, soft cloth from the center of the disc to the outer edge. If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergent before cleaning the disc. center~Hle New Disc "" Outside (Bumps) Center Hole Bumps Irregular Shaped Discs Be sure to use round shape discs only for this unit and never use any special shape discs. Use of special shape discs may cause damage to the mechanism. New Discs To prevent the CD from jamming, "Error" is displayed if discs with irregular surfaces are inserted or if discs are inserted incorrectly. When a new disc is ejected immediately after initial loading, use your finger to feel around the inside of the center hole and outside edge of the disc. If you feel any small bumps or irregularities, this could inhibit proper loading of the disc. To remove the bumps, rub the inside edge of the hole and outside edge of the disc with a ballpoint pen or other such instrument, then insert the disc again. Inserting Discs Your player accepts only one disc at a time for playback. Do not attempt to load more than one disc. Make sure the label side is facing up when you insert the disc. "Error" will be displayed on your player if you insert a disc incorrectly. If "Error" continues to be displayed even though the disc has been inserted correctly, push the RESET switch with a pointed object such as a ballpoint pen. Playing a disc while driving on a very bumpy road may result in skips, but this will not scratch the disc or damage the player. Installation location Make sure this unit will not be installed in a location subjected to: • Direct sun and heat • High humidity and water • Excessive dust • Excessive vibrations 5-EN Never AUempt the Following Do not grip or pull out the disc while it is being pulled back into the player by the automatic reloading mechanism. Do not attempt to insert a disc into the unit when the unit power is off. Correct Handling Do not drop the disc while handling. Hold the disc so you will not leave fingerprints on the surface. Do not affix tape, paper, or gummed labels to the disc. Do not write on the disc. Disc Stabilizer Transparent Sheet CORRECT ~ ~ INCORRECT CORRECT X 0 ~ ~ Disc Accessories There are various accessories available on the market for protecting the disc surface and improving sound quality. However, most of them will influence the thickness and/or diameter ofthe disc. Using such accessories can cause the disc to be out of standard specifications and may create operational problems. We recommend not using these accessories on discs played in Alpine CD players. Disc Cleaning Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of the disc could cause the CD player to skip. For routine cleaning, wipe the playing surface with a clean, soft cloth from the center of the disc to the outer edge. If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergent before cleaning the disc. center~Hle New Disc "" Outside (Bumps) Center Hole Bumps Irregular Shaped Discs Be sure to use round shape discs only for this unit and never use any special shape discs. Use of special shape discs may cause damage to the mechanism. New Discs To prevent the CD from jamming, "Error" is displayed if discs with irregular surfaces are inserted or if discs are inserted incorrectly. When a new disc is ejected immediately after initial loading, use your finger to feel around the inside of the center hole and outside edge of the disc. If you feel any small bumps or irregularities, this could inhibit proper loading of the disc. To remove the bumps, rub the inside edge of the hole and outside edge of the disc with a ballpoint pen or other such instrument, then insert the disc again. Inserting Discs Your player accepts only one disc at a time for playback. Do not attempt to load more than one disc. Make sure the label side is facing up when you insert the disc. "Error" will be displayed on your player if you insert a disc incorrectly. If "Error" continues to be displayed even though the disc has been inserted correctly, push the RESET switch with a pointed object such as a ballpoint pen. Playing a disc while driving on a very bumpy road may result in skips, but this will not scratch the disc or damage the player. Installation location Make sure this unit will not be installed in a location subjected to: • Direct sun and heat • High humidity and water • Excessive dust • Excessive vibrations 5-EN

Use only compact discs with the label side showing the CD logo marks below. To customers using CD-R/CD-RW • If a CD-RlCD-RW cannot be played back, make sure the last recording session was closed (finalized). • Finalize the CD-RlCD-RW if necessary, and attempt playback again. On handling Compact Discs (CD/CD-R/CD-RW) • Do not touch the surface. • Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. • Do not affix stickers or labels. • Clean the disc when it is dusty. • Make sure that there are no bumps around the disc. • Do not use commercially available disc accessories. Do not leave the disc in the car or the unit for a long time. Never expose the disc to direct sunlight. Heat and humidity may damage the CD and you may not be able to play it again. Protecting the USB connector • Only a USB memory can be connected to the USB connector on this unit. Correct performance using other USB products cannot be guaranteed. • If the USB connector is used, be sure to connect it to the unit by using a USB extension cable (sold separately). A USB hub is not supported. • Depending on the connected USB memory device, the unit may not function or some functions may not be performed. • The audio file format that can be played back on the unit is MP3IWMNAAC. • Artist/song name. etc., can be displayed, however characters may not be correctly displayed. &CAUTION Alpine accepts no responsibilityfor lost data. etc., even ifdata, etc., is lost while using this product. • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks ofMicrosoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. • iPod is a trademark ofApple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • HD Radio™ and the HD Radio Ready logo are proprietary trademarks ofiBiquity Digital Corp. • "MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensedfrom Fraunhofer lIS and Thomson." • "Supply ofthis product only conveys a license for private, non- commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue- generation) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, sateUite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is required. For details, please visit http://www.mp3licensing.com.. • Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories MultEQ XT is a trademark ofAudyssey Laboratories. On Handling USB Memory • To prevent malfunction or damage, note the following points. Read the USB memory Owner's Manual thoroughly. Do not touch the terminals by hand or metal. Do not subject USB memory to excessive shock. Do not bend, drop, disassemble, modify or soak in the water. • Avoid usage or storage in the following locations: Anywhere in the car exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures. Anywhere the possibility of high humidity or corrosive substances are present. • Fix the USB memory in a location where driver operation will not be hindered. • USB memory may not function correctly at high or low temperature. • Use only certified USB memory. Note that even certified USB memory, may not function correctly depending on its type or state. • USB memory function is not guaranteed. Use USB memory according to the terms of agreement. • Depending on the settings of the USB memory type, memory state or encoding software, the unit may not play back or display properly. • A file that is copy-protected (copyright protection) cannot be played back. • USB memory may take time to start playback. If there is a particular file other than audio in the USB memory, it may take considerable time before the file is played back or searched. • The unit can play back "mp3," "wma" or "m4a" file extensions. • Do not add the above extensions to a file other than audio data. This non-audio data will not be recognized. The resulting playback may contain noise that can damage speakers and/or amplifiers. • It is recommended to back up important data on a personal computer. • Do not remove the USB device while playback is in progress. Change SOURCE to something other than USB, then remove the USB device to prevent possible damage to its memory. WJD~~ DIGITAL AUIIIQ I TEXT I ~o~@ DtGlTAL AUDIO If you use unspecified compact discs, correct performance cannot be guaranteed. You can play CD-Rs (CD-Recordables)/CD-RWs (CD-ReWritables) which have been recorded only on audio devices. You can also play CD-Rs/CD-RWs containing MP3IWMAlAAC formatted audio files. • Some of the following CDs may not play on this unit: Flawed CDs, CDs with fingerprints, CDs exposed to extreme temperatures or sunlight (e.g., left in the car or this unit), CDs recorded under unstable conditions, CDs on which a recording failed or a re-recording was attempted, copy-protected CDs which do not conform to the audio CD industry standard. • Use discs with MP3IWMNAAC files written in a format compatible with this unit. For details, see pages 12-13. • ROM data other than audio files contained in a disc will not produce sound when played back. 6-EN About media that can be played Use only compact discs with the label side showing the CD logo marks below. To customers using CD-R/CD-RW • If a CD-RlCD-RW cannot be played back, make sure the last recording session was closed (finalized). • Finalize the CD-RlCD-RW if necessary, and attempt playback again. On handling Compact Discs (CD/CD-R/CD-RW) • Do not touch the surface. • Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. • Do not affix stickers or labels. • Clean the disc when it is dusty. • Make sure that there are no bumps around the disc. • Do not use commercially available disc accessories. Do not leave the disc in the car or the unit for a long time. Never expose the disc to direct sunlight. Heat and humidity may damage the CD and you may not be able to play it again. Protecting the USB connector • Only a USB memory can be connected to the USB connector on this unit. Correct performance using other USB products cannot be guaranteed. • If the USB connector is used, be sure to connect it to the unit by using a USB extension cable (sold separately). A USB hub is not supported. • Depending on the connected USB memory device, the unit may not function or some functions may not be performed. • The audio file format that can be played back on the unit is MP3IWMNAAC. • Artist/song name. etc., can be displayed, however characters may not be correctly displayed. &CAUTION Alpine accepts no responsibilityfor lost data. etc., even ifdata, etc., is lost while using this product. • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks ofMicrosoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. • iPod is a trademark ofApple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • HD Radio™ and the HD Radio Ready logo are proprietary trademarks ofiBiquity Digital Corp. • "MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensedfrom Fraunhofer lIS and Thomson." • "Supply ofthis product only conveys a license for private, non- commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue- generation) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, sateUite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is required. For details, please visit http://www.mp3licensing.com.. • Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories MultEQ XT is a trademark ofAudyssey Laboratories. On Handling USB Memory • To prevent malfunction or damage, note the following points. Read the USB memory Owner's Manual thoroughly. Do not touch the terminals by hand or metal. Do not subject USB memory to excessive shock. Do not bend, drop, disassemble, modify or soak in the water. • Avoid usage or storage in the following locations: Anywhere in the car exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures. Anywhere the possibility of high humidity or corrosive substances are present. • Fix the USB memory in a location where driver operation will not be hindered. • USB memory may not function correctly at high or low temperature. • Use only certified USB memory. Note that even certified USB memory, may not function correctly depending on its type or state. • USB memory function is not guaranteed. Use USB memory according to the terms of agreement. • Depending on the settings of the USB memory type, memory state or encoding software, the unit may not play back or display properly. • A file that is copy-protected (copyright protection) cannot be played back. • USB memory may take time to start playback. If there is a particular file other than audio in the USB memory, it may take considerable time before the file is played back or searched. • The unit can play back "mp3," "wma" or "m4a" file extensions. • Do not add the above extensions to a file other than audio data. This non-audio data will not be recognized. The resulting playback may contain noise that can damage speakers and/or amplifiers. • It is recommended to back up important data on a personal computer. • Do not remove the USB device while playback is in progress. Change SOURCE to something other than USB, then remove the USB device to prevent possible damage to its memory. WJD~~ DIGITAL AUIIIQ I TEXT I ~o~@ DtGlTAL AUDIO If you use unspecified compact discs, correct performance cannot be guaranteed. You can play CD-Rs (CD-Recordables)/CD-RWs (CD-ReWritables) which have been recorded only on audio devices. You can also play CD-Rs/CD-RWs containing MP3IWMAlAAC formatted audio files. • Some of the following CDs may not play on this unit: Flawed CDs, CDs with fingerprints, CDs exposed to extreme temperatures or sunlight (e.g., left in the car or this unit), CDs recorded under unstable conditions, CDs on which a recording failed or a re-recording was attempted, copy-protected CDs which do not conform to the audio CD industry standard. • Use discs with MP3IWMNAAC files written in a format compatible with this unit. For details, see pages 12-13. • ROM data other than audio files contained in a disc will not produce sound when played back. 6-EN

~ lENT ~IESC FISETUP Accessory List • Head unit 1 • Power cable 1 • Mounting sleeve 1 • Carrying case 1 • Bracket key 2 • Screw (MS x 8) 4 • Remote Control 1 • Battery (AAA size) 2 • Owner's Manual 1 set Turning Power On and Off Press SOURCE/ to turn on the unit. • The unit can be turned on by pressing any other button except :.:::: (OPEN). Press and hold SOURCE/ for at least 2 seconds to turn off the unit. • Thefirst time power is turned on, the volume will startfrom level 12. Detaching and Attaching the Front Panel Detaching 1 Turn off the unit power. 2 Press:':::: (OPEN) to open the front panel. To close the front panel, press the left side until it locks as shown in the figure below. 3 Grasp the front panel firmly, slide to the left 0 , and then pull 8 to remove. • The front panel may become hot in nonnal usage (especially the connector tenninals on the back ofthe front panel). This is not a malfunction. • To protect the front panel. place it in the supplied carrying case. • When detaching the front panel. do not apply excessive force as it may result in malfunction. • Do not leave the front panel open, or drive the car with the panel open as it may result in an accident or malfunction. Attaching 1 Insert the right side of the front panel into the main unit. Align the groove on the front panel with the projections on the main unit. 2 Push the left side of the front panel until It locks firmly into the main unit. • Before attaching the front panel, make sure that there is no dirt or dust on the connector tenninals and no foreign object between the front panel and the main unit. • Attach the front panel carefully, holding the sides ofthe front panel to avoid pushing buttons by mistake. Initial System Start-Up Be sure to press the RESET switch when using the unit for the first time, after changing the car battery, etc. 1 Turn off the unit power. 2 Press:':::: (OPEN) to open the front panel, and then remove it. 3 Press RESET with a ballpoint pen or similar pointed object. ~ I = . I RESET switch 7-EN Getting Started Rotary encoder :.:::: (OPEN) MUTE ~ lENT ~IESC FISETUP Accessory List • Head unit 1 • Power cable 1 • Mounting sleeve 1 • Carrying case 1 • Bracket key 2 • Screw (MS x 8) 4 • Remote Control 1 • Battery (AAA size) 2 • Owner's Manual 1 set Turning Power On and Off Press SOURCE/ to turn on the unit. • The unit can be turned on by pressing any other button except :.:::: (OPEN). Press and hold SOURCE/ for at least 2 seconds to turn off the unit. • Thefirst time power is turned on, the volume will startfrom level 12. Detaching and Attaching the Front Panel Detaching 1 Turn off the unit power. 2 Press:':::: (OPEN) to open the front panel. To close the front panel, press the left side until it locks as shown in the figure below. 3 Grasp the front panel firmly, slide to the left 0 , and then pull 8 to remove. • The front panel may become hot in nonnal usage (especially the connector tenninals on the back ofthe front panel). This is not a malfunction. • To protect the front panel. place it in the supplied carrying case. • When detaching the front panel. do not apply excessive force as it may result in malfunction. • Do not leave the front panel open, or drive the car with the panel open as it may result in an accident or malfunction. Attaching 1 Insert the right side of the front panel into the main unit. Align the groove on the front panel with the projections on the main unit. 2 Push the left side of the front panel until It locks firmly into the main unit. • Before attaching the front panel, make sure that there is no dirt or dust on the connector tenninals and no foreign object between the front panel and the main unit. • Attach the front panel carefully, holding the sides ofthe front panel to avoid pushing buttons by mistake. Initial System Start-Up Be sure to press the RESET switch when using the unit for the first time, after changing the car battery, etc. 1 Turn off the unit power. 2 Press:':::: (OPEN) to open the front panel, and then remove it. 3 Press RESET with a ballpoint pen or similar pointed object. ~ I = . I RESET switch 7-EN

listening to Radio J Preset buttons (1 through 6) C\IENT :!:::3IESC ,I >~.. DIstance mode: Both strong and weak stations will be automatically tuned in (Automatic Seek Tuning). Loeslmode: Only strong stations will be automatically tuned in (Automatic Seek Tuning). Msnusl mode: The frequency is manually tuned in steps (Manual tuning). 4 Press ~ or ~ to tune In the desired station. Holding down ~ or ~ will change the frequency continuously. • If Digital Seek is set to ON, the SEEK UP/DOWNfunctions only stop on digital station frequencies while receiving HD radio. Refer to "Digital Seek ON/OFF Setting" (page 21). Rotary encoder SOURCE/ ~/III ~ BAND TUNE/A.ME " .: ••--~ •• : .'... 'X:' "'::';::-",.,.-+=, ...._~ ..- ... ... ~ ~'; I r---.1 '/ I_!:.. ~~_. ••••-- , ..'y""--;: ,. ~ This unit cannot receive HD Radio signals (digital terrestrial radio). In order to activate the digital radio functions described below. an optional HD Radio Tuner module must be connected through the Ai-NET bus, 1 Press SOURCE/ to select TUNER mode. 2 Press BAND repeatedly until the desired radio band Is displayed. FM1 ~ FM2 ~ AM ~ FM1 3 Press TUNE/A.ME to select the tuning mode. DX (Distance mode) ~ LOCAL (Local mode) ~ MANUAL (Manual mode) ~ DX *J Displayed only when INT Mute is OFF and the mode is set to other than Bluetooth Audio. ,,2 Only when XM Radio is connected. oJ Only when SIRIUS Radio is connected. ,.4 Only when HD Radio is connected. 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select Clock Adjust, and then press C\ lENT. 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to set year. S Press ~ lENT. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 above to set month, day, hour and minute. 7 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • Pressing :!:::3IESC returns to the previous SETUP mode. • Ifno operation is performedfor 60 seconds, SETUP is canceled. • To synchronize the clock to another clocklwatch or radio time announcement, press and hold C\IENTfor at least 2 seconds after setting the "hour". Minutes will reset to 00. Ifthe display shows over "30" minutes when you do this, the time will advance one hour. Setting the Time and Calendar 1 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to activate the SETUP selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the General mode, and then press C\/ENT. Bluetooth*J H General H Display H XM,,2/SIRIUSoJ H HD Radio,.4 H Bluetooth Activating the Audio Mute function will instantly lower the volume level by 20 dB. Press MUTE to activate the MUTE mode. The audio level will decrease by about 20 dB. Pressing MUTE again will bring the audio back to Its previous level. lowering Volume Quickly Turn the Rotary encoder until the desired sound Is obtained. 8-EN Adjusting Volume Radio • The initial mode is Distance mode. listening to Radio J Preset buttons (1 through 6) C\IENT :!:::3IESC ,I >~.. DIstance mode: Both strong and weak stations will be automatically tuned in (Automatic Seek Tuning). Loeslmode: Only strong stations will be automatically tuned in (Automatic Seek Tuning). Msnusl mode: The frequency is manually tuned in steps (Manual tuning). 4 Press ~ or ~ to tune In the desired station. Holding down ~ or ~ will change the frequency continuously. • If Digital Seek is set to ON, the SEEK UP/DOWNfunctions only stop on digital station frequencies while receiving HD radio. Refer to "Digital Seek ON/OFF Setting" (page 21). Rotary encoder SOURCE/ ~/III ~ BAND TUNE/A.ME " .: ••--~ •• : .'... 'X:' "'::';::-",.,.-+=, ...._~ ..- ... ... ~ ~'; I r---.1 '/ I_!:.. ~~_. ••••-- , ..'y""--;: ,. ~ This unit cannot receive HD Radio signals (digital terrestrial radio). In order to activate the digital radio functions described below. an optional HD Radio Tuner module must be connected through the Ai-NET bus, 1 Press SOURCE/ to select TUNER mode. 2 Press BAND repeatedly until the desired radio band Is displayed. FM1 ~ FM2 ~ AM ~ FM1 3 Press TUNE/A.ME to select the tuning mode. DX (Distance mode) ~ LOCAL (Local mode) ~ MANUAL (Manual mode) ~ DX *J Displayed only when INT Mute is OFF and the mode is set to other than Bluetooth Audio. ,,2 Only when XM Radio is connected. oJ Only when SIRIUS Radio is connected. ,.4 Only when HD Radio is connected. 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select Clock Adjust, and then press C\ lENT. 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to set year. S Press ~ lENT. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 above to set month, day, hour and minute. 7 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • Pressing :!:::3IESC returns to the previous SETUP mode. • Ifno operation is performedfor 60 seconds, SETUP is canceled. • To synchronize the clock to another clocklwatch or radio time announcement, press and hold C\IENTfor at least 2 seconds after setting the "hour". Minutes will reset to 00. Ifthe display shows over "30" minutes when you do this, the time will advance one hour. Setting the Time and Calendar 1 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to activate the SETUP selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the General mode, and then press C\/ENT. Bluetooth*J H General H Display H XM,,2/SIRIUSoJ H HD Radio,.4 H Bluetooth Activating the Audio Mute function will instantly lower the volume level by 20 dB. Press MUTE to activate the MUTE mode. The audio level will decrease by about 20 dB. Pressing MUTE again will bring the audio back to Its previous level. lowering Volume Quickly Turn the Rotary encoder until the desired sound Is obtained. 8-EN

Frequency Search Function 1 Select the radio band and tune in a desired radio station you wish to store in the preset memory. 2 Press and hold, for at least 2 seconds, anyone of the pre.et button. (1 through 6) Into which you wish to store the station. The selected station is stored. The display shows the band, preset number and station frequency memorized. • A total of 18 stations can be stored in the preset memory (6 stations for each band; FMI, FM2 and AM). • Ifyou store a station in a preset memory which already has a station, the current station will be cleared and replaced with the new station, You can search for a radio station by its frequency. 1 Press and hold ~ lENT for at least 2 seconds In Radio mode to activate Frequency search mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired frequency. 3* Press ~ lENT to receive the selected frequency. * Operation is not required during HD Radio reception. • Press and hold ~IESCforatleast 2 seconds in the search mode to cancel. Or, the search mode will be canceled ifno operation is performedfor 10 seconds. Receiving a Multicast Station (HD Radio mode only) Multicasting is the Ability to broadcast multiple program streams over a single FM frequency. This increases the amount and diversity of content choices. A maximum of eight multicast station channels can be selected on this unit. SPS: SUb-program Service Program Service MPS: Main Program Service SPS: Sub-program Service SPS: SUb-program Service Program Service example: Multicast Radio Station Program No. 87.7 MHz NO.1 87.7 MHz NO.2 87.7 MHz NO.3 I I I I 87.7 MHz NO.8 When multicast station is received, the program number and the SPS Indicator lights up. Press

(page 17) for information about display SWitching. Elapsed time Volume level Folder number display • Do not remove a CD during its eject cycle. Do not load more than one disc at a time. A malfunction may result from doing either. • Ifthe CD does not eject, press and hold ~ for at least 2 seconds. • The CD-player can play discs containing audio data, MP3 data, WMA data and AAC data. • WMA format files that are protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management), AAC format files that have been purchasedfrom iTunes Music Store andfiles that are copy-protected (copyright protection) cannot be played back on this unit. • The track display for MP3IWMNAAC data playback is the file numbers recorded on the disc. • The playback time may not be correctly displayed when a VBR (Variable Bit Rate) recorded file is played back. MP3IWMAJAAC Play Display The folder number and file number will be displayed as described below. 4 Press 1+1II or ~ to select the desired track (file). Returning to the beginnIng of the current track (file): Press 1+1II. Fast backward: Press and hold 1+1II. AdvancIng to the beginnIng of the next track (file): Press ~. Fast forward: Press and hold ~. 5 To pause playback, press ~III . Pressing ~/II again will resume playback. 6 After pressing .z:::: (OPEN) to open the front panel, press ~ to eject the disc. ~IESC ... ~ VIEW FISETUP 1+1II ~ ==,,----;, ;1 j·1 ~~~~~~;;'---"J·;I CD/MP3/WMA/AAC Close the front panel manually. When a disc is already inserted, press SOURCEI to switch to the DISC mode. TUNER ~ XM/SIRIUS·I ~ DISC ~ USB ~ iPod·z/AUX+·3 ~ Bluetooth Audio·4 ~ CHANGER·5 ~ TUNER .1 Only when XM Radio or SIRIUS Radio is connected. .z Displayed only when the iPod is connected and AUX+ Setup is set to OFF, refer to "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode" (page 20). 03 Displayed only when the AUX+ Setup is set to ON, refer to "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode" (page 20). 04 Displayed only when Bluetooth IN is set to ADAPTER, refer to "Bluetooth Setting" (page 19). ,.5 Only when the CD changer is connected. 3 While playing back MP3IWMAJAAC, press ... or ~ to select the desired folder. Pressing and holding ... or ~ will change folders continuously. 1 Press .z:::: (OPEN). The front panel will open. 2 Insert a disc with the label side facing up. The disc will be pulled into the unit automatically. Playback lO-EN • Press VIEW to switch the display. See "Displaying the Text" (page 17) for information about display SWitching. Elapsed time Volume level Folder number display • Do not remove a CD during its eject cycle. Do not load more than one disc at a time. A mal/unction may result from doing either. • Ifthe CD does not eject, press and hold ~ for at least 2 seconds. • The CD-player can play discs containing audio data, MP3 data, WMA data and AAC data. • WMA format files that are protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management), AAC format files that have been purchasedfrom iTunes Music Store andfiles that are copy-protected (copyright protection) cannot be played back on this unit. • The track display for MP3IWMNAAC data playback is the file numbers recorded on the disc. • The playback time may not be correctly displayed when a VBR (Variable Bit Rate) recorded file is played back. MP3IWMAJAAC Play Display The folder number and file number will be displayed as described below. 4 Press l+1li or ~ to select the desired track (file). Returning to the beginnIng of the current track (file): Press l+1li. Fast backward: Press and hold l+1li. AdvancIng to the beginnIng of the next track (file): Press ~. Fast forward: Press and hold ~. 5 To pause playback, press ~III . Pressing ~/II again will resume playback. 6 After pressing .z:::: (OPEN) to open the front panel, press ~ to eject the disc. ~IESC ... ~ VIEW FISETUP l+1li ~ ==,,----;, ;1 j·1 ~~~~~~;;'---"J·;I CD/MP3/WMA/AAC Close the front panel manually. When a disc is already inserted, press SOURCEI to switch to the DISC mode. TUNER ~ XM/SIRIUS·I ~ DISC ~ USB ~ iPod·z/AUX+·3 ~ Bluetooth Audio·4 ~ CHANGER·5 ~ TUNER .1 Only when XM Radio or SIRIUS Radio is connected. .z Displayed only when the iPod is connected and AUX+ Setup is set to OFF, refer to "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode" (page 20). 03 Displayed only when the AUX+ Setup is set to ON, refer to "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode" (page 20). 04 Displayed only when Bluetooth IN is set to ADAPTER, refer to "Bluetooth Setting" (page 19). ,.5 Only when the CD changer is connected. 3 While playing back MP3IWMAJAAC, press ... or ~ to select the desired folder. Pressing and holding ... or ~ will change folders continuously. 1 Press .z:::: (OPEN). The front panel will open. 2 Insert a disc with the label side facing up. The disc will be pulled into the unit automatically. Playback lO-EN

The track (file) will be played repeatedly. Press r::;:) 4 again and select off to deactivate repeat play. CD mode: RPT : Only a track is repeatedly played back. t RPT @t :A disc is repeatedly played back. t (off) CD Changer mode : M.I.X. : The tracks are played back in random sequence. l M.I.X. @ ... : The tracks on all the CDs in the current magazine will be included in the random 1 playback sequence. (off) ,.J When a CD changer equipped with the AU M.I.X. function is connected. • lfM.I.X. is sella ON during RPT @ (REPEAT ALL) play in CD changer mode. M.l.X. will apply to the current disc only. MP3IWMAlAAC mode: Searching for CD Text ~ In the USB mode. allfiles stored in the USB memory are played back in mndom sequence, and the "MIX" indicator lights up. • When a song is played back during Random (M.IX) play in the USB mode. the song can be played back again mndomly even ifnot all songs on the USB Memory have been played back. • Ifa CD changer or an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected: After pressing F/SETUP to select the function mode (RPTIM.I.X.). perfann the opemtion within 5 seconds. .J When a CD changer is connected. • If RPT is set to ON during M.I.X. play in CD changer mode, M.IX will apply to the current disc only. MP3IWMAlAAC mode: RPT : Only a file is repeatedly played back. J. RPT CJ : Only files in a folder are repeatedly played back. t RPT @02 : A disc is repeatedly played back. t (off) ,.2 When an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected. • Ifa CD changer or an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected: After pressing F/SETUP to select the function mode (RPTIM.I.X.), perfonn the opemtion within 5 seconds. M.I.X. CJ 1 M.I.X.@*4 1 (off) : Only files in a folder are played back in random sequence. : Files are played back in random sequence. If an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected, all files in a disc are played back in random sequence, and playback shifts to the next disc. M.I.X. (Random Play) Press 5 CO in the play or pause mode. The tracks (files) on the disc will be played back in random sequence. To cancel M.I.X. play, press 5 CO again. Internal CD mode: M.I.X. : The tracks are played back in random sequence. ,(. (off) On discs utilizing CD Text. songs can be searched and played by using their recorded titles. For discs without CD Text. searches are made using the track numbers associated with each song. 1 Press C\lENT during play. This will set the search mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired track, and then press C\ lENT. This will play the selected track. • Press and hold :::::::'/ESCforat least 2 seconds in the search mode to cancel. Or, the search mode is canceled ifno opemtion is performed for 10 seconds. • When CD Text Search is made dUring M.I.X. play, the M.I.X. play mode will be canceled. ii-EN Repeat Play Press r::;:) 4 to play back repeatedly the track being played. The track (file) will be played repeatedly. Press r::;:) 4 again and select off to deactivate repeat play. CD mode: RPT : Only a track is repeatedly played back. t RPT @t :A disc is repeatedly played back. t (off) CD Changer mode : M.I.X. : The tracks are played back in random sequence. l M.I.X. @ ... : The tracks on all the CDs in the current magazine will be included in the random 1 playback sequence. (off) ,.J When a CD changer equipped with the AU M.I.X. function is connected. • /[M.I.X. is sella ON during RPT @ (REPEAT ALL) play in CD changer mode. M.l.X. will apply to the current disc only. MP3IWMAlAAC mode: Searching for CD Text ~ In the USB mode. allfiles stored in the USB memory are played back in mndom sequence, and the "MIX" indicator lights up. • When a song is played back during Random (M.IX) play in the USB mode. the song can be played back again mndomly even ifnot all songs on the USB Memory have been played back. • Ifa CD changer or an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected: After pressing F/SETUP to select the function mode (RPTIM.I.X.). perfann the opemtion within 5 seconds. .J When a CD changer is connected. • If RPT is set to ON during M.I.X. play in CD changer mode, M.IX will apply to the current disc only. MP3IWMAlAAC mode: RPT : Only a file is repeatedly played back. J. RPT CJ : Only files in a folder are repeatedly played back. t RPT @02 : A disc is repeatedly played back. t (off) ,.2 When an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected. • Ifa CD changer or an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected: After pressing F/SETUP to select the function mode (RPTIM.I.X.), perfonn the opemtion within 5 seconds. M.I.X. CJ 1 M.I.X.@*4 1 (off) : Only files in a folder are played back in random sequence. : Files are played back in random sequence. If an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected, all files in a disc are played back in random sequence, and playback shifts to the next disc. M.I.X. (Random Play) Press 5 CO in the play or pause mode. The tracks (files) on the disc will be played back in random sequence. To cancel M.I.X. play, press 5 CO again. Internal CD mode: M.I.X. : The tracks are played back in random sequence. ,(. (off) On discs utilizing CD Text. songs can be searched and played by using their recorded titles. For discs without CD Text. searches are made using the track numbers associated with each song. 1 Press C\lENT during play. This will set the search mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired track, and then press C\ lENT. This will play the selected track. • Press and hold :::::::'/ESCforat least 2 seconds in the search mode to cancel. Or, the search mode is canceled ifno opemtion is performed for 10 seconds. • When CD Text Search is made dUring M.I.X. play, the M.I.X. play mode will be canceled. ii-EN

(concerning MP3/WMA/AAC) Folder and file names may be searched and displayed during playback. 1 During MP3IWMAJAAC playback, press ~/ENT to activate the search mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select Folder Name Search mode or File Name Search mode, and then press ~ lENT. Folder Name Search mode 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired folder. 4 Press and hold ~IENT for at least 2 seconds to play back the first file In the selected folder. • Press and hold ~/ESCfor at least 2 seconds in the search mode to cancel. Or, the search mode is canceled ifno operation is performed for 10 seconds. • To search for files in the Folder Name Search mode, press ~/ENT. Files in the folder may be searched. • Press ~/ESC to exit Folder Name Search mode in step 3 in order to select File Name Search mode. • The root folder ofdisc is displayed as blank. • When Folder Name Search is made during M.I.X. play, the M.I.X. play mode will be canceled. File Name Search mode 3 Press ~ or • to select another Folder. 4 Select the desired file by turning the Rotary encoder. 5 Press ~ lENT to play back the selected file. • Press and hold ~/ESCforatleast 2 seconds in the search mode to cancel. Or, the search mode is canceled ifno operation is performed for 10 seconds. • Press ~/ESC in the search mode to return to the previous mode. • When File Name Search is made during M.l.X. play, the M.I.K. play mode will be canceled. Quick Search You can search for tracks (files). 1 Press and hold ~/ENT for at least 2 seconds in the CD/ChangerIMP3IWMAJAAC mode to activate Quick Search mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select a desired track (file). The selected track is played back immediately. • Press and hold ~/ESCforatleast 2 seconds in the search mode to cancel. Or, the search mode is canceled ifno operation is performed for 10 seconds. 12-EN About MP3/WMA/AAC CAUTION Except for private use, duplicating audio data (including MP31 WMAlAAC data) or distributing, transferring, or copying it, whetherfor free orfor a fee, without permission ofthe copyright holder is strictly prohibited by the Copyright Act and by international treaty. What Is MP3? MP3, whose official name is "MPEG-l Audio Layer 3," is a compression standard prescribed by the ISO. the International Standardization Organization and MPEG which is a joint activity institution of the IEC. MP3 files contain compressed audio data. MP3 encoding is capable of compressing audio data at extremely high ratios, reducing the size of music files to as much as one-tenth their original size. This is achieved while still maintaining near CD quality. The MP3 format realizes such high compression ratios by eliminating the sounds that are either inaudible to the human ear or masked by other sounds. WhatlsAAC? AAC is the abbreviation for "Advanced Audio Coding", and is a basic format of audio compression used by MPEG2 or MPEG4. What Is WMA? WMA, or "Windows Media™ Audio," is compressed audio data. WMA is similar to MP3 audio data and can achieve CD quality sound with small file sizes. Method for creating MP3IWMAlAAC flies Audio data is compressed using software with MP3/WMNAAC codecs. For details on creating MP3/WMNAAC files. refer to the user's manual for that software. MP3/WMNAAC files that are playable on this device have the file extensions. MP3: "mp3" WMA: "wma" (ver. 7.1, 8 and 9 are supported) AAC: "m4a" There are many different versions of the AAC format. Confirm that the software being used conforms to the acceptable formats listed above. It's possible that the format may be unplayable even though the extension is valid. Playback of AAC files encoded by iTunes is supported. File/Folder Name Search (concerning MP3/WMA/AAC) Folder and file names may be searched and displayed during playback. 1 During MP3IWMAJAAC playback, press ~/ENT to activate the search mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select Folder Name Search mode or File Name Search mode, and then press ~ lENT. Folder Name Search mode 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired folder. 4 Press and hold ~IENT for at least 2 seconds to play back the first file In the selected folder. • Press and hold ~/ESCfor at least 2 seconds in the search mode to cancel. Or, the search mode is canceled ifno operation is performed for 10 seconds. • To search for files in the Folder Name Search mode, press ~/ENT. Files in the folder may be searched. • Press ~/ESC to exit Folder Name Search mode in step 3 in order to select File Name Search mode. • The root folder ofdisc is displayed as blank. • When Folder Name Search is made during M.I.X. play, the M.I.X. play mode will be canceled. File Name Search mode 3 Press ~ or • to select another Folder. 4 Select the desired file by turning the Rotary encoder. 5 Press ~ lENT to play back the selected file. • Press and hold ~/ESCforatleast 2 seconds in the search mode to cancel. Or, the search mode is canceled ifno operation is performed for 10 seconds. • Press ~/ESC in the search mode to return to the previous mode. • When File Name Search is made during M.l.X. play, the M.I.K. play mode will be canceled. Quick Search You can search for tracks (files). 1 Press and hold ~/ENT for at least 2 seconds in the CD/ChangerIMP3IWMAJAAC mode to activate Quick Search mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select a desired track (file). The selected track is played back immediately. • Press and hold ~/ESCforatleast 2 seconds in the search mode to cancel. Or, the search mode is canceled ifno operation is performed for 10 seconds. 12-EN About MP3/WMA/AAC CAUTION Except for private use, duplicating audio data (including MP31 WMAlAAC data) or distributing, transferring, or copying it, whetherfor free orfor a fee, without permission ofthe copyright holder is strictly prohibited by the Copyright Act and by international treaty. What Is MP3? MP3, whose official name is "MPEG-l Audio Layer 3," is a compression standard prescribed by the ISO. the International Standardization Organization and MPEG which is a joint activity institution of the IEC. MP3 files contain compressed audio data. MP3 encoding is capable of compressing audio data at extremely high ratios, reducing the size of music files to as much as one-tenth their original size. This is achieved while still maintaining near CD quality. The MP3 format realizes such high compression ratios by eliminating the sounds that are either inaudible to the human ear or masked by other sounds. WhatlsAAC? AAC is the abbreviation for "Advanced Audio Coding", and is a basic format of audio compression used by MPEG2 or MPEG4. What Is WMA? WMA, or "Windows Media™ Audio," is compressed audio data. WMA is similar to MP3 audio data and can achieve CD quality sound with small file sizes. Method for creating MP3IWMAlAAC flies Audio data is compressed using software with MP3/WMNAAC codecs. For details on creating MP3/WMNAAC files. refer to the user's manual for that software. MP3/WMNAAC files that are playable on this device have the file extensions. MP3: "mp3" WMA: "wma" (ver. 7.1, 8 and 9 are supported) AAC: "m4a" There are many different versions of the AAC format. Confirm that the software being used conforms to the acceptable formats listed above. It's possible that the format may be unplayable even though the extension is valid. Playback of AAC files encoded by iTunes is supported.

MP3 Sampling rates: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, 12 kHz, 11025 kHz, 8 kHz Bit rates: 32 - 320 kbps Order of flies Files are played back in the order that the writing software writes them to the disc. Therefore, the playback order may not be what is expected. Verify the writing order in the software's documentation. The playback order of the folders and files is as follows. WMA Sampling rates: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz Bit rates: 48 - 192 kbps AAC Sampling rates: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz Bit rates: 16 - 320 kbps This device may not play back correctly depending on sampling rates. In the USB mode, the playback time may not be correctly displayed when a VBR (Variable Bit Rate) recorded file is played back. 103 tagsIWMA tags This device supports 103 tag v1 and v2, and WMA tag. If tag data is in an MP3/WMA/AAC file, this device can display the title (track title), artist name, and album name 103 tag/WMA tag data. This device can only display single-byte alphanumeric characters (up to 30 for 103 tags and up to 15 for WMA tags) and the underscore. For non-supported characters, the display is blank. The tag information may not be correctly displayed, depending on the contents. Folder D MP3IWMAJAAC File Playing back MP3IWMAlAAC MP3/WMA/AAC files are prepared, then written to a CD-R, CD-RW using CD-R writing software or stored to a USB memory. A disc can hold up to 510 files/folders (including Root Folders), and the maximum number of folders is 255. This unit can recognize at least 100 folders (including root folder) and 100 files per folder stored in USB memory. Playback may not be performed if a disc or USB memory exceeds the limitations described above. Do not make a file's playback time more than 1 hour. Media supported The media that this device can play back are CD-ROMs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs. This device also can play back USB memory media. Corresponding File Systems This device supports discs formatted with IS09660 Level 1 or Level 2. Under the IS09660 standard, there are some restrictions to remember. The maximum nested folder depth is 8 (including the root directory). The number of characters for a folder/file name is limited. Valid characters for folder/file names are letters A-Z (all caps), numbers 0-9, and '_' (underscore). This device can play back discs in Joliet, Romeo, etc., and other standards that conform to IS09660. However, sometimes the file names, folder names, etc., are not displayed correctly. This device also supports FAT 12/16/32 for USB memory device. Formats supported This device supports CD-ROM XA, Mixed Mode CD, Enhanced CD (CD-Extra) and Multi-Session. This device cannot correctly play back discs recorded with Track At Once or packet writing. • The folder No.1folder Name will not be displayed if no file is contained in the folder. Tel1l1ino Bit rate This is the "sound" compression rate specifiedfor encoding. The higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but also the larger the files. Sampling rate This value shows how many times per second the data is sampled (recorded). For exnmple, music CDs use a sampling rate of44. / kHz, so the sound is sampled (recorded) 44,/00 times per second. The higher the sampling rate. the higher the sound quality, but also the larger the volume ofdata. Encoding Convening music CDs, WAVE (AlFF)files. and other soundfiles into the specified audio compression format. Tag Song information such as track titles, anist names, album names, etc., written into MP3IWMNAAC files. Root folder The root folder (or root directory) is found at the top ofthe file system. The root folder contains allfolders andfiles. It is created automaticallyfor all burned discs. 13-EN Supported playback sampling rates and bit rates MP3 Sampling rates: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, 12 kHz, 11025 kHz, 8 kHz Bit rates: 32 - 320 kbps Order of flies Files are played back in the order that the writing software writes them to the disc. Therefore, the playback order may not be what is expected. Verify the writing order in the software's documentation. The playback order of the folders and files is as follows. WMA Sampling rates: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz Bit rates: 48 - 192 kbps AAC Sampling rates: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz Bit rates: 16 - 320 kbps This device may not play back correctly depending on sampling rates. In the USB mode, the playback time may not be correctly displayed when a VBR (Variable Bit Rate) recorded file is played back. 103 tagsIWMA tags This device supports 103 tag v1 and v2, and WMA tag. If tag data is in an MP3/WMA/AAC file, this device can display the title (track title), artist name, and album name 103 tag/WMA tag data. This device can only display single-byte alphanumeric characters (up to 30 for 103 tags and up to 15 for WMA tags) and the underscore. For non-supported characters, the display is blank. The tag information may not be correctly displayed, depending on the contents. Folder D MP3IWMAJAAC File Playing back MP3IWMAlAAC MP3/WMA/AAC files are prepared, then written to a CD-R, CD-RW using CD-R writing software or stored to a USB memory. A disc can hold up to 510 files/folders (including Root Folders), and the maximum number of folders is 255. This unit can recognize at least 100 folders (including root folder) and 100 files per folder stored in USB memory. Playback may not be performed if a disc or USB memory exceeds the limitations described above. Do not make a file's playback time more than 1 hour. Media supported The media that this device can play back are CD-ROMs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs. This device also can play back USB memory media. Corresponding File Systems This device supports discs formatted with IS09660 Level 1 or Level 2. Under the IS09660 standard, there are some restrictions to remember. The maximum nested folder depth is 8 (including the root directory). The number of characters for a folder/file name is limited. Valid characters for folder/file names are letters A-Z (all caps), numbers 0-9, and '_' (underscore). This device can play back discs in Joliet, Romeo, etc., and other standards that conform to IS09660. However, sometimes the file names, folder names, etc., are not displayed correctly. This device also supports FAT 12/16/32 for USB memory device. Formats supported This device supports CD-ROM XA, Mixed Mode CD, Enhanced CD (CD-Extra) and Multi-Session. This device cannot correctly play back discs recorded with Track At Once or packet writing. • The folder No.1folder Name will not be displayed if no file is contained in the folder. Tel1l1ino Bit rate This is the "sound" compression rate specifiedfor encoding. The higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but also the larger the files. Sampling rate This value shows how many times per second the data is sampled (recorded). For exnmple, music CDs use a sampling rate of44. / kHz, so the sound is sampled (recorded) 44,/00 times per second. The higher the sampling rate. the higher the sound quality, but also the larger the volume ofdata. Encoding Convening music CDs, WAVE (AlFF)files. and other soundfiles into the specified audio compression format. Tag Song information such as track titles, anist names, album names, etc., written into MP3IWMNAAC files. Root folder The root folder (or root directory) is found at the top ofthe file system. The root folder contains allfolders andfiles. It is created automaticallyfor all burned discs. 13-EN

Adjusting Subwoofer Level/Bass Level/ Treble Level/Balance (Between Left and Right)/Fader (Between Front and Rear)/ Defeat SOURCEI Rotary ancoder (AUDIO-LOUD) BAND Q"lENT ~IESC SOUND SETUP You can change the Subwoofer Level to create your own tonai preference. 1 Press SOUND SETUP to activate the Sound Setting mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the SUBW. Level Adjustment mode, and then press Q"/ENT. SUBW Level-J H Bass-z H Treble-z H HPF-z H Black Out H SUBW Level 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired subwoofer level (0-+15). • Ifno operation is performedfor 15 seconds, the unit will return to normal mode automatically. _J When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. Refer to "Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF" (page 16). The adjustment can also be made by pressing Rotary encoder (AUDIO). Refer to "Adjusting Subwoofer Level/Bass Level/Treble Level/Balance (Between Left and Right)/Fader (Between Front and Rear)/Defeat" (page 14). .z The function is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. 1 Press Rotary encoder (AUDIO) repeatedly to choose the desired mode. Each press changes the mode as follows: SUBWOOFER- ~ BASS ~ TREBLE ~ BALANCE ~ FADER ~ DEFEAT ~ VOLUME ~ SUBWOOFER Subwoofer level: a- +15 Bass level: -7 - +7 Treble level: -7 - +7 Balance: U5 - R15 Fader: R15 - F15 Defeat: ON/OFF Volume: a- 35 • If no operation is performedfor 5 seconds after selecting the SUBWOOFER, BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, FADER, VOLUME or DEFEAT mode, the unit automatically returns to normal mode. - When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. Refer to "Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF" (page 16). 2 Turn the Rotary encoder until the desired sound Is obtained In each mode. By setting Defeat ON, previously adjusted settings of BASS and TREBLE will return to the factory defaults. • Depending on the connected devices, some functions and display indications do not work. 14-EN Setting the Bass Control You can change the Bass Frequency emphasis to create your own tonal preference. 1 Press SOUND SETUP to activate the Sound Setting mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Bass Adjustment mode, and then press Q"/ENT. SUBW Level-J H Bass-4 H Treble-4 H HPF-4 H Black Out H SUBW Level 3-1 Press BAND to select the desired bass center frequency. 80 Hz ~ 100 Hz ~ 200 Hz ~ 60 Hz ~ 80 Hz Emphasizes lhe displayed bass frequency ranges. 3-2 Press SOURCE/ to select the desired bass bandwidth. GNa~:W)~....~~.....~.....~~.....~-) (~~e)~ Changes the boosted bass bandwidth to wide or narrow. A wider setting will boost a wide range of frequencies above and below the center frequency. A narrower setting will boost only frequencies near the center frequency. Sound Setting Setting the Subwoofer Level Adjusting Subwoofer Level/Bass Level/ Treble Level/Balance (Between Left and Right)/Fader (Between Front and Rear)/ Defeat SOURCEI Rotary ancoder (AUDIO-LOUD) BAND Q"lENT ~IESC SOUND SETUP You can change the Subwoofer Level to create your own tonal preference. 1 Press SOUND SETUP to activate the Sound Setting mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the SUBW. Level Adjustment mode, and then press Q"/ENT. SUBW Level-J H Bass-z H Treble-z H HPF-z H Black Out H SUBW Level 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired subwoofer level (0-+15). • Ifno operation is performedfor 15 seconds, the unit will return to normal mode automatically. _J When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. Refer to "Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF" (page 16). The adjustment can also be made by pressing Rotary encoder (AUDIO). Refer to "Adjusting Subwoofer Level/Bass Level/Treble Level/Balance (Between Left and Right)lFader (Between Front and Rear)lDefeat" (page 14). .z The function is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. 1 Press Rotary encoder (AUDIO) repeatedly to choose the desired mode. Each press changes the mode as follows: SUBWOOFER- ~ BASS ~ TREBLE ~ BALANCE ~ FADER ~ DEFEAT ~ VOLUME ~ SUBWOOFER Subwoofer level: a- +15 Bass level: -7 - +7 Treble level: -7 - +7 Balance: U5 - R15 Fader: R15 - F15 Defeat: ON/OFF Volume: a- 35 • If no operation is performedfor 5 seconds after selecting the SUBWOOFER, BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, FADER, VOLUME or DEFEAT mode, the unit automatically returns to normal mode. - When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. Refer to "Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF" (page 16). 2 Turn the Rotary encoder until the desired sound Is obtained In each mode. By setting Defeat ON, previously adjusted settings of BASS and TREBLE will return to the factory defaults. • Depending on the connected devices, some functions and display indications do not work. 14-EN Setting the Bass Control You can change the Bass Frequency emphasis to create your own tonal preference. 1 Press SOUND SETUP to activate the Sound Setting mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Bass Adjustment mode, and then press Q"/ENT. SUBW Level-J H Bass-4 H Treble-4 H HPF-4 H Black Out H SUBW Level 3-1 Press BAND to select the desired bass center frequency. 80 Hz ~ 100 Hz ~ 200 Hz ~ 60 Hz ~ 80 Hz Emphasizes lhe displayed bass frequency ranges. 3-2 Press SOURCE/ to select the desired bass bandwidth. GNa~:W)~....~~.....~.....~~.....~-) (~~e)~ Changes the boosted bass bandwidth to wide or narrow. A wider setting will boost a wide range of frequencies above and below the center frequency. A narrower setting will boost only frequencies near the center frequency.

bass level (-7-+7). You can emphasize or weaken the bass level. 4 Press and hold ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • If no operation is performedfor 15 seconds, the unit will return to normal mode automatically. • The bass level settings will be individually memorizedfor each source (FM, AM, CD, etc.) until the setting is changed. The bass frequency and bass bandwidth settings adjustedfor one source are effective for all other sources (FM, AM, CD, etc.). • Depending on the connected devices, somefunctions and display indications do not work. However, Bass Level is still adjustable ifan audio processor with the Bass function is connected. •3 When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. Refer to "Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF" (page 16). 04 Thefunction is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. •5 The adjustment can also be made by pressing Rotary encoder (AUDIO). Refer to "Adjusting Subwoofer Level/Bass Level/Treble Level/Balance (Between Left and Right)/Fader (Between Front and Rear)/Defeat" (page 14). Setting the Treble Control You can change the Treble Frequency emphasis to create your own tonal preference. 1 Press SOUND SETUP to activate the Sound Setting mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Treble Adjustment mode, and then press Q./ENT. SUBW Level,6 H Bass,7 H Treble,7 H HPF,7 H Black Out H SUBW Level 3-1 Press BAND to select the desired treble center frequency. 10 kHz ~ 12.5 kHz ~ 15 kHz ~ 17.5 kHz ~ 10 kHz Emphasizes the displayed treble frequency ranges. 3-2'Brurn the Rotary encoder to select the desired treble level (-7-+7). You can emphasize or weaken the treble level. 4 Press and hold ~/ESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • If no operation is performedfor 15 seconds, the unit will return to normal mode automatically. • The treble level settings will be individually memorizedfor each source (FM. AM, CD, etc.) until the setting is changed. The Treble frequency settings adjusted for one source are effective for all other sources (FM, AM, CD, etc.). • Depending on the connected devices, some functions and display indications do not work. However, Treble Level is still adjustable if an audio processor with the Treble function is connected. ,.6 When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. Refer to "Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF" (page 16). ,7 The function is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. ,.8 The adjustment can also be made by pressing Rotary encoder (AUDIO). Refer to "Adjusting Subwoofer Level/Bass Level/Treble Level/Balance (Between Left and Right)/Fader (Between Front and Rear)/Defeat" (page 14). Adjusting the High Pass Filter The High Pass Filter on this unit can be adjusted to suit your personal taste. 1 Press SOUND SETUP to activate the Sound Setting mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the High Pass Filter (HPF) Adjustment mode, and then press Q.IENT. SUBW Level,9 H Bass,lo H Treble,lo H HPF'JO H Black Out H SUBW Level 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the High Pass Filter frequency. OFF H 80 Hz H 120 Hz H 160 Hz 4 Press and hold ~ IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • If no operation is performedfor 15 seconds, the unit will return to normal mode automatically. • When an external audio processor is connected, this setting cannot be made. ,9 When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. Refer to "Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF" (page 16). ,10 Thefunction is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. i5-EN 3-3'5Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired bass level (-7-+7). You can emphasize or weaken the bass level. 4 Press and hold ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • If no operation is performedfor 15 seconds, the unit will return to normal mode automatically. • The bass level settings will be individually memorizedfor each source (FM, AM, CD, etc.) until the setting is changed. The bass frequency and bass bandwidth settings adjustedfor one source are effective for all other sources (FM, AM, CD, etc.). • Depending on the connected devices, somefunctions and display indications do not work. However. Bass Level is still adjustable ifan audio processor with the Bass function is connected. •3 When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. Refer to "Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF" (page 16). 04 Thefunction is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. •5 The adjustment can also be made by pressing Rotary encoder (AUDIO). Refer to "Adjusting Subwoofer Level/Bass Level/Treble Level/Balance (Between Left and Right)lFader (Between Front and Rear)lDefeat" (page 14). Setting the Treble Control You can change the Treble Frequency emphasis to create your own tonal preference. 1 Press SOUND SETUP to activate the Sound Setting mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Treble Adjustment mode, and then press Q./ENT. SUBW Level,6 H Bass,7 H Treble,7 H HPF,7 H Black Out H SUBW Level 3-1 Press BAND to select the desired treble center frequency. 10 kHz ~ 12.5 kHz ~ 15 kHz ~ 17.5 kHz ~ 10 kHz Emphasizes the displayed treble frequency ranges. 3-2'Brurn the Rotary encoder to select the desired treble level (-7-+7). You can emphasize or weaken the treble level. 4 Press and hold ~/ESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • If no operation is performedfor 15 seconds, the unit will return to normal mode automatically. • The treble level settings will be individually memorizedfor each source (FM. AM, CD, etc.) until the setting is changed. The Treble frequency settings adjusted for one source are effective for all other sources (FM, AM, CD, etc.). • Depending on the connected devices, some functions and display indications do not work. However. Treble Level is still adjustable if an audio processor with the Treble function is connected. ,.6 When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. Refer to "Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF" (page 16). ,7 The function is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. ,.8 The adjustment can also be made by pressing Rotary encoder (AUDIO). Refer to "Adjusting Subwoofer Level/Bass Level/Treble Level/Balance (Between Left and Right)lFader (Between Front and Rear)/Defeat" (page 14). Adjusting the High Pass Filter The High Pass Filter on this unit can be adjusted to suit your personal taste. 1 Press SOUND SETUP to activate the Sound Setting mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the High Pass Filter (HPF) Adjustment mode, and then press Q.IENT. SUBW Level,9 H Bass,lo H Treble,lo H HPF'JO H Black Out H SUBW Level 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the High Pass Filter frequency. OFF H 80 Hz H 120 Hz H 160 Hz 4 Press and hold ~ IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • If no operation is performedfor 15 seconds, the unit will return to normal mode automatically. • When an external audio processor is connected, this setting cannot be made. ,9 When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. Refer to "Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF" (page 16). ,10 Thefunction is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. i5-EN

When Blackout mode is turned on, all display indications on this unit will tum off to reduce power consumption. This additional power enhances the sound quality. 1 Press SOUND SETUP to activate the Sound Setting mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Black Out Adjustment mode, and then press <\/ENT. SUBW Level·JI H Bass·12 H Treble·12 H HPF·12 H Black Out H SUBW Level 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Black Out ON. OFF (Initial setting) H ON 4 Press and hold ~/ESC for at least 2 seconds to cancel the Sound Setting mode, then after 5 seconds the Blackout Mode Is activated. • When Black Out is set to ON. after 5 seconds. all display on the unit will tum off. • Ifany button on the unit is pressed during the blackout mode. the function will be displayedfor 5 seconds to show the operation before returning to Blackout mode. To cancel Blackout mode, select OFF in step 3. .1I When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. Refer to "Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF" (page 16). • 12 The function is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. Turning Loudness On/Off Loudness introduces a special low-and high-frequency emphasis at low listening levels. This compensates for the ear's decreased sensitivity to bass and treble sound. Press and hold Rotary encoder (LOUD) for at least 2 seconds to activate or deactivate the loudness mode. "LOUD" indicator lights. • When an external audio processor is connected. this setting cannot be made. • The function is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. 16-EN Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF When the subwoofer is on, you can adjust the subwoofer output level (refer to page 14), 1 Press and hold SOUND SETUP for at least 2 seconds to activate the Subwoofer selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Subwoofer mode, and then press <\/ENT. Subwoofer H SUBW System 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select Subwoofer ONI OFF, and then press <\lENT. OFF H ON (Initial setting) 4 Press and hold ~/ESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • lfno operation is performedfor 15 seconds. the unit will return to normal mode automatically. Setting the Subwoofer System When the subwoofer is on, you can select either System I or System2 for the desired subwoofer effect. 1 Press and hold SOUND SETUP for at least 2 seconds to activate the Subwoofer selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the SUBW. System mode, and then press <\lENT. Subwoofer H SUBW System 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select Subwoofer System, and then press <\lENT. Select either System 1 or System 2 for the desired subwoofer effect. 1 (Initial setting) H 2 System 1: Subwoofer level changes according the main volume setting. System 2: Subwoofer level change is different from the main volume setting. For example, even at low volume settings, the subwoofer is still audible. 4 Press and hold ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • lfno operation is performedfor 15 seconds. the unit will return to normal mode automatically. • This function is inoperable when Subwoofer is set to OFF. Blackout Mode On and Off When Blackout mode is turned on, all display indications on this unit will tum off to reduce power consumption. This additional power enhances the sound quality. 1 Press SOUND SETUP to activate the Sound Setting mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Black Out Adjustment mode, and then press <\/ENT. SUBW Level·JI H Bass·12 H Treble·12 H HPF·12 H Black Out H SUBW Level 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Black Out ON. OFF (Initial setting) H ON 4 Press and hold ~/ESC for at least 2 seconds to cancel the Sound Setting mode, then after 5 seconds the Blackout Mode Is activated. • When Black Out is set to ON. after 5 seconds. all display on the unit will tum off. • Ifany button on the unit is pressed during the blackout mode. the function will be displayedfor 5 seconds to show the operation before returning to Blackout mode. To cancel Blackout mode, select OFF in step 3. .1I When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. Refer to "Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF" (page 16). • 12 The function is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. Turning Loudness On/Off Loudness introduces a special low-and high-frequency emphasis at low listening levels. This compensates for the ear's decreased sensitivity to bass and treble sound. Press and hold Rotary encoder (LOUD) for at least 2 seconds to activate or deactivate the loudness mode. "LOUD" indicator lights. • When an external audio processor is connected. this setting cannot be made. • The function is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. 16-EN Turning Subwoofer ON/OFF When the subwoofer is on, you can adjust the subwoofer output level (refer to page 14), 1 Press and hold SOUND SETUP for at least 2 seconds to activate the Subwoofer selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Subwoofer mode, and then press <\/ENT. Subwoofer H SUBW System 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select Subwoofer ONI OFF, and then press <\lENT. OFF H ON (Initial setting) 4 Press and hold ~/ESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • lfno operation is performedfor 15 seconds. the unit will return to normal mode automatically. Setting the Subwoofer System When the subwoofer is on, you can select either System I or System2 for the desired subwoofer effect. 1 Press and hold SOUND SETUP for at least 2 seconds to activate the Subwoofer selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the SUBW. System mode, and then press <\lENT. Subwoofer H SUBW System 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select Subwoofer System, and then press <\lENT. Select either System 1 or System 2 for the desired subwoofer effect. 1 (Initial setting) H 2 System 1: Subwoofer level changes according the main volume setting. System 2: Subwoofer level change is different from the main volume setting. For example, even at low volume settings, the subwoofer is still audible. 4 Press and hold ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • lfno operation is performedfor 15 seconds. the unit will return to normal mode automatically. • This function is inoperable when Subwoofer is set to OFF.

r----- Other Functions Displaying the Text Text infonnation, such as the disc name and the track name, will be displayed if playing a CD text compatible disc. It is also possible to display the folder name, the file name, and the tag, etc., while playing MP3IWMAlAAC files. The display in Bluetooth AUdio mode: The Following display will be shown only when a telephone or Bluetooth Streaming device with Metadata capabilities is correctly connected with a Bluetooth Interface Module. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual of the Bluetooth Interface Module. .1 Displayed during playback ofa disc with CD Text. ,.2 The root folder ofdisc is displayed as blank. The root folder ofUSB memory is displayed as "ROOT". •3 ID3 taglWMA tag Ifan MP3IWMAlAACjile contains ID3 taglWMA tag information. the ID3 taglWMA tag information is displayed (e.g., song name, anist name, and album name). All other tag data is ignored. -..4 When an HD Radio signal is received, text information such as Radio Station, Anist, etc., is displayed. •1_-..4 If there is no text information. nothing will be displayed. •5 RADIO STATION NAME can be switched between "Long" and "Shan" in "HD Radio Station Call Setting" (page 21 ). Displayed in I line when "Shan" is set, displayed in 2 lines when "Long" is set. ,.6 When the "Text Scroll" (page 21) is set to "Auto," the display cannot be switched by pressing VIEW The display contents switch alternately. •7 When a Bluetooth Audio signal is received. text information such as anist. album. song is displayed. Ifthere is no text information. "Anist"I"Album"I"Song" will be displayed. ~-----,>6 The dIsplay In HD RadIo mode: Press VIEW. The display will change every time the button is pressed. • When the Text Scroll is set to Manual, press and hold VIEWfor at least 2 seconds. the current text will be scrolled one time (except Radio mode). The display In RadIo mode: ~------, The dIsplay in CD mode: Text (Disc Name) */ Text (Track Narr",) " 17-EN r-------, >6 The display In MP3IWMAlAAC mode: r----- Other Functions Displaying the Text Text infonnation, such as the disc name and the track name, will be displayed if playing a CD text compatible disc. It is also possible to display the folder name, the file name, and the tag, etc., while playing MP3IWMAlAAC files. The display in Bluetooth AUdio mode: The Following display will be shown only when a telephone or Bluetooth Streaming device with Metadata capabilities is correctly connected with a Bluetooth Interface Module. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual of the Bluetooth Interface Module. .1 Displayed during playback ofa disc with CD Text. ,.2 The root folder ofdisc is displayed as blank. The root folder ofUSB memory is displayed as "ROOT". •3 ID3 taglWMA tag Ifan MP3IWMAlAACjile contains ID3 taglWMA tag information. the ID3 taglWMA tag information is displayed (e.g., song name, anist name, and album name). All other tag data is ignored. -..4 When an HD Radio signal is received, text information such as Radio Station, Anist, etc., is displayed. •1_-..4 If there is no text information. nothing will be displayed. •5 RADIO STATION NAME can be switched between "Long" and "Shan" in "HD Radio Station Call Setting" (page 21 ). Displayed in I line when "Shan" is set, displayed in 2 lines when "Long" is set. ,.6 When the "Text Scroll" (page 21) is set to "Auto," the display cannot be switched by pressing VIEW The display contents switch alternately. •7 When a Bluetooth Audio signal is received. text information such as anist. album. song is displayed. Ifthere is no text information. "Anist"I"Album"I"Song" will be displayed. ~-----,>6 The dIsplay In HD RadIo mode: Press VIEW. The display will change every time the button is pressed. • When the Text Scroll is set to Manual, press and hold VIEWfor at least 2 seconds. the current text will be scrolled one time (except Radio mode). The display In RadIo mode: ~------, The dIsplay in CD mode: Text (Disc Name) */ Text (Track Narr",) " 17-EN

When displaying Text, the following indicators are lit according to the mode. MP3NJMAI Indicatorl CD Mode AAC/USB SAT RADIO/HD iPod Model Mode AUDIO Radio Mode BT Audio Mode Folder Name .. - being - - displayed Artist Name Artist Name Artist Name ... - being being being displayed displayed displayed Album Name Album Name Album Name ~ - being being being displayed (HD displayed Radio only) displayed File Name • - being - - displayed a Text (Disc Name) being - - - displayed rl Text (Track Scng Name Song Name Song Name Name) being being being being displayed displayed displayed displayed Auxiliary Data In - - Field being - Fa displayed (XM Radio only) Channel NO.1 Channel Name [H - - being - displayed (XMI SIRIUS only) Category tR - - Name being - T. displayed (XM/ SIRIUS only) 10 NO. 1:1 - - (XM Radio - only) Composer ~ Name being - - displayed - (SIRIUS Radio only) Station Call S[ - - Letter being - L displayed (HD Radio only) SPS being SPS - - displayed - (HD Radio only) About "Text" Text: Text compatible CDs contain text information such as the disc name and track name. Such text information is referred to as "text". • Some characters may not be displayed correctly with this device. depending on the character rype. • The CD changer must also be CD Text compatible for the Text informarion to be displayed. • Ifthere is no TEXT informarion. the display is blank. • The text or tag information may not be correctly displayed. depending on the contents. i8-EN Displaying Time Press VIEW repeatedly until the time Is displayed. Each press changes the display. For details, see "Displaying the Text" (page 17). • Selecting any tuner or CD function while in the clock prioriry mode will interrupt the time display momentarily. The function selected will be displayed for about 5 seconds before the time returns to the display. About the Indication display When displaying Text, the following indicators are lit according to the mode. MP3NJMAI Indicatorl CD Mode AAC/USB SAT RADIO/HD iPod Model Mode AUDIO Radio Mode BT Audio Mode Folder Name .. - being - - displayed Artist Name Artist Name Artist Name ... - being being being displayed displayed displayed Album Name Album Name Album Name ~ - being being being displayed (HD displayed Radio only) displayed File Name • - being - - displayed a Text (Disc Name) being - - - displayed rl Text (Track Scng Name Song Name Song Name Name) being being being being displayed displayed displayed displayed Auxiliary Data In - - Field being - Fa displayed (XM Radio only) Channel NO.1 Channel Name [H - - being - displayed (XMI SIRIUS only) Category tR - - Name being - T. displayed (XM/ SIRIUS only) 10 NO. 1:1 - - (XM Radio - only) Composer ~ Name being - - displayed - (SIRIUS Radio only) Station Call S[ - - Letter being - L displayed (HD Radio only) SPS being SPS - - displayed - (HD Radio only) About "Text" Text: Text compatible CDs contain text information such as the disc name and track name. Such text information is referred to as "text". • Some characters may not be displayed correctly with this device. depending on the character rype. • The CD changer must also be CD Text compatible for the Text informalion to be displayed. • Ifthere is no TEXT informalion. the display is blank. • The text or tag information may not be correctly displayed. depending on the contents. i8-EN Displaying Time Press VIEW repeatedly until the time Is displayed. Each press changes the display. For details, see "Displaying the Text" (page 17). • Selecting any tuner or CD function while in the clock prioriry mode will interrupt the time display momentarily. The function selected will be displayed for about 5 seconds before the time returns to the display.

usage. From the SETUP menu, General Setting, Display Setting, etc., can be modified. Setting the Bluetooth IN Connection Bluetooth IN ADAPTER I Bluetooth IN OFF (Inltlsl Setting) Set ADAPTER when the Bluetooth Box is connected. • Ifthe Bluetooth Box compatible with the Voice Dial function is connected. the Voice Dial function can be used. Select Bluetooth from the setup main menu in step2 above. If an optional Bluetooth Box is connected, you can place a hands-free call by a Bluetooth- equipped mobile phone. Make this setting when the Bluetooth Box is connected and the Bluetooth function is used. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual of the optional Bluetooth Box. • Pressing ~IESC returns 10 the previous SETUP mode. • If no operation is performedfor 60 seconds. SETUP is canceled. 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to change the setting, and then press C\lENT. (e.g. Select AUX IN ON or AUX IN OFF) 5 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. I,1 ---,~: ; .. ~ Use steps 1 to 5 to select one of the SETUP modes to modify. See the applicable section below for details about the selected SETUP Item. SOURCEI Rotary encoder BAND C\IENT ~IESC 1 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to activate the SETUP selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired Item, and then press C\IENT. Bluetooth*1 H General H Display H XM"2/SIRIUS,,.I H HD Radio,.4 H Bluetooth (e.g. Select General) • 1 Displayed only when INT Mute is OFF and the mode is set to other than Bluetooth Audio. ,,2 Only when XM Radio is connected. For the XM Radio setting. refer to "SAT Radio Receiver (Optional)" (page 22). ".I Only when SIRIUS Radio is connected. For the XM Radio sening, refer to "SAT Radio Receiver (Optional)" (page 22). ,.4 Only when HD Radio is connected. 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select a setting item, and then press C\ lENT. (e.g. Select AUX IN) Bluetooth: Bluetooth IN General: Birthday Set H Clock Mode H Clock Adjust05 H Calendar H Play Mode H Beep HINT Mute06 H AUX+ Setup H AUX+ Name*! H AUX IN GAIN*7 H Digital AUX H D.AUX Name,.8 H AUX IN H AUX Name*9 H Changer Name H Power IC H Language Set H Demo H Birthday Set Display: Dimmer H Dimmer Level H Scroll Type H Text Scroll H Font Select H BGV Select H Opening MSG H Dimmer XM: XMADF SIRIUS: Game Alert HD Radio: Station Call H Digital Seek H Station Call *5 Refer 10 "Setting the TIme and Calendar" (page 8). 06 Displayed only when Bluetooth IN is OFF. *7 Displayed only when AUX+ is ON. ,.8 Displayed only when Digital AUX is ON. .9 Displayed only when AUX IN is ON. !"General 88ttlns ~ .p' . . _.••.-,j, General is selected on the setup main menu in step 2. Birthday Opening Message Setting (Birthday Set) mmldd By inputting your birthday details, a message can be displayed on that day. Turn the Rotary encoder to set "mm" (Month), and then press C\IENT. Turn the Rotary encoder again to set "dd" (Date). Setting the Clock Display (Clock Mode) AM (Before noon) 12:00 (12-hour) (Inltlsl setting) I 00:00 (24-hour) You can select the clock display type, l2-hour or 24-hour, depending on your preference. Setting of Calendar Display Pattern Switching (Calendar) dd/mmlyyyy I yyyylmmldd I mmlddlyyyy (Initisl setting) You can switch the calendar display pattern to be shown when the time is displayed. yyyy : shows the year mm : shows the month dd : shows the day ex. dd/mm/yyyy ~ 25/12/2007 Playing MP3IWMAJAAC Data (Play Mode) CD-DA (Initlsl setting) I CDDA&MP3IWMA This unit can play back CDs containing both CD and MP3 fWMNAAC data (created in Enhanced CD (CD Extra) format). However, in some situations, playback of an enhanced CD may be difficult. In this case, you can select playback of a single session only, containing the CD data. When a disc contains both CD and MP3fWMNAAC data, playback starts from the CD data portion of the disc. CD-DA: Only the CD data in Session 1 can be played back. CDDA&MP3IWMA: CD data, MP3/WMNAAC files in mixed mode, and multi-session discs can be played back. • Perform this setting before inserting a disc. Ifa disc has already been inserted, remove it first. (If you use an MP3 changer, you have to change discs.) 19-EN SETUP You can flexibly customize the unit to suit your own preferences and usage. From the SETUP menu, General Setting, Display Setting, etc., can be modified. Setting the Bluetooth IN Connection Bluetooth IN ADAPTER I Bluetooth IN OFF (Inltlsl Setting) Set ADAPTER when the Bluetooth Box is connected. • Ifthe Bluetooth Box compatible with the Voice Dial function is connected. the Voice Dial function can be used. Select Bluetooth from the setup main menu in step2 above. If an optional Bluetooth Box is connected, you can place a hands-free call by a Bluetooth- equipped mobile phone. Make this setting when the Bluetooth Box is connected and the Bluetooth function is used. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual of the optional Bluetooth Box. • Pressing ~IESC returns 10 the previous SETUP mode. • If no operation is performedfor 60 seconds. SETUP is canceled. 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to change the setting, and then press C\lENT. (e.g. Select AUX IN ON or AUX IN OFF) 5 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. I,1 ---,~: ; .. ~ Use steps 1 to 5 to select one of the SETUP modes to modify. See the applicable section below for details about the selected SETUP Item. SOURCEI Rotary encoder BAND C\IENT ~IESC 1 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to activate the SETUP selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired Item, and then press C\IENT. Bluetooth*1 H General H Display H XM"2/SIRIUS,,.I H HD Radio,.4 H Bluetooth (e.g. Select General) • 1 Displayed only when INT Mute is OFF and the mode is set to other than Bluetooth Audio. ,,2 Only when XM Radio is connected. For the XM Radio setting. refer to "SAT Radio Receiver (Optional)" (page 22). ".I Only when SIRIUS Radio is connected. For the XM Radio sening, refer to "SAT Radio Receiver (Optional)" (page 22). ,.4 Only when HD Radio is connected. 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select a setting item, and then press C\ lENT. (e.g. Select AUX IN) Bluetooth: Bluetooth IN General: Birthday Set H Clock Mode H Clock Adjust05 H Calendar H Play Mode H Beep HINT Mute06 H AUX+ Setup H AUX+ Name*! H AUX IN GAIN*7 H Digital AUX H D.AUX Name,.8 H AUX IN H AUX Name*9 H Changer Name H Power IC H Language Set H Demo H Birthday Set Display: Dimmer H Dimmer Level H Scroll Type H Text Scroll H Font Select H BGV Select H Opening MSG H Dimmer XM: XMADF SIRIUS: Game Alert HD Radio: Station Call H Digital Seek H Station Call *5 Refer 10 "Setting the TIme and Calendar" (page 8). 06 Displayed only when Bluetooth IN is OFF. *7 Displayed only when AUX+ is ON. ,.8 Displayed only when Digital AUX is ON. .9 Displayed only when AUX IN is ON. !"General 88ttlns ~ .p' . . _.••.-,j, General is selected on the setup main menu in step 2. Birthday Opening Message Setting (Birthday Set) mmldd By inputting your birthday details, a message can be displayed on that day. Turn the Rotary encoder to set "mm" (Month), and then press C\IENT. Turn the Rotary encoder again to set "dd" (Date). Setting the Clock Display (Clock Mode) AM (Before noon) 12:00 (12-hour) (Inltlsl setting) I 00:00 (24-hour) You can select the clock display type, l2-hour or 24-hour, depending on your preference. Setting of Calendar Display Pattern Switching (Calendar) dd/mmlyyyy I yyyylmmldd I mmlddlyyyy (Initisl setting) You can switch the calendar display pattern to be shown when the time is displayed. yyyy : shows the year mm : shows the month dd : shows the day ex. dd/mm/yyyy ~ 25/12/2007 Playing MP3IWMAJAAC Data (Play Mode) CD-DA (Initlsl setting) I CDDA&MP3IWMA This unit can play back CDs containing both CD and MP3 fWMNAAC data (created in Enhanced CD (CD Extra) format). However, in some situations, playback of an enhanced CD may be difficult. In this case, you can select playback of a single session only, containing the CD data. When a disc contains both CD and MP3fWMNAAC data, playback starts from the CD data portion of the disc. CD-DA: Only the CD data in Session 1 can be played back. CDDA&MP3IWMA: CD data, MP3/WMNAAC files in mixed mode, and multi-session discs can be played back. • Perform this setting before inserting a disc. Ifa disc has already been inserted, remove it first. (If you use an MP3 changer, you have to change discs.) 19-EN

Beep ON (Initlsl setting) I Beep OFF This function will give audible feedback with varying tones depending upon the bUllon pressed. Turning Mute Mode On/Off (INT Mute) INT Mute ONliNT Mute OFF (Inltlsl setting) If a device having the interrupt feature is connected, audio will be automatically muted whenever the interrupt signal is received from the device. Setting the AUX Mode (V-Link) AUX IN ONI AUX IN OFF (Inltlsl setting) You can input TV/video sound by connecting an optional Ai-NETIRCA Interface cable (KCA-12l B) or Versatile Link Terminal (KCA-4IOC) to this component. You can change the AUX Name display when AUX IN is set to ON. Press Q.IENT when AUX IN is set to ON, and select AUX Name by turning the Rotary encoder, and then press Q.IENT. After that, turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired AUX name. If the KCA-41OC is connected, it is possible to select two AUX names. • Via KCA-4lOC, up to 2 external devices with RCA output can be connected. In this case. press SOURCEI to select AUX mode and then press BAND to select your desired device. Changer Name Setting Chsnger (Inltlsl setting) I USB I Portsble This setting is used when the head unit is connected to the USB Adapter for MP3 (KCA-620M). You can set the name to be displayed on the unit depending on the device to which the USB Adapter for MP3 (KCA-620M) is connected. Connecting to an External Amplifier Power IC ON (Inltlsl setting) I Power IC OFF When an external amplifier is connected, sound quality can be improved by stopping the power supply of the built-in amplifier. Power Ie OFF: Use this mode when the line output of this unit is used to drive an external amplifier. In this selting. the head unit's internal amplifier is turned OFF and can not drive speakers. Rear left Rear right Front left Front right :::>c Amplifier :::>c Amplifier PowerlC ON: The speakers are driven by the built-in amplifier. Speakers SPEAKER EB EB Front RIGHT FRONT e e right SPEAKER e e RIGHT REAR Rear EB EB right SPEAKER EB EB LEFT REAR Rear e e left JSPEAKER e ~ Front LEFT FRONT (f) left EB . No sound is produced by the system when the power output is set to OFF. Setting the External Digital Input Digltsl AUX ONI Dlgltsl AUX OFF (Inltlsl setting) When an ALPINE Ai-NET compatible digital audio processor (PXA-H701) and a DVD player (DVE-5207) not compatible with Ai-NET are connected, set Digital AUX to ON to enjoy 5. I-channel surround sound. You can change the Digital AUX name display when Digital AUX is set to ON. Press Q.IENT when Digital AUX is set to ON, and select Digital AUX name by turning the Rotary encoder, then press Q.IENT. After that, turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired Digital AUX name. • Press SOURCEI , and select the D.Aux mode, and adjust the volume. etc. • After input selection is completed, tum the ignition offand back on again. Setting ofthe optical digital input switch is completed. • Depending on the connected audio processor, DVD player sound may continue to be output, even though the source is changed to another one. Ifthis occurs. set the DVD player's power to OFF. AUX+ ON: Set to ON when a portable device is connected. If SOURCEI is pressed and AUX+ is selected. the sound of the portable device is input to the unit. AUX+ OFF: Set to OFF when an iPod is connected. You can change the AUX+ name display when AUX+ is set to ON. Press Q.IENT when AUX+ is set to ON, and select AUX+ name by turning the Rotary encoder, then press Q.IENT. After that, turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired AUX+ name. Setting the AUX+ Level (AUX IN GAIN) Low (Initlsl setting) I High After selling to ON in "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode", this setting can be carried out. low: Decreases the external input audio level. High: Increases the external input audio level. Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode AUX+ Setup ONI AUX+ Setup OFF (Inltlsl setting) An external device (such as a portable music player) can be connected to the iPod Direct connector of this unit. An iPod DirectIRCA Interface cable (optional) is required. A portable music device and an iPod cannot be connected to the iPod Direct connector at the same time. 20-EN Sound (Beep) Guide Function Beep ON (Initlsl setting) I Beep OFF This function will give audible feedback with varying tones depending upon the bUllon pressed. Turning Mute Mode On/Off (INT Mute) INT Mute ONliNT Mute OFF (Inltlsl setting) If a device having the interrupt feature is connected, audio will be automatically muted whenever the interrupt signal is received from the device. Setting the AUX Mode (V-Link) AUX IN ONI AUX IN OFF (Inltlsl setting) You can input TV/video sound by connecting an optional Ai-NETIRCA Interface cable (KCA-12l B) or Versatile Link Terminal (KCA-4IOC) to this component. You can change the AUX Name display when AUX IN is set to ON. Press Q.IENT when AUX IN is set to ON, and select AUX Name by turning the Rotary encoder, and then press Q.IENT. After that, turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired AUX name. If the KCA-41OC is connected, it is possible to select two AUX names. • Via KCA-4lOC, up to 2 external devices with RCA output can be connected. In this case. press SOURCEI to select AUX mode and then press BAND to select your desired device. Changer Name Setting Chsnger (Inltlsl setting) I USB I Portsble This setting is used when the head unit is connected to the USB Adapter for MP3 (KCA-620M). You can set the name to be displayed on the unit depending on the device to which the USB Adapter for MP3 (KCA-620M) is connected. Connecting to an External Amplifier Power IC ON (Inltlsl setting) I Power IC OFF When an external amplifier is connected, sound quality can be improved by stopping the power supply of the built-in amplifier. Power Ie OFF: Use this mode when the line output of this unit is used to drive an external amplifier. In this selting. the head unit's internal amplifier is turned OFF and can not drive speakers. Rear left Rear right Front left Front right :::>c Amplifier :::>c Amplifier PowerlC ON: The speakers are driven by the built-in amplifier. Speakers SPEAKER EB EB Front RIGHT FRONT e e right SPEAKER e e RIGHT REAR Rear EB EB right SPEAKER EB EB LEFT REAR Rear e e left JSPEAKER e ~ Front LEFT FRONT (f) left EB . No sound is produced by the system when the power output is set to OFF. Setting the External Digital Input Digltsl AUX ONI Dlgltsl AUX OFF (Inltlsl setting) When an ALPINE Ai-NET compatible digital audio processor (PXA-H701) and a DVD player (DVE-5207) not compatible with Ai-NET are connected, set Digital AUX to ON to enjoy 5. I-channel surround sound. You can change the Digital AUX name display when Digital AUX is set to ON. Press Q.IENT when Digital AUX is set to ON, and select Digital AUX name by turning the Rotary encoder, then press Q.IENT. After that, turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired Digital AUX name. • Press SOURCEI , and select the D.Aux mode, and adjust the volume. etc. • After input selection is completed, tum the ignition offand back on again. Setting ofthe optical digital input switch is completed. • Depending on the connected audio processor, DVD player sound may continue to be output, even though the source is changed to another one. Ifthis occurs. set the DVD player's power to OFF. AUX+ ON: Set to ON when a portable device is connected. If SOURCEI is pressed and AUX+ is selected. the sound of the portable device is input to the unit. AUX+ OFF: Set to OFF when an iPod is connected. You can change the AUX+ name display when AUX+ is set to ON. Press Q.IENT when AUX+ is set to ON, and select AUX+ name by turning the Rotary encoder, then press Q.IENT. After that, turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired AUX+ name. Setting the AUX+ Level (AUX IN GAIN) Low (Initlsl setting) I High After selling to ON in "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode", this setting can be carried out. low: Decreases the external input audio level. High: Increases the external input audio level. Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode AUX+ Setup ONI AUX+ Setup OFF (Inltlsl setting) An external device (such as a portable music player) can be connected to the iPod Direct connector of this unit. An iPod DirectIRCA Interface cable (optional) is required. A portable music device and an iPod cannot be connected to the iPod Direct connector at the same time. 20-EN

Demonstration Demo ON / Demo OFF (Initial setting) This unit includes a special message feature with various patterns, which when enabled displays opening messages for certain occasions. For example, when you tum this unit on December 25th (according to the unit's date setting), a Christmas greeting is displayed if the Opening Message is set to ON. You can select your favorite animation display for background from 4 types. HD Radio is selected on the setup main menu in step 2. Opening Message ON/OFF Setting Opening MSG ON / Opening MSG OFF (Initial settIng) Switching the Animation Display Type (BGV select) BGV 5eIfIct OFF(Initial SlItting)/ BGV5eIfIct TYPE 1/TYPE 2/ TYPE 3/ TYPE 4 Switching the Character Font Font Select TYPE 1 (Initial setting) / Font Select TYPE 2 Two types of font can be selected. You can select the font type you like. Normal Font European Font Language 1 : Language 2: Dimmer Control Dimmer Auto (Initial setting) / Dimmer Manual Set the Dimmer control to Auto to decrease the illumination brightness of the unit with the head lights of the vehicle ON. This mode is useful if you feel the unit's backlighting is too bright at night. This unit has a demonstration feature for the display. • To quit Demo mode, set to Demo OFF. Setting the Language Font Language 1 (Initial Setting) / Language 2 Two types of font can be selected. Dimmer Level setting Lev1~nlt~/settlng)/Lev2/Lev3 In the Dimmer Level setting, three levels are available, the highest level (Lev3) being the dimmest when the car headlights are on. HD Radio Station Call setting Station Call Short (InItial setting) / Station Call Long In the HD Radio mode, the number of display characters for the HD Radio station name can be selected. Choose from two scrolling methods. Select the type you prefer. Scroll Type setting TYPE1 / TYPE2 (Initial setting) TYPE1 : TYPE2 : The characters scroll from right to left, one character at a time, until the entire title has scrolled. Words are built up from left to right, a single character at a time. When the display is full, it is cleared and the subsequent words are displayed the same way until all words of the title have been shown. Short: 7 characters (FM) 4 characters (AM) Long: 56 characters Digital Seek ON/OFF setting DIgital Seek ON / Digital seek OFF (InitIal Setting) ON : SEEK UP/oOWN is used only for Digital Radio Station. OFF: SEEK UP/oOWN is used for all Radio Stations. Scroll setting (Text Scroll) Text Scroll Auto / Text Scroll Manual (Initial setting) This CD player can scroll the disc and track names recorded on CD- TEXT discs, as well as text information of MP3IWMAlAAC files, folder names, tags, HD Radio and SAT Radio. Text Scroll Auto: CD text information, folder and file names, HD and SAT Radio text are scrolled continuously. In addition, all tag information is automatically rotated in the display continuously, without pressing the VIEW button. Text Scroll Manual: The above information is scrolled only when a disc is loaded, a channel or track is changed, etc. • In pans ofthe display, scrolling may not occur, or scroll content may differ. 21-EN Display is selected on the setup main menu in step 2. Demonstration Demo ON / Demo OFF (Initial setting) This unit includes a special message feature with various patterns, which when enabled displays opening messages for certain occasions. For example, when you tum this unit on December 25th (according to the unit's date setting), a Christmas greeting is displayed if the Opening Message is set to ON. You can select your favorite animation display for background from 4 types. HD Radio is selected on the setup main menu in step 2. Opening Message ON/OFF Setting Opening MSG ON / Opening MSG OFF (Initial settIng) Switching the Animation Display Type (BGV select) BGV 5eIfIct OFF(Initial SlItting)/ BGV5eIfIct TYPE 1/TYPE 2/ TYPE 3/ TYPE 4 Switching the Character Font Font Select TYPE 1 (Initial setting) / Font Select TYPE 2 Two types of font can be selected. You can select the font type you like. Normal Font European Font Language 1 : Language 2: Dimmer Control Dimmer Auto (Initial setting) / Dimmer Manual Set the Dimmer control to Auto to decrease the illumination brightness of the unit with the head lights of the vehicle ON. This mode is useful if you feel the unit's backlighting is too bright at night. This unit has a demonstration feature for the display. • To quit Demo mode, set to Demo OFF. Setting the Language Font Language 1 (Initial Setting) / Language 2 Two types of font can be selected. Dimmer Level setting Lev1~nlt~/settlng)/Lev2/Lev3 In the Dimmer Level setting, three levels are available, the highest level (Lev3) being the dimmest when the car headlights are on. HD Radio Station Call setting Station Call Short (InItial setting) / Station Call Long In the HD Radio mode, the number of display characters for the HD Radio station name can be selected. Choose from two scrolling methods. Select the type you prefer. Scroll Type setting TYPE1 / TYPE2 (Initial setting) TYPE1 : TYPE2 : The characters scroll from right to left, one character at a time, until the entire title has scrolled. Words are built up from left to right, a single character at a time. When the display is full, it is cleared and the subsequent words are displayed the same way until all words of the title have been shown. Short: 7 characters (FM) 4 characters (AM) Long: 56 characters Digital Seek ON/OFF setting DIgital Seek ON / Digital seek OFF (InitIal Setting) ON : SEEK UP/oOWN is used only for Digital Radio Station. OFF: SEEK UP/oOWN is used for all Radio Stations. Scroll setting (Text Scroll) Text Scroll Auto / Text Scroll Manual (Initial setting) This CD player can scroll the disc and track names recorded on CD- TEXT discs, as well as text information of MP3IWMAlAAC files, folder names, tags, HD Radio and SAT Radio. Text Scroll Auto: CD text information, folder and file names, HD and SAT Radio text are scrolled continuously. In addition, all tag information is automatically rotated in the display continuously, without pressing the VIEW button. Text Scroll Manual: The above information is scrolled only when a disc is loaded, a channel or track is changed, etc. • In pans ofthe display, scrolling may not occur, or scroll content may differ. 21-EN

(Optional) SAT Receiver: XM or SIRIUS Receiver When an optional XM or SIRIUS Receiver Box is connected via the Ai-NET bus, the following operations may be performed. However, the XM Receiver and SIRIUS Receiver cannot be connected at the same time. SIRIUS Receiver: Verify the features of the connected SIRIUS Receiver Box Not all SIRIUS Receivers have identical functions and some may not be performed on this unit. For details about functions, refer to the SIRIUS Receiver's Owner's Manual. A unique Radio ID number is required to subscribe to SAT Radio programming. Each third party XM orSIRIUS radiocomes with this number. This number is an 8 character (for XM Radio) or 12 character (for SIRIUS Radio) alphanumeric number. It is printed on a label found on the SAT Receiver. It can also be displayed on the screen of this unit in the following way. XM: 1 While receiving a SAT Radio band, press .... or ~ to select channel "0" for XM. The unit alternately displays channel No. "0" for 2 seconds, then the 10 number is displayed. Demonstration (page 21) becomes nonfunctional. 2 To cancel the 10 number display, select the channel other than "0:' Checking the SAT Radio ID Number 3 Press ~ or .. to select desired category. 4 Press .... or ~ to select the desired channel. Holding down .... or ~ will change channels continuously. • When using the optional remote control (RUE·4190, etc). an SAT Radio Channel can be directly called up with the numeric keypad of the remote control. While in XM or SIRIUS Radio mode, enter the Channel number you want to call up with the numeric keypad on the remote control. 2 Press Enter on the remote control within 5 seconds to receive the Channel. .L- ~.,' F/SETUP Preset buttons (1 through 6) ~IESC VIEW Receiving Channels with the SAT Radio Receiver (Optional) SIRIUS: 1 While receiving a SAT Radio band, press .... or ~ to select channel "255" for SIRIUS. • You cannot use "0", "S", "I", or "F" for the ID Number (XM radio Receiver only). • You can check the ID number printed on a label on your third party. SAT Radio Receiver package. * When the "Text Scroll" (page 21) is sellO "Auto." the display cannot be switched by pressing VIEW. The display contents switch alternately. Press VIEW until the 10 No. appears In the display. To cancel the 10 number display, select the channel to other than "255". Channel NoJChannel Name Category Name (Blank) - - - - - (Blank) ~ ----- ~ f-~N~ -{ IONo. Category Name Channel NoiChannel Name 3 2 1 Press SOURCE/(I) to activate the SAT Radio mode. 2 Press BAND to select one of the three SAT Radio Preset Bands. About SAT Radio Satellite Radio* is the next generation of audio entertainment, with over 100 digital audio channels. For a small monthly fee, subscribers can hear crystal-clear music, sports, news and talk, coast-to-coast via satellite. For more information, visit XM's website at www.xmradio.com, or SIRIUS' website at www.sirius.com, To receive SAT Radio, the separately sold XM Direct™ or SIRIUS Satellite Radio Tuner and an appropriate Ai-NET Interface Adapter will be required. For details, consult you nearest Alpine dealer. * XM and its corresponding logos are trademarks ofXM Satellite Radio Inc. * SIRIUS and its corresponding logos are trademarks ofSIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. Each press changes the band: XM mode: XM 1 ~ XM 2 ~ XM 3 ~ XM 1 SIRIUS mode: SIRIUS 1 ~ SIRIUS 2 ~ SIRIUS 3 ~ SIRIUS 1 • The SAT Receiver controls on this unit are operative only when a SAT Receiver is connected. 22-EN SAT Radio Receiver (Optional) SAT Receiver: XM or SIRIUS Receiver When an optional XM or SIRIUS Receiver Box is connected via the Ai-NET bus, the following operations may be performed. However, the XM Receiver and SIRIUS Receiver cannot be connected at the same time. SIRIUS Receiver: Verify the features of the connected SIRIUS Receiver Box Not all SIRIUS Receivers have identical functions and some may not be performed on this unit. For details about functions, refer to the SIRIUS Receiver's Owner's Manual. A unique Radio ID number is required to subscribe to SAT Radio programming. Each third party XM orSIRIUS radiocomes with this number. This number is an 8 character (for XM Radio) or 12 character (for SIRIUS Radio) alphanumeric number. It is printed on a label found on the SAT Receiver. It can also be displayed on the screen of this unit in the following way. XM: 1 While receiving a SAT Radio band, press .... or ~ to select channel "0" for XM. The unit alternately displays channel No. "0" for 2 seconds, then the 10 number is displayed. Demonstration (page 21) becomes nonfunctional. 2 To cancel the 10 number display, select the channel other than "0:' Checking the SAT Radio ID Number 3 Press ~ or .. to select desired category. 4 Press .... or ~ to select the desired channel. Holding down .... or ~ will change channels continuously. • When using the optional remote control (RUE·4190, etc), an SAT Radio Channel can be directly called up with the numeric keypad of the remote control. While in XM or SIRIUS Radio mode, enter the Channel number you want to call up with the numeric keypad on the remote control. 2 Press Enter on the remote control within 5 seconds to receive the Channel. .L- ~.,' F/SETUP Preset buttons (1 through 6) ~IESC VIEW Receiving Channels with the SAT Radio Receiver (Optional) SIRIUS: 1 While receiving a SAT Radio band, press .... or ~ to select channel "255" for SIRIUS. • You cannot use "0", "S", "I", or "F" for the ID Number (XM radio Receiver only). • You can check the ID number printed on a label on your third party, SAT Radio Receiver package. * When the "Text Scroll" (page 21) is sellO "Auto," the display cannot be switched by pressing VIEW. The display contents switch alternately. Press VIEW until the 10 No. appears In the display. To cancel the 10 number display, select the channel to other than "255". Channel NoJChannel Name Category Name (Blank) - - - - - (Blank) ~ ----- ~ f-~N~ -{ IONo. Category Name Channel NoiChannel Name 3 2 1 Press SOURCE/(I) to activate the SAT Radio mode. 2 Press BAND to select one of the three SAT Radio Preset Bands. About SAT Radio Satellite Radio* is the next generation of audio entertainment, with over 100 digital audio channels. For a small monthly fee, subscribers can hear crystal-clear music, sports, news and talk, coast-to-coast via satellite. For more information, visit XM's website at www.xmradio.com, or SIRIUS' website at www.sirius.com, To receive SAT Radio, the separately sold XM Direct™ or SIRIUS Satellite Radio Tuner and an appropriate Ai-NET Interface Adapter will be required. For details, consult you nearest Alpine dealer. * XM and its corresponding logos are trademarks ofXM Satellite Radio Inc. * SIRIUS and its corresponding logos are trademarks ofSIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. Each press changes the band: XM mode: XM 1 ~ XM 2 ~ XM 3 ~ XM 1 SIRIUS mode: SIRIUS 1 ~ SIRIUS 2 ~ SIRIUS 3 ~ SIRIUS 1 • The SAT Receiver controls on this unit are operative only when a SAT Receiver is connected. 22-EN

1 Press BAND to select the desired band you want to store. 2 After tuning In the desired channel, press and hold, for at least 2 seconds, anyone of the pre.e' button. (1 through 6) Into which you wish to store the channel. The selected station is stored. 3 Repeat the procedure to store up to 5 other channels onto the same band. • To use this procedure for other bands, simply select the band desired and repeat the procedure. • A total of18 channels can be stored in the preset memory for either XM or SIRIUS. 6 Channels are stored in each band (XMl, XM2 and XM3 for XM; SIRIUSl, SIRlUS2 and SIRlUS3 for SIRIUS). • Ifyou store a channel in a preset memory which already has a station, the current channel will be cleared and replaced with the new one. Receiving Stored Channels 1 Press BAND to select the desired band. 2 Press the channel pre.e' button that has your desired satellite channel In memory. Storing the desired Sports Team (SIRIUS only) Store a favorite team from one of the available leagues SIRIUS covers. Once stored, game times and scores for that team are announced using the interruption ALERT display while receiving other programming. To receive these announcements, refer to page 23. This function becomes effective after performing the following two operations. Si8H·7·>'Whi~7""'%"ll '*r "*0~1J'·;'~11trmt'lII.i1l·lG 0k.'.IW&'b-~lt,y,;c •."wA'i"'9wlm'.fr!\iIm.L.Amp_"0;ili'lw 1 Select the channel broadcasting your favorite team's game. 2 Press F/SETUP to activate the Memory/Delete selection mode. 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Memory mode, and then press ~/ENT. Memory H Delete H Memory 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired team for the game being broadcast, and then press ~/ENT. 5 Turn the Rotary encoder to select interruption type, and then press ~ /ENT. Game Update (Initial setting) H Game Initial Game Update: The ALERT display interrupts by game progress (change of score. game result, etc.). Game Initial: The ALERT display interrupts when the game begins. 6 Press and hold ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • Ifyou try to store when the memory area is full, "Memory Full" is displayed. Ifyou want to replace a team that's already been saved in step 4, tum the Rotllry encoderto select "Replace YES", and then press ~ lENT. • If no operation is performedfor 10 seconds, the setting mode is canceled. 1 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to enter the SETUP mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the SIRIUS Item, and then press ~ lENT. Bluetooth*J H General H Display H XM,.2/SIRIUSoJ H HD Radio,.4 H Bluetooth *J Displayed only when INT Mute is OFF and the mode is set to other than Bluetooth Audio. ,.2 Onlv when XM Radio is connected. oJ Onl~ when SIRIUS Radio is connected. ,.4 Only when HD Radio is connected. 3 Press ~IENT to activate the Game Alert mode. 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired league, and then press ~ /ENT. 5 Turn the Rotary encoder to select a team you want to store, and then press ~lENT. 6 Turn the Rotary encoder to select an Interruption type, and then press ~ lENT. UPDATE (Initial setting) H INITIAL UPDATE: The ALERT display interrupts by game progress (change of score, game result, etc.). INITIAL: The ALERT display interrupts when the game begins. 7 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to cancel the SETUP mode. • Pressing ~IESC returns to the previous SETUP mode. • Ifno operation is performedfor 60 seconds, SETUP is canceled. • In this mode, a total of4 teams can be stored in the preset memory (one team per league). Storing the desired Song / Artist (SIRIUS only) A stored song title or artist name is announced whenever a matching title or artist is found on another channel. The interruption ALERT is displayed while listening to a program on another channel. For receiving interruption information, refer to "Recalling the stored information (SIRIUS only)" (page 24). 1 Press F/SETUP to activate the Memory/Delete selection mode when a Song or the song of an Artist you want to store Is being broadcast. 23-EN Storing Channel Presets 1 Press BAND to select the desired band you want to store. 2 After tuning In the desired channel, press and hold, for at least 2 seconds, anyone of the pre.e' button. (1 through 6) Into which you wish to store the channel. The selected station is stored. 3 Repeat the procedure to store up to 5 other channels onto the same band. • To use this procedure for other bands, simply select the band desired and repeat the procedure. • A total of18 channels can be stored in the preset memory for either XM or SIRIUS. 6 Channels are stored in each band (XMl, XM2 and XM3 for XM; SIRIUSl, SIRlUS2 and SIRlUS3 for SIRIUS). • Ifyou store a channel in a preset memory which already has a station, the current channel will be cleared and replaced with the new one. Receiving Stored Channels 1 Press BAND to select the desired band. 2 Press the channel pre.e' button that has your desired satellite channel In memory. Storing the desired Sports Team (SIRIUS only) Store a favorite team from one of the available leagues SIRIUS covers. Once stored, game times and scores for that team are announced using the interruption ALERT display while receiving other programming. To receive these announcements, refer to page 23. This function becomes effective after performing the following two operations. Si8H·7·>'Whi~7""'%"ll '*r "*0~1J'·;'~11trmt'lII.i1l·lG 0k.'.IW&'b-~lt,y,;c •."wA'i"'9wlm'.fr!\iIm.L.Amp_"0;ili'lw 1 Select the channel broadcasting your favorite team's game. 2 Press F/SETUP to activate the Memory/Delete selection mode. 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Memory mode, and then press ~/ENT. Memory H Delete H Memory 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired team for the game being broadcast, and then press ~/ENT. 5 Turn the Rotary encoder to select interruption type, and then press ~ /ENT. Game Update (Initial setting) H Game Initial Game Update: The ALERT display interrupts by game progress (change of score. game result, etc.). Game Initial: The ALERT display interrupts when the game begins. 6 Press and hold ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • Ifyou try to store when the memory area is full, "Memory Full" is displayed. Ifyou want to replace a team that's already been saved in step 4, tum the Rotllry encoderto select "Replace YES", and then press ~ lENT. • If no operation is performedfor 10 seconds, the setting mode is canceled. 1 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to enter the SETUP mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the SIRIUS Item, and then press ~ lENT. Bluetooth*J H General H Display H XM,.2/SIRIUSoJ H HD Radio,.4 H Bluetooth *J Displayed only when INT Mute is OFF and the mode is set to other than Bluetooth Audio. ,.2 Onlv when XM Radio is connected. oJ Onl~ when SIRIUS Radio is connected. ,.4 Only when HD Radio is connected. 3 Press ~IENT to activate the Game Alert mode. 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired league, and then press ~ /ENT. 5 Turn the Rotary encoder to select a team you want to store, and then press ~lENT. 6 Turn the Rotary encoder to select an Interruption type, and then press ~ lENT. UPDATE (Initial setting) H INITIAL UPDATE: The ALERT display interrupts by game progress (change of score, game result, etc.). INITIAL: The ALERT display interrupts when the game begins. 7 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to cancel the SETUP mode. • Pressing ~IESC returns to the previous SETUP mode. • Ifno operation is performedfor 60 seconds, SETUP is canceled. • In this mode, a total of4 teams can be stored in the preset memory (one team per league). Storing the desired Song / Artist (SIRIUS only) A stored song title or artist name is announced whenever a matching title or artist is found on another channel. The interruption ALERT is displayed while listening to a program on another channel. For receiving interruption information, refer to "Recalling the stored information (SIRIUS only)" (page 24). 1 Press F/SETUP to activate the Memory/Delete selection mode when a Song or the song of an Artist you want to store Is being broadcast. 23-EN

mode, and then press ~/ENT. Memory H Delete 3 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the Song Memory or Artist Memory, and then press ~ lENT. 4 Press and hold ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • Ifyou try to store when the memory area isfull, "Memory Full" is displayed. Ifyou want to replace a Song title or Artist name that's already been saved in step 3, tum the Rotary encoder to select "Replace YES", and then press ~IENT. • Ifno operation is performedfor 10 seconds, the selling mode is canceled. Recalling the stored information (SIRIUS only) Whenever the stored sports team, song(s) or artist(s) are playing, an interruption ALERT appears in the display of the unit. 1 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the desired Information. 2 Press ~ lENT. • If no operation is performedfor 10 seconds, the unit returns to normal mode. • Only a single sports team, song or artist can be displayed as an interruption ALERT. For example, both song and artist cannot be displayed as an ALERT at the same time. Canceling the stored Alert Memory (SIRIUS only) 1 During usual reception, press F/SETUP to activate the MemorylDelete selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the Delete mode, and then press ~IENT. Memory H Delete H Memory The Memory List appears after DELETE MODE has been displayed. 3 Turn the Rotery encoder to select a list you want to delete, and then press ~/ENT. 4 Turn the Rotery encoder to select Delete YES, and then press ~ lENT. Delete NO H Delete YES Select "Delete NO" the unit will return to the Memory List display. 5 Press and hold ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • Ifno operation is performedfor 10 seconds, the selling mode is canceled. 24-EN Search Function You can search for programs by Category, Channel, Artist or Song. 1 Press ~ lENT In the XM or SIRIUS mode. 2 Turn the Rotery encoder to select search mode, and then press ~/ENT. Category H Channel H Artist" H Song" H Category " SIRIUS Only. 3 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the desired Category, and then press ~ lENT. 4 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the desired Channel Name, and then press ~IENT. • While in Category Search mode, press ~/ESC to return to the selecting search mode. • The Search mode is canceled ifyou press and hold ~/ESCfor at least 2 seconds. or no operation is performedfor 10 seconds in Category Search mode. • IfALERT interruption occurs in the search mode. the search mode is canceled. 3 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the desired ChanneVArtlstlSong Name, and then press ~IENT. • While in Channel Search mode, press. or ~ to select another Category. • While in Channel/Artist/Song Search mode. press ~IESC to return to the selecting search mode. • The Search mode is canceled ifyou press and hold ~/ESCfor at least 2 seconds. or no operation is performedfor 10 seconds in Channel/Artist/Song Search mode. • IfALERT interruption occurs in the search mode. the search mode is canceled. Quick Search Function You can search for all channels in numerical order. 1 Press and hold ~IENT for at least 2 seconds In XM or SIRIUS mode to activate Quick Search mode. 2 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the desired Channel within 10 seconds. The selected Channel is received. 2 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the Memory mode, and then press ~/ENT. Memory H Delete 3 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the Song Memory or Artist Memory, and then press ~ lENT. 4 Press and hold ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • Ifyou try to store when the memory area isfull, "Memory Full" is displayed. Ifyou want to replace a Song title or Artist name that's already been saved in step 3, tum the Rotary encoder to select "Replace YES", and then press ~IENT. • Ifno operation is performedfor 10 seconds, the selling mode is canceled. Recalling the stored information (SIRIUS only) Whenever the stored sports team, song(s) or artist(s) are playing, an interruption ALERT appears in the display of the unit. 1 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the desired Information. 2 Press ~ lENT. • If no operation is performedfor 10 seconds, the unit returns to normal mode. • Only a single sports team, song or artist can be displayed as an interruption ALERT. For example, both song and artist cannot be displayed as an ALERT at the same time. Canceling the stored Alert Memory (SIRIUS only) 1 During usual reception, press F/SETUP to activate the MemorylDelete selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the Delete mode, and then press ~IENT. Memory H Delete H Memory The Memory List appears after DELETE MODE has been displayed. 3 Turn the Rotery encoder to select a list you want to delete, and then press ~/ENT. 4 Turn the Rotery encoder to select Delete YES, and then press ~ lENT. Delete NO H Delete YES Select "Delete NO" the unit will return to the Memory List display. 5 Press and hold ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • Ifno operation is performedfor 10 seconds, the selling mode is canceled. 24-EN Search Function You can search for programs by Category, Channel, Artist or Song. 1 Press ~ lENT In the XM or SIRIUS mode. 2 Turn the Rotery encoder to select search mode, and then press ~/ENT. Category H Channel H Artist- H Song- H Category - SIRIUS Only. 3 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the desired Category, and then press ~ lENT. 4 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the desired Channel Name, and then press ~IENT. • While in Category Search mode, press ~/ESC to return to the selecting search mode. • The Search mode is canceled ifyou press and hold ~/ESCfor at least 2 seconds. or no operation is performedfor 10 seconds in Category Search mode. • IfALERT interruption occurs in the search mode. the search mode is canceled. 3 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the desired ChanneVArtlstlSong Name, and then press ~IENT. • While in Channel Search mode, press. or ~ to select another Category. • While in Channel/Artist/Song Search mode. press ~IESC to return to the selecting search mode. • The Search mode is canceled ifyou press and hold ~/ESCfor at least 2 seconds. or no operation is performedfor 10 seconds in Channel/Artist/Song Search mode. • IfALERT interruption occurs in the search mode. the search mode is canceled. Quick Search Function You can search for all channels in numerical order. 1 Press and hold ~IENT for at least 2 seconds In XM or SIRIUS mode to activate Quick Search mode. 2 Turn the Rotery encoder to select the desired Channel within 10 seconds. The selected Channel is received.

Channel No.lChannel Name *1 When ADF is turned OFF, this information is not displayed (see "Setting the Auxiliary Data Field Display (XM only)" on page 26). Displayed in 1 line when text amount is small. *2 When the "Text Scroll" (page 21) is set to "Auto," the display cannot be switched by pressing VIEW. The display contents switch alternately. ~ Displayed only during instant replay. o When the "Text Scroll" (page 21) is set to "Auto," the display scrolls continuously. When the "Text Scroll" is set to "Manual," the display scrolls only once after anyfunction is performed (PRESET, BAND, SEARCH, etc.). "Channel No.", "Calendar" and "Clock" displays do not scroll. o Depending on the model, the display may differ from the one shown above. ~ *1 Category Name ~ - - - - - Channel No.lChannel Name SIRIUS mode: Category Name ~ ------- Channel No.lChanncl Name ~ ~ *2 *3 Channel No.lChannel Name ~ - - - - - - - - - ~ Remaining time of instant replay Changing the Display Text information. such as the channel name. artist name/feature and song/program title. is available with each XM or SIRIUS channel. The unit can display this text information as explained below. In XM or SIRIUS mode, press VIEW. Each time you press this button, the display changes as shown below. XM mode: o Ifyou continue to press Fastforward until the end. the INSTANT REPLAY mode is canceled. and the unit will change to usual reception. In SIRIUS mode. the current channel is saved using the Instant Replay memory function. Use this function to pause the channel content at any time. When playback is continued. it will begin at the position it was paused. This function can be used to store up to 44 minutes of audio. 1 During SIRIUS reception, press .-11I to select the Instant Replay mode. "Instant Replay" is displayed, and the received station is stored. 2 Press .-/11 again to activate the play mode. The stored contents are played back. During REPLAY playback: Fast rewind: Press and hold ~. Fast forward: Press and hold ~. Returning to the beginning of the current song: Press ~. Advancing to the beginning of the next song: Press ~. 3 Press ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to cancel the INSTANT REPLAY mode. The unit returns to usual SIRIUS broadcasting mode. Time display example during REPLAY playback (Instant Replay Mode only) Instant Replay Function (SIRIUS only) o Stored channels can also be recalled by pressing and holding BAND for at least 2 seconds. o Channel other than Weather or Traffic can also be stored and recalled. Receiving Weather or Traffic Information from SAT Radio 1 Select the SAT Radio Channel for your local trafflcl weather Information. 2 Press and hold .-/11 for at least 2 seconds In the SAT mode. The received weather or traffic channel is stored. 3 Press and hold BAND for at least 2 seconds. The stored Weather or Traffic channel will be recalled. 4 Press and hold BAND for at least 2 seconds. Returns to normal mode. Play Position Indicator Volume Level PlayTime (Ramaining time for INSTANT REPLAY) 25-EN Category Name Category Name Channel NoiChannel Name Channel No.lChannel Name *1 When ADF is turned OFF, this information is not displayed (see "Setting the Auxiliary Data Field Display (XM only)" on page 26). Displayed in 1 line when text amount is small. *2 When the "Text Scroll" (page 21) is set to "Auto," the display cannot be switched by pressing VIEW. The display contents switch alternately. ~ Displayed only during instant replay. o When the "Text Scroll" (page 21) is set to "Auto," the display scrolls continuously. When the "Text Scroll" is set to "Manual," the display scrolls only once after anyfunction is performed (PRESET, BAND, SEARCH, etc.). "Channel No.", "Calendar" and "Clock" displays do not scroll. o Depending on the model, the display may differ from the one shown above. ~ *1 Category Name ~ - - - - - Channel No.lChannel Name SIRIUS mode: Category Name ~ ------- Channel No.lChanncl Name ~ ~ *2 *3 Channel No.lChannel Name ~ - - - - - - - - - ~ Remaining time of instant replay Changing the Display Text information. such as the channel name. artist name/feature and song/program title. is available with each XM or SIRIUS channel. The unit can display this text information as explained below. In XM or SIRIUS mode, press VIEW. Each time you press this bUllon, the display changes as shown below. XM mode: o Ifyou continue to press Fastforward until the end. the INSTANT REPLAY mode is canceled. and the unit will change to usual reception. In SIRIUS mode. the current channel is saved using the Instant Replay memory function. Use this function to pause the channel content at any time. When playback is continued. it will begin at the position it was paused. This function can be used to store up to 44 minutes of audio. 1 During SIRIUS reception, press .-111 to select the Instant Replay mode. "Instant Replay" is displayed, and the received station is stored. 2 Press .-/11 again to activate the play mode. The stored contents are played back. During REPLAY playback: Fast rewind: Press and hold ~. Fast forward: Press and hold ~. Returning to the beginning of the current song: Press ~. Advancing to the beginning of the next song: Press ~. 3 Press ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to cancel the INSTANT REPLAY mode. The unit returns to usual SIRIUS broadcasting mode. Time display example during REPLAY playback (Instant Replay Mode only) Instant Replay Function (SIRIUS only) o Stored channels can also be recalled by pressing and holding BAND for at least 2 seconds. o Channel other than Weather or Traffic can also be stored and recalled. Receiving Weather or Traffic Information from SAT Radio 1 Select the SAT Radio Channel for your local trafflcl weather Information. 2 Press and hold .-/11 for at least 2 seconds In the SAT mode. The received weather or traffic channel is stored. 3 Press and hold BAND for at least 2 seconds. The stored Weather or Traffic channel will be recalled. 4 Press and hold BAND for at least 2 seconds. Returns to normal mode. Play Position Indicator Volume Level PlayTime (Ramaining time for INSTANT REPLAY) 25-EN

(XM only) The XM Auxiliary Data Field (ADF) display can be switched on or off. There is no ADF function for the SIRIUS receiver. 1 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to activate the SETUP selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the XM mode, and then press Q,.IENT. Bluetooth·J H General H Display H XM,.2/SIRIUSoJ H HD Radio,.4 H Bluetooth .J Displayed only when INT Mute is OFF and the mode is set to other than Bluetooth Audio. ,.2 Only when XM Radio is connected. .3 Only when SIRIUS Radio is connected. ,.4 Only when HD Radio is connected. 3 Press Q,./ENT to activate the XM ADF mode. 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to select XM ADF ONI OFF, and then press Q,.IENT. When setting to ON, Auxiliary Data Field is displayed by pressing VIEW (refer to the "Changing the Display" section on page 25.). 5 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • Pressing ~IESC returns to the previous SETUP mode. • If no operation is performedfor 60 seconds, SETUP is canceled. 26-EN USB memory (Optional) Controlling USB memory (Optional) A USB memory device may be connected to this unit. With a USB memory device connected to this unit, the audio files will be playable from this unit. • The controls on this unit for USB memory operation are operative only when a USB memory is connected. Playing MP3/WMA/AAC Files with the USB memory (Optional) If you connect a USB memory device containing MP3lWMNAAC. these files are playable on this unit. 1 Press SOURCElc!> to switch to the USB mode. TUNER -+ XM/SIRIUS· J -+ DISC -+ USB -+ iPod·z/AUX+·3 -+ Bluetooth Audio·4 -+ CHANGER·5 -+ TUNER .J Only when XM Radio or SIRIUS Radio is connected. ,.2 Displayed only when the iPod is connected and AUX+ Setup is set to OFF, refer to "Sening the AUX+ Setup Mode" (page 20). oJ Displayed only when the AUX+ Setup is set to ON, refer to "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode" (page 20). ,.4 Displayed only when Bluetooth IN is set to ADAPTER, refer to "Bluetooth Setting" (page 19). •5 Only when the CD changer is connected. 2 To pause playback, press ./11. Pressing ./11 again will resume the playback. • The root folder is displayed as "ROOT" in the Folder Name Search mode. • This unit plays back files in the USB memory with the same controls and modes as playback ofCDs containing MP3IWMAlAAC. For details, refer to "CDIMP3IWMAlAAC" on pages 10 to 13. • Before disconnecting USB memory. be sure to change to another source or set to pause. • The playback time may not be correctly displayed when a VBR (Variable Bit Rate) recordedfile is played back. Setting the Auxiliary Data Field Display (XM only) The XM Auxiliary Data Field (ADF) display can be switched on or off. There is no ADF function for the SIRIUS receiver. 1 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to activate the SETUP selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the XM mode, and then press Q,.IENT. Bluetooth·J H General H Display H XM,.2/SIRIUSoJ H HD Radio,.4 H Bluetooth .J Displayed only when INT Mute is OFF and the mode is set to other than Bluetooth Audio. ,.2 Only when XM Radio is connected. .3 Only when SIRIUS Radio is connected. ,.4 Only when HD Radio is connected. 3 Press Q,./ENT to activate the XM ADF mode. 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to select XM ADF ONI OFF, and then press Q,.IENT. When setting to ON, Auxiliary Data Field is displayed by pressing VIEW (refer to the "Changing the Display" section on page 25.). 5 Press and hold F/SETUP for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • Pressing ~IESC returns to the previous SETUP mode. • If no operation is performedfor 60 seconds, SETUP is canceled. 26-EN USB memory (Optional) Controlling USB memory (Optional) A USB memory device may be connected to this unit. With a USB memory device connected to this unit, the audio files will be playable from this unit. • The controls on this unit for USB memory operation are operative only when a USB memory is connected. Playing MP3/WMA/AAC Files with the USB memory (Optional) If you connect a USB memory device containing MP3lWMNAAC. these files are playable on this unit. 1 Press SOURCElc!> to switch to the USB mode. TUNER -+ XM/SIRIUS· J -+ DISC -+ USB -+ iPod·z/AUX+·3 -+ Bluetooth Audio·4 -+ CHANGER·5 -+ TUNER .J Only when XM Radio or SIRIUS Radio is connected. ,.2 Displayed only when the iPod is connected and AUX+ Setup is set to OFF, refer to "Sening the AUX+ Setup Mode" (page 20). oJ Displayed only when the AUX+ Setup is set to ON, refer to "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode" (page 20). ,.4 Displayed only when Bluetooth IN is set to ADAPTER, refer to "Bluetooth Setting" (page 19). •5 Only when the CD changer is connected. 2 To pause playback, press ./11. Pressing ./11 again will resume the playback. • The root folder is displayed as "ROOT" in the Folder Name Search mode. • This unit plays back files in the USB memory with the same controls and modes as playback ofCDs containing MP3IWMAlAAC. For details, refer to "CDIMP3IWMAlAAC" on pages 10 to 13. • Before disconnecting USB memory. be sure to change to another source or set to pause. • The playback time may not be correctly displayed when a VBR (Variable Bit Rate) recordedfile is played back.

ALPINE FULL SPEEDTM Connection Cable (KCE-422i) (sold separately). When this unit is connected by using the cable, the controls on the iPod are not functional. Fast forward through the current song: Press and hold ~. Advance to the beginning of the next song: Press ~. An iPod can contain hundreds of songs. By using file tag infonnation and keeping these songs organized in playlists, this unit's search functions will ease song searches. Each music category has its own individual hierarchy. Use the Playlistl ArtistlAlbumlSong/PodcastlGenrelComposerlAudiobook search mode to narrow searches based on the table below. Searching for a desired Song 3 To pause playback, press ~/II. Pressing ~ III again will resume playback. A song playing on the iPod while it is connected to this unit will continue to playfrom where it was paused after disconnection. " Ifyou listen to an episode from a selected podcast or audiobook, the episode can be changed by pressing .... or ~. " An episode may have several chapters. The chapter can be changed by pressing'" or ~. 6 ~ lENT ':::> 4 5 GQ ~ IESC Preset buttons (1 through 6) ~/II Rotary encoder ~ VIEW ... ~ SOURCElc!> " Set AUX+ Setup to OFF when an iPod is connected (refer to "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode" on page 20). " If the Bluetooth Box and an iPod are connected at the same time, be sure to disconnect the iPodfrom the Bluetooth Box while turning ACC to OFF. iPods usable with this unit " The unit can be used with the fourth generation and above iPod, iPod photo, iPod mini or iPod nano. iPod Shuffle cannot be used, however. • Touch wheel or scroll wheel type iPods without the dock connector cannot be connected to the unit. • The unit can be used with the following iPod. Fourth generation iPod Fifth generation iPod iPod photo iPod mini First generation iPod nano Second generation iPod nano " If the unit is used with iPod software versions of iTunes earlier than 7. 1.0.59, correct function and peiformance are not guaranteed. Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3 Hierarchy 4 Playlisl Song - - Artist" Album" Song - Album' Song - - Song - - - Podcast Episode - - Genre· Artist* Album" Song Composer' Album' Song - Audlobook - - - For example: Searching by Artist name The following example explains how an ARTIST search is perfonned. Another search mode can be used for the same operation, although the hierarchy differs. 1 Press ~ lENT to activate the search selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Artist search mode, and then press ~ lENT. 3 4 Playback 1 Press SOURCElc!> to switch to the iPod mode. TUNER ~ XM/SIRIUS,I ~ DISC ~ USB ~ iPod,2/AUX+,3 ~ Bluetooth Audio,4 ~ CHANGER,5 ~ TUNER ,J Only when XM Radio or SIRIUS Radio is connected. 02 Displayed only when the iPod is connected and AUX+ Setup is set to OFF, refer to "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode" (page 20). 03 Displayed only when the AUX+ Setup is set to ON, refer to "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode" (page 20). 04 Displayed only when Bluetooth IN is set to ADAPTER, refer to "Bluetooth Setting" (page 19). ,5 Only when the CD changer is connected. 2 Press'" or ~ to select the desired song. Return to the beginning of the current song: Press .... Fast backward through the current song: Press and hold .... Playlist H Artist H Album H Song H Podcast H Genre H Composer H Audiobook H Playlist Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired Artist, and then press ~ lENT. Turn the Rotary encoder to select an album, and then press ~ lENT. 5 Turn the Rotary encoder to select a song and press ~ lENT. The selected song is played back. " After pressing and holding ~lENTfor at least 2 seconds while in each hierarchy (except Song and Audiobook hierarchy), ali songs of the selected hiemrchy are played back. " After selecting [AUl in the search mode with "''', press and hold ~ lENTfor at least 2 seconds to play back ali songs in the iPod or selected search mode. While in the search mode, ifyou press and hold ~IESCforatleast 2 seconds, or no operation is peiformedfor 10 seconds, the search mode is canceled. " In the search mode, pressing ~/ESC will return to the previous mode. " When search is made during M.J.X. play, the M.J.X. play mode will be canceled. 27-EN iPod@ (Optional) An iPod@ can be connected to this unit by using the proprietary ALPINE FULL SPEEDTM Connection Cable (KCE-422i) (sold separately). When this unit is connected by using the cable, the controls on the iPod are not functional. Fast forward through the current song: Press and hold ~. Advance to the beginning of the next song: Press ~. An iPod can contain hundreds of songs. By using file tag infonnation and keeping these songs organized in playlists, this unit's search functions will ease song searches. Each music category has its own individual hierarchy. Use the Playlistl ArtistlAlbumlSong/PodcastlGenrelComposerlAudiobook search mode to narrow searches based on the table below. Searching for a desired Song 3 To pause playback, press ~/II. Pressing ~ III again will resume playback. A song playing on the iPod while it is connected to this unit will continue to playfrom where it was paused after disconnection. " Ifyou listen to an episode from a selected podcast or audiobook, the episode can be changed by pressing .... or ~. " An episode may have several chapters. The chapter can be changed by pressing'" or ~. 6 ~ lENT ':::> 4 5 GQ ~ IESC Preset buttons (1 through 6) ~/II Rotary encoder ~ VIEW ... ~ SOURCElc!> " Set AUX+ Setup to OFF when an iPod is connected (refer to "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode" on page 20). " If the Bluetooth Box and an iPod are connected at the same time, be sure to disconnect the iPodfrom the Bluetooth Box while turning ACC to OFF. iPods usable with this unit " The unit can be used with the fourth generation and above iPod, iPod photo, iPod mini or iPod nano. iPod Shuffle cannot be used, however. • Touch wheel or scroll wheel type iPods without the dock connector cannot be connected to the unit. • The unit can be used with the following iPod. Fourth generation iPod Fifth generation iPod iPod photo iPod mini First generation iPod nano Second generation iPod nano " If the unit is used with iPod software versions of iTunes earlier than 7. 1.0.59, correct function and peiformance are not guaranteed. Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3 Hierarchy 4 Playlisl Song - - Artist" Album" Song - Album' Song - - Song - - - Podcast Episode - - Genre· Artist* Album" Song Composer' Album' Song - Audlobook - - - For example: Searching by Artist name The following example explains how an ARTIST search is perfonned. Another search mode can be used for the same operation, although the hierarchy differs. 1 Press ~ lENT to activate the search selection mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the Artist search mode, and then press ~ lENT. 3 4 Playback 1 Press SOURCElc!> to switch to the iPod mode. TUNER ~ XM/SIRIUS,I ~ DISC ~ USB ~ iPod,2/AUX+,3 ~ Bluetooth Audio,4 ~ CHANGER,5 ~ TUNER ,J Only when XM Radio or SIRIUS Radio is connected. 02 Displayed only when the iPod is connected and AUX+ Setup is set to OFF, refer to "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode" (page 20). 03 Displayed only when the AUX+ Setup is set to ON, refer to "Setting the AUX+ Setup Mode" (page 20). 04 Displayed only when Bluetooth IN is set to ADAPTER, refer to "Bluetooth Setting" (page 19). ,5 Only when the CD changer is connected. 2 Press'" or ~ to select the desired song. Return to the beginning of the current song: Press .... Fast backward through the current song: Press and hold .... Playlist H Artist H Album H Song H Podcast H Genre H Composer H Audiobook H Playlist Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired Artist, and then press ~ lENT. Turn the Rotary encoder to select an album, and then press ~ lENT. 5 Turn the Rotary encoder to select a song and press ~ lENT. The selected song is played back. " After pressing and holding ~lENTfor at least 2 seconds while in each hierarchy (except Song and Audiobook hierarchy), ali songs of the selected hiemrchy are played back. " After selecting [AUl in the search mode with "''', press and hold ~ lENTfor at least 2 seconds to play back ali songs in the iPod or selected search mode. While in the search mode, ifyou press and hold ~IESCforatleast 2 seconds, or no operation is peiformedfor 10 seconds, the search mode is canceled. " In the search mode, pressing ~/ESC will return to the previous mode. " When search is made during M.J.X. play, the M.J.X. play mode will be canceled. 27-EN

playlist in the playlist search mode. • "No Podcast" will be displayed ifthere is no podcast data in the iPod in the PODCAST search mode. • "No Audiobook" will be displayed ifthere is no audiobook data in the iPod in AUDIOBOOK search mode. • If "iPod name" stored in the iPod is selected in the desired playlist search mode and ~/ENTis pressed. you can search for all songs in the iPod. Also, ifyou press and hold ~lENTfor at least 2 seconds, all songs in the iPod are played back. • Depending on the iPod, podcast search is not supported. • Ifanyone ofthe preset buttons (1 through 6) is pressed in the search mode, a search can be made quickly by skipping to the specified location. For details, refer to "Direct Search Function" on page 28. Quick Search You can search a song from all songs in the iPod without selecting an album, artist, etc. 1 Press and hold ~ lENT for at least 2 seconds to activate the Quick Search mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select a desired song. The selected song is played back immediately. • While in the search mode, ifyou press and hold '='/ESCforat least 2 seconds, or no operation is peiformedfor 10 seconds, the search mode is canceled. • Ifmany songs are in iPod, it takes time to search for songs. • Ifanyone ofthe preset buttons (1 through 6) is pressed in the search mode, a search can be made qUickly by skipping to the specified location. For details, refer to "Direct Search Function" on page 28. • This function is inactive during repeat (RPT) playback. Select Playlist/Artist/Album/Genre/ Composer Playlist/Artist/Album/Genre/Composer can be easily changed. For example, if you listen to a song from a selected album, the album can be changed. Press ... or ~ select the desired PlayllstiArtlstiAlbum/ Genre/Composer. • Ifthe song search mode was used to select a song, this function is inactive. • Ifan album is selected during an artist search, other albums by that artist are searchable. • Thisfunction is inactive during shuffle (M.I.X.) playback. Random Play Shuffle (M.I.X.) The Shuffle function of the iPod is displayed as M.I.X. on this unit. Shuffle Albums: The songs on each album are played back in proper order. Upon completion of all the songs on the album, the next album is selected randomly. This continues until all albums have been played. Shuffle Songs: Song shuffle randomly plays back songs within a selected category (playlist. album, etc.). The songs within the category are played just once until all songs have been played. 1 Press 5 co. The songs are played back in random sequence. Direct Search Function M.I.X. CJ (Shuffle Albums) -+ M.I.X. -+ (off) (Shuffle Songs) -+ M.I.X. CJ The unit's direct search function can be used to search for an album, song, etc., mote efficiently. In Playlist/Artist/Album/Song/Podcast/ Genre/Composer/Audiobook mode, you can quickly target any song. In the search mode, press anyone of the preset buttons (1 through 6) to quickly skip over a designated percent of your song content. Song search example: If there are 100 songs in your iPod, they are divided into 6 groups using percentages (shown below). These groups are assigned to preset buttons 1 through 6. Example 1: Suppose the song you are searching for is located at around the middle (50%) of your library: press button 4 to jump to the 50th song and turn the Rotary encoder to find the desired song. Example 2: Suppose the song you are searching for is located near the end (83%) of your library: press button 6to jump to the 83rd song and turn the Rotary encoder to find the desired song. All 100 songs (100%) 0% 17% 33% 50% 67% 83% Preset 1 2 3 4 5 6 buttons Songs First 17th 33rd 50th 67th 83rd song song song song song song 28-EN 2 To cancel MJ.X. play, select (off) with the above procedure. • Ifa song is selected in the album search mode before selecting M.I.X. play, the songs will not play back randomly even when Shuffle Albums is selected. Shuffle ALL: Shuffle ALL plays all songs in the iPod randomly. Anyone song does not play back again until all songs have been played back. 1 Press 6. The songs are played back in random sequence. M.I.X. -+ (off) -+ M.I.X. (Shuffle ALL) 2 To cancel MJ.X. play, select (off) with the above procedure. • IfShuffle AU is selected, the selected songs being played back in the search mode are canceled. • "NO SONG" will be displayed ifthere is no song in the selected playlist in the playlist search mode. • "No Podcast" will be displayed ifthere is no podcast data in the iPod in the PODCAST search mode. • "No Audiobook" will be displayed ifthere is no audiobook data in the iPod in AUDIOBOOK search mode. • If "iPod name" stored in the iPod is selected in the desired playlist search mode and ~/ENTis pressed. you can search for all songs in the iPod. Also, ifyou press and hold ~lENTfor at least 2 seconds, all songs in the iPod are played back. • Depending on the iPod, podcast search is not supported. • Ifanyone ofthe preset buttons (1 through 6) is pressed in the search mode, a search can be made quickly by skipping to the specified location. For details, refer to "Direct Search Function" on page 28. Quick Search You can search a song from all songs in the iPod without selecting an album, artist, etc. 1 Press and hold ~ lENT for at least 2 seconds to activate the Quick Search mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select a desired song. The selected song is played back immediately. • While in the search mode, ifyou press and hold '='/ESCforat least 2 seconds, or no operation is peiformedfor 10 seconds, the search mode is canceled. • Ifmany songs are in iPod, it takes time to search for songs. • Ifanyone ofthe preset buttons (1 through 6) is pressed in the search mode, a search can be made qUickly by skipping to the specified location. For details, refer to "Direct Search Function" on page 28. • This function is inactive during repeat (RPT) playback. Select Playlist/Artist/Album/Genre/ Composer Playlist/Artist/Album/Genre/Composer can be easily changed. For example, if you listen to a song from a selected album, the album can be changed. Press ... or ~ select the desired PlayllstiArtlstiAlbum/ Genre/Composer. • Ifthe song search mode was used to select a song, this function is inactive. • Ifan album is selected during an artist search, other albums by that artist are searchable. • Thisfunction is inactive during shuffle (M.I.X.) playback. Random Play Shuffle (M.I.X.) The Shuffle function of the iPod is displayed as M.I.X. on this unit. Shuffle Albums: The songs on each album are played back in proper order. Upon completion of all the songs on the album, the next album is selected randomly. This continues until all albums have been played. Shuffle Songs: Song shuffle randomly plays back songs within a selected category (playlist. album, etc.). The songs within the category are played just once until all songs have been played. 1 Press 5 co. The songs are played back in random sequence. Direct Search Function M.I.X. CJ (Shuffle Albums) -+ M.I.X. -+ (off) (Shuffle Songs) -+ M.I.X. CJ The unit's direct search function can be used to search for an album, song, etc., mote efficiently. In Playlist/Artist/Album/Song/Podcast/ Genre/Composer/Audiobook mode, you can quickly target any song. In the search mode, press anyone of the preset buttons (1 through 6) to quickly skip over a designated percent of your song content. Song search example: If there are 100 songs in your iPod, they are divided into 6 groups using percentages (shown below). These groups are assigned to preset buttons 1 through 6. Example 1: Suppose the song you are searching for is located at around the middle (50%) of your library: press button 4 to jump to the 50th song and turn the Rotary encoder to find the desired song. Example 2: Suppose the song you are searching for is located near the end (83%) of your library: press button 6to jump to the 83rd song and turn the Rotary encoder to find the desired song. All 100 songs (100%) 0% 17% 33% 50% 67% 83% Preset 1 2 3 4 5 6 buttons Songs First 17th 33rd 50th 67th 83rd song song song song song song 28-EN 2 To cancel MJ.X. play, select (off) with the above procedure. • Ifa song is selected in the album search mode before selecting M.I.X. play, the songs will not play back randomly even when Shuffle Albums is selected. Shuffle ALL: Shuffle ALL plays all songs in the iPod randomly. Anyone song does not play back again until all songs have been played back. 1 Press 6. The songs are played back in random sequence. M.I.X. -+ (off) -+ M.I.X. (Shuffle ALL) 2 To cancel MJ.X. play, select (off) with the above procedure. • IfShuffle AU is selected, the selected songs being played back in the search mode are canceled.

thoroughly eliminates in-car acoustic problems that normally degrade sound quality, which enables us to experience music the way the artist intended, refer to "About IMPRINT" (page 36). When the IMPRINT-BOX (PXA-HIOO) (sold separately) is connected to this unit, MultEQ and the following sound adjustment can be performed. SOURCEl Rotary encoder BAND C\lENT Preset buttons IMPRINT (1 through 6) ':::='lESC • When the Text Scroll is set to Manual. press and hold VIEWfor at least 2 seconds. the current text will be scrolled one time. Press VIEW. Each press changes the display. You can display the tag information of a song in the iPod. Displaying the Text 2 To cancel repeat play, select (off) with the above procedure. • During repeat playback. no other songs are selectable by pressing ~or~. Repeat One: A single song is repeatedly played back. 1 Press ~4. The song is played back repeatedly. RPT -+ (off) -+ RPT (Repeat One) Only Repeat One is available for the iPod. Repeat Play iPodmode: Changing MultEO mode (Blank) (Blank) Track No.lAIl Songs No.·2 Elapsed Time MultEQ, developed by Audyssey Labs, automatically corrects the audio for the listening environment. The system is optimized for selected positions in the vehicle. To accomplish this, MultEQ must take measurements of the vehicles response characteristics. For details on the set up procedure, consult your authorized Alpine dealer. Press and hold IMPRINT for at least 2 seconds to change MultEQ mode. MultEQ Off (Manual Mode) -+ Curve 1 (MultEQ-1) -+ Curve 2 (MultEQ-2) -+ MultEQ Off (Manual Mode) .J TAG information If the "Text Scroll" (page 2/) is set to "Auto." the tag information will scroll automatically. Ifthere is no text information. nothing will be displayed. .,} The numbers ofall songs displayed vary depending on the songs selected by the search. .J When the -"Text Scroll" (page 2J) is set to "Auto." the display cannot be switched by pressing VIEW. The display contents switch alternately. • Only alphanumeric characters (ASClJ) can be displayed. • Ifthe anist. album or song name. created in iTunes. has too many characters. songs may not be played back when connected to the adaprer. Therefore. a maximum of250 characters is recommended. The maximum number ofcharactersfor the head unit is J28 (/28 byte). • Some characters may not be correctly displayed. • The display is blank when text information is not compatible with this unit. • The Curve mode can be selected only when curve I and curve 2 are stored. • When using MultEQ, MX, X-OVER. T.Correction, Factory's EQ, SUBW. Phase, SUBW. Channel, TW Setup. EQ Mode. Filter Type, Parametric EQ and Graphic EQ are set automatically. They are no longer user adjustable. • When an external audio processor is connected, the MultEQfunction cannot be used. 29-EN IMPRINT Operation (Optional) Alpine introduces IMPRINT - the world's first technology that thoroughly eliminates in-car acoustic problems that normally degrade sound quality, which enables us to experience music the way the artist intended, refer to "About IMPRINT" (page 36). When the IMPRINT-BOX (PXA-HIOO) (sold separately) is connected to this unit, MultEQ and the following sound adjustment can be performed. SOURCEl Rotary encoder BAND C\lENT Preset buttons IMPRINT (1 through 6) ':::='lESC • When the Text Scroll is set to Manual. press and hold VIEWfor at least 2 seconds. the current text will be scrolled one time. Press VIEW. Each press changes the display. You can display the tag information of a song in the iPod. Displaying the Text 2 To cancel repeat play, select (off) with the above procedure. • During repeat playback. no other songs are selectable by pressing ~or~. Repeat One: A single song is repeatedly played back. 1 Press ~4. The song is played back repeatedly. RPT -+ (off) -+ RPT (Repeat One) Only Repeat One is available for the iPod. Repeat Play iPodmode: Changing MultEO mode (Blank) (Blank) Track No.lAIl Songs No.·2 Elapsed Time MultEQ, developed by Audyssey Labs, automatically corrects the audio for the listening environment. The system is optimized for selected positions in the vehicle. To accomplish this, MultEQ must take measurements of the vehicles response characteristics. For details on the set up procedure, consult your authorized Alpine dealer. Press and hold IMPRINT for at least 2 seconds to change MultEQ mode. MultEQ Off (Manual Mode) -+ Curve 1 (MultEQ-1) -+ Curve 2 (MultEQ-2) -+ MultEQ Off (Manual Mode) .J TAG information If the "Text Scroll" (page 2/) is set to "Auto." the tag information will scroll automatically. Ifthere is no text information. nothing will be displayed. .,} The numbers ofall songs displayed vary depending on the songs selected by the search. .J When the -"Text Scroll" (page 2J) is set to "Auto." the display cannot be switched by pressing VIEW. The display contents switch alternately. • Only alphanumeric characters (ASClJ) can be displayed. • Ifthe anist. album or song name. created in iTunes. has too many characters. songs may not be played back when connected to the adaprer. Therefore. a maximum of250 characters is recommended. The maximum number ofcharactersfor the head unit is J28 (/28 byte). • Some characters may not be correctly displayed. • The display is blank when text information is not compatible with this unit. • The Curve mode can be selected only when curve I and curve 2 are stored. • When using MultEQ, MX, X-OVER. T.Correction, Factory's EQ, SUBW. Phase, SUBW. Channel, TW Setup. EQ Mode. Filter Type, Parametric EQ and Graphic EQ are set automatically. They are no longer user adjustable. • When an external audio processor is connected, the MultEQfunction cannot be used. 29-EN

Treble Level/Fader (Between Front and Rear)lBalance (Between Left and Right)/ Black Out in MultEQ mode You can change these settings to create your own preference in MultEQ (Curve I or Curve 2) mode. 1 Press IMPRINT to activate the MultEQ adjustment mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired Item, and then press <\IENT. SUBW Level,J H Bass Level H Treble Level H Fader'z H Balance H Black Out,3 H SUBW Level 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to change the setting as below, and then press <\lENT. Subwoofer level: a- +15 Bass level: -7-+7 Treble level: -7-+7 Fader: A15 - F15 Balance: 115 - A15 Black Out: ON/OFF • If no operation is performedfor 60 seconds after selecting the SUBW. Level, Bass Level. Treble Level. Fader. Balance or Black Out mode. the unit automatically returns to normal mode. ,J When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. and the subwoofer ON/OFF cannot be adjusted in MultEQ (Curve I or Curve 2) mode. ,.] Ifyou set the 2.2ch (3WAY)/4.2ch (FRONT/REARlSUBW.) switch of the Imprint-Box (PXA-HIOO) to 2.2ch (3WAY). you cannot adjust the FADER mode. For details. refer 10 the Owner's Manual of PXA-HIOO. ,3 When Blackout mode is turned on. all display indications on this unit will tum offto reduce power consumption. This additional power enhances the sound quality. If any button on the unit is pressed during the blackout mode. the function will be displayedfor 5 seconds to show the operation before returning to Blackollt mode. • Depending on the connected devices. some functions and display indications do not work. Adjusting Sound Setting in Manual Mode You can change these sound settings to create your own preference when the MultEQ mode is set to MultEQ off (Manual Mode). Use steps 1 to 4 to select one of the Sound menu modes to modify. see the applicable section below for details about the selected Item. 1 Press IMPRINT to activate the Sound menu selection mode. 30-EN 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired Item, and then press <\IENT. Subwoofer H SUBW System'} H SUBW Phase'} H SUBW Channel'} H Factory's EO H TW Setup,.] H Filter Type H Media Xpander H MX Level 03 H EO Mode H TCA Parameter H Sound Field,.4 H Black Out H Subwoofer (e.g. Select SUbwoofer) ,} These functions are inoperable when Subwoofer is set to OFF. ,.] Thisfunction can be operable only when PXA-HIOO (sold separately) is connected and 2.2ch (3WAY) mode is set. For details. refer to the Owner's Manual ofPXA-HIOO. 03 This function is inoperable when Media Xpander is set to OFF. ,.4 In step 2, three sound adjustment items (Parametric EQlGraphic EQ, T.Correction, X-Over) can be selected in Sound Field Adjustment mode, tum the Rotary encoder to select the desired item, and then press <\IENT to continue 10 step 3. 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to change the setting, and then press <\IENT. (e.g. Select Subwoofer ON or Subwoofer OFF) 4 Press and hold ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • Media Xpander. Factory's EQ. Parametric EQlGraphic EQ Adjustment. EQ Mode and MX Level Adjustment are inoperable when Defeat is set to ON. • Pressing ~IESC returns 10 the previous Sound menu mode. • Ifno operation is performedfor 60 seconds. Sound menu mode is canceled. When the subwoofer is on, you can adjust the subwoofer output level (referto page 14). OFF H ON (Initial setting) When the subwoofer is on, you can select either System I or System2 for the desired subwoofer effect. 1 (Initial setting) H 2 System 1: Subwoofer level changes according to the main volume setting. System 2: Subwoofer level change is different from the main volume setting. For example. even at low volume settings, the subwoofer is still audible. PHASE 00 (Initial setting) H PHASE 1800 The subwoofer output phase is toggled SUBWOOFER NORMAL (00) or SUBWOOFER REVERSE (1800 ). To adjust the level, tum the Rotary encoder. Adjusting Subwoofer LevellBass Level/ Treble Level/Fader (Between Front and Rear)lBalance (Between Left and Right)/ Black Out in MultEQ mode You can change these settings to create your own preference in MultEQ (Curve I or Curve 2) mode. 1 Press IMPRINT to activate the MultEQ adjustment mode. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired Item, and then press <\IENT. SUBW Level,J H Bass Level H Treble Level H Fader'z H Balance H Black Out,3 H SUBW Level 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to change the setting as below, and then press <\lENT. Subwoofer level: a- +15 Bass level: -7-+7 Treble level: -7-+7 Fader: A15 - F15 Balance: 115 - A15 Black Out: ON/OFF • If no operation is performedfor 60 seconds after selecting the SUBW. Level, Bass Level. Treble Level. Fader. Balance or Black Out mode. the unit automatically returns to normal mode. ,J When the subwoofer mode is set to OFF, its level cannot be adjusted. and the subwoofer ON/OFF cannot be adjusted in MultEQ (Curve I or Curve 2) mode. ,.] Ifyou set the 2.2ch (3WAY)/4.2ch (FRONT/REARlSUBW.) switch of the Imprint-Box (PXA-HIOO) to 2.2ch (3WAY). you cannot adjust the FADER mode. For details. refer 10 the Owner's Manual of PXA-HIOO. ,3 When Blackout mode is turned on. all display indications on this unit will tum offto reduce power consumption. This additional power enhances the sound quality. If any button on the unit is pressed during the blackout mode. the function will be displayedfor 5 seconds to show the operation before returning to Blackollt mode. • Depending on the connected devices. some functions and display indications do not work. Adjusting Sound Setting in Manual Mode You can change these sound settings to create your own preference when the MultEQ mode is set to MultEQ off (Manual Mode). Use steps 1 to 4 to select one of the Sound menu modes to modify. see the applicable section below for details about the selected Item. 1 Press IMPRINT to activate the Sound menu selection mode. 30-EN 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select the desired Item, and then press <\IENT. Subwoofer H SUBW System'} H SUBW Phase'} H SUBW Channel'} H Factory's EO H TW Setup,.] H Filter Type H Media Xpander H MX Level 03 H EO Mode H TCA Parameter H Sound Field,.4 H Black Out H Subwoofer (e.g. Select SUbwoofer) ,} These functions are inoperable when Subwoofer is set to OFF. ,.] Thisfunction can be operable only when PXA-HIOO (sold separately) is connected and 2.2ch (3WAY) mode is set. For details. refer to the Owner's Manual ofPXA-HIOO. 03 This function is inoperable when Media Xpander is set to OFF. ,.4 In step 2, three sound adjustment items (Parametric EQlGraphic EQ, T.Correction, X-Over) can be selected in Sound Field Adjustment mode, tum the Rotary encoder to select the desired item, and then press <\IENT to continue 10 step 3. 3 Turn the Rotary encoder to change the setting, and then press <\IENT. (e.g. Select Subwoofer ON or Subwoofer OFF) 4 Press and hold ~IESC for at least 2 seconds to return to normal mode. • Media Xpander. Factory's EQ. Parametric EQlGraphic EQ Adjustment. EQ Mode and MX Level Adjustment are inoperable when Defeat is set to ON. • Pressing ~IESC returns 10 the previous Sound menu mode. • Ifno operation is performedfor 60 seconds. Sound menu mode is canceled. When the subwoofer is on, you can adjust the subwoofer output level (referto page 14). OFF H ON (Initial setting) When the subwoofer is on, you can select either System I or System2 for the desired subwoofer effect. 1 (Initial setting) H 2 System 1: Subwoofer level changes according to the main volume setting. System 2: Subwoofer level change is different from the main volume setting. For example. even at low volume settings, the subwoofer is still audible. PHASE 00 (Initial setting) H PHASE 1800 The subwoofer output phase is toggled SUBWOOFER NORMAL (00) or SUBWOOFER REVERSE (1800 ). To adjust the level, tum the Rotary encoder.

equalizer. Parametric EO (Initial setting) H Graphic EO PEO: 5-band Parametric EO GEQ: 7-band Graphic EO OVO (Video CD) (MOVIE MX level 1 to 2): The dialogue portion of a video is reproduced more clearly. (OVO MUSIC): A DVD or Video CD contains a large quantity of data such as music clip. MX uses this data to reproduce the sound accurately. AUX (MX level 1): Choose the MX mode (CMPM, MOVIE, or MUSIC) that corresponds to the media connected. • Each music source, such as FM radio, CD, and MP3IWMAlAAC can have its own MX setting. • On disks with both MP3IWMAlAAC and CD-DA, when the source changes from "MP3IWMAlAAC to CD-DA" or "CD-DA to MP3IWMAlAAC", MX-mode switching may delay playback slightly. • Setting to Non Effect sets MX mode ofeach music source to OFF. • The function is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. • There is no MX mode for AM radio. • lfan audio processor with the MXfunction (PXA-H70l. etc.) is connected, its own MX processing is applied to the music source. Since the processor MX senings may not match the head unit, the audio processor needs to be adjusted. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual ofthe audio processor. • "CMPM" is appliedfor MP3IWMAlAAC and iPod. • "SAT" is appliedfor XM radio and SlRlUS radio. ..settlne EQlil!iocre~.',-::;· ~i1!~1 CO (MX level 1 to 3): CD mode processes a large amount of data during playback. MX takes advantage of this large data quantity to reproduce a more clear, clean output. CMPMlSAT (MX level 1 to 3): This corrects information that was lost at the time of compression. This reproduces a well-balanced sound close to the original. NORMAL (Initial setting) H INDIVIDUAL NORMAL (L=R): Left and right speakers are adjusted equally. INDIVIDUAL (UR): Left and right speakers are individually adjusted. Depending on the response characteristics of the speaker, care should be taken when setting the response slope of the high range speaker to FLAT in 2.2ch (3WAY) mode (see "Adjusting the Crossover Settings" on page 32), as speaker damage may result. MAKER'S (Initial setting) HUSER'S MAKER'S: As protection from possible speaker damage, FLAT cannot be set for the response slope of the high range speaker in 2.2ch (3WAY) mode. USER'S: The FLAT setting is possible in 2.2ch (3WAY) mode. Flat H Pops H Rock H News H Jazz&Blues H Electrical Dance H Hip Hop&Rap H Easy Listening H Country H Classical H User1 H User2 H User3 H User4 H User5 H User6 STEREO (Initial setting) H MONO STEREO: Subwoofer stereo (UR) output MONO: Subwoofer monaural output 10 typical equalizer settings are preset at the factory for a variety of musical source material. • By selecting User's 1 to 6, you can recall the stored preset number in "Adjusting the Graphic Equalizer Curve" (page 32) or "Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve" (page 32). You can set the subwoofer output to stereo or monaural. Make sure to set the correct output for your subwoofer type. When the Media Xpander is on, you can adjust the Media Xpander level (refer to page 31). OFF (Initial setting) H ON MX (Media Xpander) makes vocals or instruments sound distinct regardless of the music source. The FM radio, CD, USB memory and iPod, will be able to reproduce the music clearly even in cars with a lot of road noise. Changing the source to which you want to apply Media Xpander. FM (MX level 1 to 3): The medium to high frequencies become clearer, and produces well balanced sound at all frequencies. You can change the unit, (cm or inch) of time correction. TCR Parameter (Initial setting) H TCR Parameter OFF (Initial setting) H ON • When Blackout mode is set to ON, in 5 seconds after returning to normal mode, all displays on the unit will tum off. • Ifany button on the unit is pressed during the blackout mode, the function will be displayedfor 5 seconds to show the operation before returning to Blackout mode. 31-EN This setting gives you a choice of 5-band parametric, or 7-band graphic equalizer. Parametric EO (Initial setting) H Graphic EO PEO: 5-band Parametric EO GEQ: 7-band Graphic EO OVO (Video CD) (MOVIE MX level 1 to 2): The dialogue portion of a video is reproduced more clearly. (OVO MUSIC): A DVD or Video CD contains a large quantity of data such as music clip. MX uses this data to reproduce the sound accurately. AUX (MX level 1): Choose the MX mode (CMPM, MOVIE, or MUSIC) that corresponds to the media connected. • Each music source, such as FM radio, CD, and MP3IWMAlAAC can have its own MX setting. • On disks with both MP3IWMAlAAC and CD-DA, when the source changes from "MP3IWMAlAAC to CD-DA" or "CD-DA to MP3IWMAlAAC", MX-mode switching may delay playback slightly. • Setting to Non Effect sets MX mode ofeach music source to OFF. • The function is inoperable when DEFEAT is set to ON. • There is no MX mode for AM radio. • lfan audio processor with the MXfunction (PXA-H70l. etc.) is connected, its own MX processing is applied to the music source. Since the processor MX senings may not match the head unit, the audio processor needs to be adjusted. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual ofthe audio processor. • "CMPM" is appliedfor MP3IWMAlAAC and iPod. • "SAT" is appliedfor XM radio and SlRlUS radio. ..settlne EQlil!iocre~.',-::;· ~i1!~1 CO (MX level 1 to 3): CD mode processes a large amount of data during playback. MX takes advantage of this large data quantity to reproduce a more clear, clean output. CMPMlSAT (MX level 1 to 3): This corrects information that was lost at the time of compression. This reproduces a well-balanced sound close to the original. NORMAL (Initial setting) H INDIVIDUAL NORMAL (L=R): Left and right speakers are adjusted equally. INDIVIDUAL (UR): Left and right speakers are individually adjusted. Depending on the response characteristics of the speaker, care should be taken when setting the response slope of the high range speaker to FLAT in 2.2ch (3WAY) mode (see "Adjusting the Crossover Settings" on page 32), as speaker damage may result. MAKER'S (Initial setting) HUSER'S MAKER'S: As protection from possible speaker damage, FLAT cannot be set for the response slope of the high range speaker in 2.2ch (3WAY) mode. USER'S: The FLAT setting is possible in 2.2ch (3WAY) mode. Flat H Pops H Rock H News H Jazz&Blues H Electrical Dance H Hip Hop&Rap H Easy Listening H Country H Classical H User1 H User2 H User3 H User4 H User5 H User6 STEREO (Initial setting) H MONO STEREO: Subwoofer stereo (UR) output MONO: Subwoofer monaural output 10 typical equalizer settings are preset at the factory for a variety of musical source material. • By selecting User's 1 to 6, you can recall the stored preset number in "Adjusting the Graphic Equalizer Curve" (page 32) or "Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve" (page 32). You can set the subwoofer output to stereo or monaural. Make sure to set the correct output for your subwoofer type. When the Media Xpander is on, you can adjust the Media Xpander level (refer to page 31). OFF (Initial setting) H ON MX (Media Xpander) makes vocals or instruments sound distinct regardless of the music source. The FM radio, CD, USB memory and iPod, will be able to reproduce the music clearly even in cars with a lot of road noise. Changing the source to which you want to apply Media Xpander. FM (MX level 1 to 3): The medium to high frequencies become clearer, and produces well balanced sound at all frequencies. You can change the unit, (cm or inch) of time correction. TCR Parameter (Initial setting) H TCR Parameter OFF (Initial setting) H ON • When Blackout mode is set to ON, in 5 seconds after returning to normal mode, all displays on the unit will tum off. • Ifany button on the unit is pressed during the blackout mode, the function will be displayedfor 5 seconds to show the operation before returning to Blackout mode. 31-EN

F·L (Initial setting) ~ F-R --7 R-L --7 R-R --7 (Front-L) (Front-R) (Rear-L) (Rear-R) SW-L ~ SW-R ~ F-L (Front-L) Adjusting the Time Correction Before performing the following procedures, refer to "About Time Correction" (page 34). I After selecting Time Correction from the Sound Field Adjustment mode, press BAND to select a speaker to be adjusted. R-L --7 R-R --7 (High-L) (High-R) 2.2ch (3WAY) System F-L (Initial setting) --7 F-R ~ (Mid-L) (Mid-R) SW-L ~ SW-R ~ F-L (Mid-L) 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to adjust the distance (O.O to 336.6cm). L =(distance to farthest speaker) - (distance to other speakers) Refer to "Time Correction Value List" on page 34. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to set another speaker. By setting these values to make its sound reach the listening position at the same time as the sound of other speakers. The setting of Parametric EQ/Graphic EQ Adjustment, Time Correction and X-Over can be adjusted in this mode. Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve You can modify the Equalizer settings to create a response curve more appealing to your personal taste. To adjust the Parametric Equalizer Curve, set the EQ mode to Parametric EQ. For details, refer to "Setting EQ mode" (page 31). I After selecting Parametric EO from the Sound Field Adjustment mode, press BAND to select the band to be adjusted. Band1 ~ Band2 --7 Band3 ~ Band4 ~ Band5 --7 Band1 2 Press to set the bandwidth (O). Adjustable bandwidth: 1, 1.5. 3 5 To adjust another band, repeat steps 1 to 4 and adjust all bands. • The frequencies ofadjacent bands cannot be adjusted within 4 steps. • While adjusting the Parametric EQ, you should consider the frequency response ofthe connected speakers. Adjusting the Crossover Settings Before performing the following procedures, refer to "About the Crossover" (page 35). Adjusting the Graphic Equalizer Curve You can modify the equalizer settings to create a response curve more appealing to your personal taste. To adjust the graphic equalizer curve, set the EQ mode to Graphic EQ. For details, refer to "Setting EQ mode" (page 31). I After selecting Graphic EO from the Sound Field Adjustment mode, press BAND to select the band to be adjusted. 2.2ch (3WAY) System I After selecting X-Over from the Sound Field Adjustment mode, press BAND to select the band to be adjusted. 2.2ch (3WAY) System I NORMAL (L=R) Setting Items: LOW / MID-L / MID-H / HIGH Band 1 --7 Band2 ~ Band3 --7 Band4 --7 Band5 ~ Band6 --7 Band7 --7 Band1 Band-1 (63 Hz) / Band-2 (150 Hz) / Band-3 (400 Hz) / Band-4 (1 kHz) / Band-5 (2.5 kHz) I Band-6 (6.3 kHz) I Band-7 (17.5 kHz) 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to adjust the level. Adjustable output level: -6 to +6 dB 3 To adjust another band, repeat steps 1 and 2, and then adjust all bands. 2.2ch (3WAY) System I INDIVIDUAL (UR) setting items: LOW-L / LOW-R / MID-L-L / MID-L-R / MID-H-L / MID-H-R / HIGH-L I HIGH-R 2 Press to set the bandwidth (O). Adjustable bandwidth: 1, 1.5. 3 5 To adjust another band, repeat steps 1 to 4 and adjust all bands. • The frequencies ofadjacent bands cannot be adjusted within 4 steps. • While adjusting the Parametric EQ, you should consider the frequency response ofthe connected speakers. Adjusting the Crossover Settings Before performing the following procedures, refer to "About the Crossover" (page 35). Adjusting the Graphic Equalizer Curve You can modify the equalizer settings to create a response curve more appealing to your personal taste. To adjust the graphic equalizer curve, set the EQ mode to Graphic EQ. For details, refer to "Setting EQ mode" (page 31). I After selecting Graphic EO from the Sound Field Adjustment mode, press BAND to select the band to be adjusted. 2.2ch (3WAY) System I After selecting X-Over from the Sound Field Adjustment mode, press BAND to select the band to be adjusted. 2.2ch (3WAY) System I NORMAL (L=R) Setting Items: LOW / MID-L / MID-H / HIGH Band 1 --7 Band2 ~ Band3 --7 Band4 --7 Band5 ~ Band6 --7 Band7 --7 Band1 Band-1 (63 Hz) / Band-2 (150 Hz) / Band-3 (400 Hz) / Band-4 (1 kHz) / Band-5 (2.5 kHz) I Band-6 (6.3 kHz) I Band-7 (17.5 kHz) 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to adjust the level. Adjustable output level: -6 to +6 dB 3 To adjust another band, repeat steps 1 and 2, and then adjust all bands. 2.2ch (3WAY) System I INDIVIDUAL (UR) setting items: LOW-L / LOW-R / MID-L-L / MID-L-R / MID-H-L / MID-H-R / HIGH-L I HIGH-R 2 Press

Adjustable slope: FLAT*, 6 dB/oct., 12 dB/oct., 18 dB/oct., 24 dB/oct. * FLAT can be setfor the HIGH slope only when User's is selected in "Setting the Response Slope for the High Range Speaker (1W Setup)" (page 31). Depending on the response characteristics of the speaker, care should be taken when setting the response slope to FLAT, as speaker damage may result. With this unit, a message is displayed when the response slope for the high range speaker is set to FLAT. 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to adjust the output level. Adjustable output level: -12 to 0 dB. S Repeat steps 1 to 4 to make adjustment to the other bands. 4.2ch (FRONTIREARISUSW.) System 1 After selecting X-Over from the Sound Field Adjustment mode, press BAND to select the band to be adjusted. 4.2ch (FRONTIREARlSUBW.) System I NORMAL (l.=R) settIng Items: LOW (SUB-W) / MID (REAR) / HIGH (FRONT) 4.2ch (FRONTIREARlSUBW.) System / INDIVIDUAL (LIA) Setting Items: LOW (SUB-W)-L / LOW (SUB-W)-R / MID (REAR)-L / MID (REAR)-R / HIGH (FRONT)-L / HIGH (FRONT)-R 2 Press.... or. to select the desired cut-off frequency (Crossover Point). Adjustable frequency bands: 4.2ch (FRONTIREARlSUBW.) System Setting Items: 20 Hz-200 Hz 3 Press SOURCElc!> to adjust the slope. Adjustable slope: FLAT, 6 dB/oct., 12 dB/oct., 18 dB/oct., 24 dB/oct. 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to adjust the output level. Adjustable output level: -12to 0 dB. S Repeat steps 1 to 4 to make adjustment to the other bands. • While adjusting the X-over, you should consider the frequency response ofthe connected speakers. • About the 2.2ch (3WAY)/4.2ch (FRONTIREARISUBW.) system You can switch to 2.2ch (3WAY)/4.2ch (FRONTIREARISUBW.) system mode with the 2.2ch (3WAY)/4.2ch (FRONTIREARISUBW.) s'witch on the PXA-HIOO. Fordetails, refer to the Owner's Manual of PXA-HIOO. Storing the Sound Field Adjustment Settings The Sound Field Adjustment Settings containing Parametric EQ/ Graphic EQ Adjustment. Time Correction and X-Over settings can be stored in the preset memory. 1 When the settings of Sound Field Adjustment have been completed, select anyone of the pre.et button. (1 through 6) In any Item of the Sound Field adjustment mode (e.g. X-Over), press and hold the desired preset buttons for at least 2 seconds. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select PROTECT YESINO, and then press {\IENT to store the adjusted contents. PROTECT YES (Initial setting) H PROTECT NO • If YES is selected. the adjusted contents are protected and stored into the preset buttons. When you want to store the parameter into a protected preset button, "Replace NOIYES" can be selected. • IfNO is selected, the preset is stored. • While perform this operation, all adjusted contents ofParametric EQlGraphic EQ, TIme Correction and X-Over will be stored in the preset buttons. • The stored contents are not deleted even when resetting the unit or disconnecting the battery. • The stored contents can be recalled by performing operation in "Recalling the Stored Sound Field Adjustment Settings" (page 33). Recalling the Stored Sound Field Adjustment Settings The stored Sound Field Settings contain Parametric EQ/Graphic EQ Adjustment. Time Correction and X-Over settings that are stored in the preset memory. 1 After selecting any Item of the Sound Field Adjustment mode (e.g. X-Over), press anyone of the pre.et button. (1 through 6) that has your desired characteristic In memory to recall the stored settings. 2 Press the pre.et button. again to return to the Sound Field Adjustment mode. • While performing this operation, all adjustment contents of Parametric EQIGraphic EQ, TIme Correction and X-Over stored in the preset buttons will be recalled. 33-EN 3 Press SOURCElc!> to adjust the slope. Adjustable slope: FLAT*, 6 dB/oct., 12 dB/oct., 18 dB/oct., 24 dB/oct. * FLAT can be setfor the HIGH slope only when User's is selected in "Setting the Response Slope for the High Range Speaker (1W Setup)" (page 31). Depending on the response characteristics of the speaker, care should be taken when setting the response slope to FLAT, as speaker damage may result. With this unit, a message is displayed when the response slope for the high range speaker is set to FLAT. 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to adjust the output level. Adjustable output level: -12 to 0 dB. S Repeat steps 1 to 4 to make adjustment to the other bands. 4.2ch (FRONTIREARISUSW.) System 1 After selecting X-Over from the Sound Field Adjustment mode, press BAND to select the band to be adjusted. 4.2ch (FRONTIREARlSUBW.) System I NORMAL (l.=R) settIng Items: LOW (SUB-W) / MID (REAR) / HIGH (FRONT) 4.2ch (FRONTIREARlSUBW.) System / INDIVIDUAL (LIA) Setting Items: LOW (SUB-W)-L / LOW (SUB-W)-R / MID (REAR)-L / MID (REAR)-R / HIGH (FRONT)-L / HIGH (FRONT)-R 2 Press.... or. to select the desired cut-off frequency (Crossover Point). Adjustable frequency bands: 4.2ch (FRONTIREARlSUBW.) System Setting Items: 20 Hz-200 Hz 3 Press SOURCElc!> to adjust the slope. Adjustable slope: FLAT, 6 dB/oct., 12 dB/oct., 18 dB/oct., 24 dB/oct. 4 Turn the Rotary encoder to adjust the output level. Adjustable output level: -12to 0 dB. S Repeat steps 1 to 4 to make adjustment to the other bands. • While adjusting the X-over, you should consider the frequency response ofthe connected speakers. • About the 2.2ch (3WAY)/4.2ch (FRONTIREARISUBW.) system You can switch to 2.2ch (3WAY)/4.2ch (FRONTIREARISUBW.) system mode with the 2.2ch (3WAY)/4.2ch (FRONTIREARISUBW.) s'witch on the PXA-HIOO. Fordetails, refer to the Owner's Manual of PXA-HIOO. Storing the Sound Field Adjustment Settings The Sound Field Adjustment Settings containing Parametric EQ/ Graphic EQ Adjustment. Time Correction and X-Over settings can be stored in the preset memory. 1 When the settings of Sound Field Adjustment have been completed, select anyone of the pre.et button. (1 through 6) In any Item of the Sound Field adjustment mode (e.g. X-Over), press and hold the desired preset buttons for at least 2 seconds. 2 Turn the Rotary encoder to select PROTECT YESINO, and then press {\IENT to store the adjusted contents. PROTECT YES (Initial setting) H PROTECT NO • If YES is selected. the adjusted contents are protected and stored into the preset buttons. When you want to store the parameter into a protected preset button, "Replace NOIYES" can be selected. • IfNO is selected, the preset is stored. • While perform this operation, all adjusted contents ofParametric EQjGraphic EQ, TIme Correction and X-Over will be stored in the preset buttons. • The stored contents are not deleted even when resetting the unit or disconnecting the battery. • The stored contents can be recalled by performing operation in "Recalling the Stored Sound Field Adjustment Settings" (page 33). Recalling the Stored Sound Field Adjustment Settings The stored Sound Field Settings contain Parametric EQ/Graphic EQ Adjustment. Time Correction and X-Over settings that are stored in the preset memory. 1 After selecting any Item of the Sound Field Adjustment mode (e.g. X-Over), press anyone of the pre.et button. (1 through 6) that has your desired characteristic In memory to recall the stored settings. 2 Press the pre.et button. again to return to the Sound Field Adjustment mode. • While performing this operation, all adjustment contents of Parametric EQIGraphic EQ, TIme Correction and X-Over stored in the preset buttons will be recalled. 33-EN

The distance between the listener and the speakers in a car vary widely due to the complex speaker placement. This difference in the distances from the speakers to the listener creates a shift in the sounds image and frequency characteristics. This is caused by the time delay between the sound reaching the listener's right versus the left ear. To correct this. this unit is able to delay the audio signal to the speakers closest to the listener. This effectively creates a perception of increased distance for those speakers. The listener can be placed at an equal distance between the left and right speakers for optimum staging. The adjustment will be made for each speaker in 3.4cm steps. Adjust the time correction level of the front left speaker to a high value and the rear right to zero or a low value. The sound is not balanced because the distance between the listening position and the various speakers is different. The difference in distance between the front left speaker and the rear right speaker is 1.75 m (68-7/8'). Here we calculate the time correction value for the front left speaker in the diagram on the above. Conditions: Farthest Speaker -listening position: 2.25 m (88-9/16") Front left speaker - listening position: 0.5 m (19-11/16') Calculation: L =2.25 m - 0.5 m =1.75 m (68-7/8') Time correction = 1.75 -7 343.1 x 1000 = 5.1 (ms) ./ Speed ofsound: 343 m1s (765 mph) at 20°C In other words, giving the front left speaker a time correction value of 5.1 ms makes it seem as if its distance from the listener is the same as the distance to the farthest speaker. Time correction eliminates the differences in the time required for the sound to reach the listening position. The time of the front left speaker is corrected by 5.1 ms so that its sound reaches the listening position at the same time as the sound of other speakers. "]~~!!IIILi}'t(IIIIiIfll!.~,I(I§!!J1'~~1 Adjust the time correction level of each speaker to almost the same level. 1 Sit In the listening position (driver's seat, etc,) and measure the distance (In meters) between your head and the various speakers, 2 Calculate the difference between the distance correction value to the farthest speaker and the other speakers, L = (distance to farthest speaker) - (distance to other speakers) 34-EN These values are the time correction values for the different speakers. Setting these values to make each sound reach the listening position at the same time as the sound of other speakers. Time Correction Value List Delay Time Distance Distance Delay Time Distance Distance Difference Difference Number (ms) (em) (inch) Number (ms) (em) (inch) 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 51 5.1 173.4 68.3 1 0.1 3.4 1.3 52 5.2 176.8 69.7 2 0.2 68 2.7 53 5.3 180.2 710 3 03 10.2 4.0 54 5.4 183.6 72.4 4 0.4 13.6 5.4 55 5.5 187.0 73.7 5 0.5 170 6.7 56 5.6 190.4 75.0 6 0.6 20.4 80 57 5.7 193.8 76.4 7 0.7 238 9.4 58 5.8 1972 77.7 8 0.8 27.2 10.7 59 5.9 200.6 79.1 9 09 30.6 12.1 60 6.0 204.0 80.4 10 10 340 13.4 61 61 207.4 81.7 11 1.1 37.4 14.7 62 6.2 210.8 83.1 12 1.2 408 16.1 63 63 214.2 84.4 13 1.3 44.2 17.4 64 6.4 217.6 85.8 14 1.4 47.6 18.8 65 6.5 221.0 87.1 15 15 510 20.1 66 6.6 224.4 88.4 16 1.6 54.4 21.4 67 6.7 227.8 89.8 17 1.7 578 22.8 66 6.8 231.2 91.1 18 18 612 24.1 69 69 234.6 92.5 19 1.9 64.6 25.5 70 7.0 238.0 938 20 2.0 68.0 26.8 71 7.1 241.4 95.1 21 2.1 71.4 28.1 72 7.2 244.8 96.5 22 2.2 748 29.5 73 73 248.2 97.8 23 2.3 78.2 308 74 7.4 251.6 99.2 24 2.4 81.6 32.2 75 75 255.0 100.5 25 25 85.0 33.5 76 76 258.4 1018 26 2.6 88.4 34.8 77 7.7 261.8 1032 27 2.7 91.8 36.2 78 7.8 265.2 104.5 28 2.8 95.2 37.5 79 7.9 268.6 1059 29 2.9 98.6 38.9 80 8.0 272.0 107.2 30 30 102.0 40.2 81 8.1 275.4 1085 31 3.1 105.4 415 82 8.2 278.8 109.9 32 3.2 108.8 42.9 83 8.3 282.2 111.2 33 33 1122 44.2 84 8.4 285.6 112.6 34 3.4 115.6 45.6 85 8.5 289.0 113.9 35 35 119.0 46.9 86 8.6 292.4 115.2 36 3.6 122.4 48.2 87 8.7 295.8 116.6 37 3.7 125.8 496 88 8.8 299.2 117.9 38 38 1292 50.9 89 89 302.6 119.3 39 3.9 1326 52.3 90 90 306.0 120.6 40 4.0 136.0 536 91 9.1 309.4 121.9 41 4.1 139.4 54.9 92 92 312.8 123.3 42 4.2 142.8 56.3 93 9.3 316.2 124.6 43 4.3 146.2 576 94 9.4 319.6 126.0 44 4.4 149.6 59.0 95 9.5 323.0 127.3 45 4.5 153.0 603 96 9.6 326.4 128.6 46 4.6 156.4 61.6 97 97 3298 130.0 47 4.7 159.8 63.0 98 9.8 333.2 131.3 48 4.8 163.2 64.3 99 99 336.6 132.7 49 4.9 166.6 65.7 ------- 50 5.0 170.0 670 About Time Correction The distance between the listener and the speakers in a car vary widely due to the complex speaker placement. This difference in the distances from the speakers to the listener creates a shift in the sounds image and frequency characteristics. This is caused by the time delay between the sound reaching the listener's right versus the left ear. To correct this. this unit is able to delay the audio signal to the speakers closest to the listener. This effectively creates a perception of increased distance for those speakers. The listener can be placed at an equal distance between the left and right speakers for optimum staging. The adjustment will be made for each speaker in 3.4cm steps. Adjust the time correction level of the front left speaker to a high value and the rear right to zero or a low value. The sound is not balanced because the distance between the listening position and the various speakers is different. The difference in distance between the front left speaker and the rear right speaker is 1.75 m (68-7/8'). Here we calculate the time correction value for the front left speaker in the diagram on the above. Conditions: Farthest Speaker -listening position: 2.25 m (88-9/16") Front left speaker - listening position: 0.5 m (19-11/16') Calculation: L =2.25 m - 0.5 m =1.75 m (68-7/8') Time correction = 1.75 -7 343.1 x 1000 = 5.1 (ms) ./ Speed ofsound: 343 mls (765 mph) at 20°C In other words, giving the front left speaker a time correction value of 5.1 ms makes it seem as if its distance from the listener is the same as the distance to the farthest speaker. Time correction eliminates the differences in the time required for the sound to reach the listening position. The time of the front left speaker is corrected by 5.1 ms so that its sound reaches the listening position at the same time as the sound of other speakers. "]~~!!IIILi}'t(IIIIiIfll!.~,I(I§!!J1'~~1 Adjust the time correction level of each speaker to almost the same level. 1 Sit In the listening position (driver's seat, etc,) and measure the distance (In meters) between your head and the various speakers, 2 Calculate the difference between the distance correction value to the farthest speaker and the other speakers, L = (distance to farthest speaker) - (distance to other speakers) 34-EN These values are the time correction values for the different speakers. Setting these values to make each sound reach the listening position at the same time as the sound of other speakers. Time Correction Value List Delay Time Distance Distance Delay Time Distance Distance Difference Difference Number (ms) (em) (inch) Number (ms) (em) (inch) 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 51 5.1 173.4 68.3 1 0.1 3.4 1.3 52 5.2 176.8 69.7 2 0.2 68 2.7 53 5.3 180.2 710 3 03 10.2 4.0 54 5.4 183.6 72.4 4 0.4 13.6 5.4 55 5.5 187.0 73.7 5 0.5 170 6.7 56 5.6 190.4 75.0 6 0.6 20.4 80 57 5.7 193.8 76.4 7 0.7 238 9.4 58 5.8 1972 77.7 8 0.8 27.2 10.7 59 5.9 200.6 79.1 9 09 30.6 12.1 60 6.0 204.0 80.4 10 10 340 13.4 61 61 207.4 81.7 11 1.1 37.4 14.7 62 6.2 210.8 83.1 12 1.2 408 16.1 63 63 214.2 84.4 13 1.3 44.2 17.4 64 6.4 217.6 85.8 14 1.4 47.6 18.8 65 6.5 221.0 87.1 15 15 510 20.1 66 6.6 224.4 88.4 16 1.6 54.4 21.4 67 6.7 227.8 89.8 17 1.7 578 22.8 66 6.8 231.2 91.1 18 18 612 24.1 69 69 234.6 92.5 19 1.9 64.6 25.5 70 7.0 238.0 938 20 2.0 68.0 26.8 71 7.1 241.4 95.1 21 2.1 71.4 28.1 72 7.2 244.8 96.5 22 2.2 748 29.5 73 73 248.2 97.8 23 2.3 78.2 308 74 7.4 251.6 99.2 24 2.4 81.6 32.2 75 75 255.0 100.5 25 25 85.0 33.5 76 76 258.4 1018 26 2.6 88.4 34.8 77 7.7 261.8 1032 27 2.7 91.8 36.2 78 7.8 265.2 104.5 28 2.8 95.2 37.5 79 7.9 268.6 1059 29 2.9 98.6 38.9 80 8.0 272.0 107.2 30 30 102.0 40.2 81 8.1 275.4 1085 31 3.1 105.4 415 82 8.2 278.8 109.9 32 3.2 108.8 42.9 83 8.3 282.2 111.2 33 33 1122 44.2 84 8.4 285.6 112.6 34 3.4 115.6 45.6 85 8.5 289.0 113.9 35 35 119.0 46.9 86 8.6 292.4 115.2 36 3.6 122.4 48.2 87 8.7 295.8 116.6 37 3.7 125.8 496 88 8.8 299.2 117.9 38 38 1292 50.9 89 89 302.6 119.3 39 3.9 1326 52.3 90 90 306.0 120.6 40 4.0 136.0 536 91 9.1 309.4 121.9 41 4.1 139.4 54.9 92 92 312.8 123.3 42 4.2 142.8 56.3 93 9.3 316.2 124.6 43 4.3 146.2 576 94 9.4 319.6 126.0 44 4.4 149.6 59.0 95 9.5 323.0 127.3 45 4.5 153.0 603 96 9.6 326.4 128.6 46 4.6 156.4 61.6 97 97 3298 130.0 47 4.7 159.8 63.0 98 9.8 333.2 131.3 48 4.8 163.2 64.3 99 99 336.6 132.7 49 4.9 166.6 65.7 ------- 50 5.0 170.0 670

Level adjusting (0 to -12 dB) Output frequency range • HPF (high pass filter): Cuts the lowerfrequencies and allows the higherfrequencies to pass, • LPF (low pass filter): Cuts the higherfrequencies and allows the lowerfrequencies to pass. • Slope: The level change (in dB)forafrequency change ofone octave. • The higher the slope value, the steeper the slope becomes. • Adjust the slope to FLAT to bypass the HP or LPfilters, • Do not use a tweeter without the HPF on or set to a low frequency, as it may cause damage to the speaker due to the low frequency content. • You cannot adjust the crossoverfrequency higher than the HPF or lower than the LPF. • Adjustment should be made according to the recommended crossover frequency ofthe connected speakers. Determine the recommended crossoverfrequency ofthe speakers. Adjusting to a frequency range outside that recommended may cause damage to the speakers. For the recommended crossoverfrequencies ofAlpine speakers. refer to the respective Owner's Manual. We are not responsible for damage or malfunction ofspeakers caused by using the crossover outside the recommended value. Crossover (X-OVER): This unit is equipped with an active crossover. The crossover limits the frequencies delivered to the outputs. Each channel is controlled independently. Thus, each speaker pair can be driven by the frequencies for which they have been optimally designed. The crossover adjusts the HPF (high pass filter) or LPF (low pass filter) of each band. and also the slope (how fast the filter rolls off the highs or lows). Adjustments should be made according to the reproduction characteristics of the speakers. Depending on the speakers, a passive network may not be necessary. If you are unsure about this point. please consult your authorized Alpine dealer. 4.2ch (FRONTIREARISUBW.) mode Cut-off frequency Slope (113 octave steps) Level HPF LPF HPF LPF Low range 20Hz- FLAT, 6, Oto speaker ---- 200 Hz ---- 12,18, -12 dB 24 dB/oct. Rear high 20 Hz- FLAT,6, oto range 200 Hz ---- 12,18, ---- -12dB speaker 24 dB/oct. Front high 20 Hz- FLAT, 6, oto range 200 Hz ---- 12.18, ---- -12 dB speaker 24 dB/oct. ~·~r.~·I.·· h . ,)5" .""'.'" ,.,,,' < ,,~ ,",' '/ '."~ (Different from actual display) 2.2ch (3WAY) mode Cut-off frequency Slope (113 octave steps) Level HPF LPF HPF LPF Low 20 Hz- FLAT,6, o to range --.- 200 Hz ---- 12,18, -12 dB speaker 24 dB/oct. Midrange 20 Hz- 20 Hz- FLAT,6, FLAT,6. oto 12,18, 12.18, speaker 200 Hz 20 kHz 24 dB/oct. 24 dB/oct. -12 dB 1 kHz- FLAT* High 20 kHz, oto range (20 Hz- ---- 6,12,18, ---- -12 dB speaker 20 kHz)* 24 dB/oct. * Only when selecting User's in "Selling the Response Slope for the High Range Speaker (7W Setup)" (page 31), (Different from actual display) 20Hz ,.. ----~-' , -- ---------- SlopeFLAT , I : : Slope adjusting , I , ' , ', : (Different from actual display) HPF cut-off LPF cut-off frequency frequency 35-EN About the Crossover Level adjusting (0 to -12 dB) Output frequency range • HPF (high passjilter): Cuts the lowerfrequencies and allows the higherfrequencies to pass, • LPF (low passjilter): Cuts the higherfrequencies and allows the lowerfrequencies to pass. • Slope: The level change (in dB)forafrequency change ofone octave. • The higher the slope value, the steeper the slope becomes. • Adjust the slope to FLAT to bypass the HP or LPjilters, • Do not use a tweeter without the HPF on or set to a low frequency, as it may cause damage to the speaker due to the low frequency content. • You cannot adjust the crossoverfrequency higher than the HPF or lower than the LPF. • Adjustment should be made according to the recommended crossover frequency ofthe connected speakers. Determine the recommended crossoverfrequency ofthe speakers. Adjusting to a frequency range outside that recommended may cause damage to the speakers. For the recommended crossoverfrequencies ofAlpine speakers. refer to the respective Owner's Manual. We are not responsible for damage or malfunction ofspeakers caused by using the crossover outside the recommended value. Crossover (X·OVER): This unit is equipped with an active crossover. The crossover limits the frequencies delivered to the outputs. Each channel is controlled independently. Thus, each speaker pair can be driven by the frequencies for which they have been optimally designed. The crossover adjusts the HPF (high pass filter) or LPF (low pass filter) of each band. and also the slope (how fast the filter rolls off the highs or lows). Adjustments should be made according to the reproduction characteristics of the speakers. Depending on the speakers, a passive network may not be necessary. If you are unsure about this point. please consult your authorized Alpine dealer. 4.2ch (FRONTIREARISUBW.) mode Cut-off frequency Slope (113 octave steps) Level HPF LPF HPF LPF Low range 20Hz- FLAT, 6, Oto speaker ---- 200 Hz ---- 12,18, -12 dB 24 dB/ocl. Rear high 20 Hz- FLAT,6, oto range 200 Hz ---- 12,18, ---- -12dB speaker 24 dB/ocl. Front high 20 Hz- FLAT, 6, oto range 200 Hz ---- 12.18, ---- -12 dB speaker 24 dB/ocl. ~·~r.~·I.·· h . ,)5" .""'.'=' ,.,,,' < "~ ,",' '/ '."~ (Different from actual display) 2.2ch (3WAY) mode Cut-off frequency Slope (113 octave steps) Level HPF LPF HPF LPF Low 20 Hz- FLAT,6, o to range --.- 200 Hz ---- 12,18, -12 dB speaker 24 dB/ocl. Midrange 20 Hz- 20 Hz- FLAT,6, FLAT,6. oto 12,18, 12.18, speaker 200 Hz 20 kHz 24 dB/ocl. 24 dB/oct. -12 dB 1 kHz- FLAT* High 20 kHz, oto range (20 Hz- ---- 6,12,18, ---- -12 dB speaker 20 kHz)* 24 dB/ocl. * Only when selecting User's in "Selling the Response Slope for the High Range Speaker (7W Setup)" (page 31), (Different from actual display) 20Hz ,.. ----~-' , -- ---------- SlopeFLAT , I : : Slope adjusting , I , ' , ', : (Different from actual display) HPF cut-off LPF cut-off frequency frequency 35-EN

rehearsing, recording and mixing, that vision is ready for us to hear on discs, radio and other media. But do we hear it as the artist created it? Unfortunately, the reality is that we are almost never able to listen to it in the exact way the artist intended. Especially when we are listening in a car. Car interiors are full of materials that obstruct and degrade sound quality. For example, windows amplify and reflect high frequencies. Seat and dashboard coverings change certain frequencies. Carpets absorb and suppress mid frequencies. Graphic and parametric EQs are only partial remedies for these problems. In addition, the speakers are not located at equal distances from listeners, creating an unbalanced, uncentred sound stage. Time correction can help fix this, but only for one listening position. 36-EN These acoustical problems are so severe that no correction system has been able to overcome them. Until now, with the introduction of IMPRINT, Alpine provides a hardware/software combination that not only solves these problems, it actually improves the sound stage, tonal balance and definition - and does it automatically, in a maner of minutes! IMPRINT using MultEQ is superior to other equalisation systems in five ways. • It is the only system that measures the entire listening area, capturing time domain information from each listening location and applying a proprietary method for processing it to represent all seat locations. This gives the people in each seat the optimal listening experience. • It corrects both time and frequency problems, for an improved soundstage and smoother, more natural sound. • It uses dynamic frequency allocation to apply hundreds of points of correction to those areas where the sound problems are greatest. • It determines optimized blending points for low frequency crossovers. • It provides, in minutes, vehicle sound tuning that generally takes skilled professionals days to accomplish. About IMPRINT • All good music starts as an artist's vision. After countless hours of rehearsing. recording and mixing. that vision is ready for us to hear on discs. radio and other media. But do we hear it as the artist created it? Unfortunately. the reality is that we are almost never able to listen to it in the exact way the artist intended. Especially when we are listening in a car. Car interiors are full of materials that obstruct and degrade sound quality. For example. windows amplify and reflect high frequencies. Seat and dashboard coverings change certain frequencies. Carpets absorb and suppress mid frequencies. Graphic and parametric EQs are only partial remedies for these problems. In addition. the speakers are not located at equal distances from listeners. creating an unbalanced. uncentred sound stage. Time correction can help fix this. but only for one listening position. 36-EN These acoustical problems are so severe that no correction system has been able to overcome them. Until now. with the introduction of IMPRINT. Alpine provides a hardware/software combination that not only solves these problems. it actually improves the sound stage. tonal balance and definition - and does it automatically. in a maner of minutes! IMPRINT using MultEQ is superior to other equalisation systems in five ways. • It is the only system that measures the entire listening area, capturing time domain information from each listening location and applying a proprietary method for processing it to represent all seat locations. This gives the people in each seat the optimal listening experience. • It corrects both time and frequency problems, for an improved soundstage and smoother, more natural sound. • It uses dynamic frequency allocation to apply hundreds of points of correction to those areas where the sound problems are greatest. • It determines optimized blending points for low frequency crossovers. • It provides, in minutes, vehicle sound tuning that generally takes skilled professionals days to accomplish.

Controlling CD Changer (Optional) An optional6-disc or l2-disc CD Changer may be connected to this unit if it is Ai-NET compatible. With a CD Changer connected to the Ai-NET input of this unit, the CD Changer will be controllable from this unit. Using the KCA-400c (Multi-Changer Switching device) or the KCA-4IOC (Versatile Link Terminal) multiple changers can be controlled by this unit. See "Multi-Changer Selection (Optional)" on page 37 for selecting the CD Changers. • The controls on this unit for CD Changer operation are operative only when a CD Changer is connected. • The DVD changer (optional) is controllable from this unit as well as the CD changer. 1 Press SOURCE/ to activate the CHANGER mode. • The source indicator varies depending on the connected source. • Press BAND to switch the Disc mode in the Changer mode. 2 Press F/SETUP to activate Disc Select mode. Disc Select Mode Disc Select Mode • -7 -7 (Disc No.1-·6) (Disc NO.7-12) Disc Select Mode RPT/M.I.X. Mode -7 (Disc No.1-6) 3 Press the disc select buttons (1 through 6) corresponding to one of the discs loaded in the CD Changer. The selected disc number appears in the display and CD/MP3 playback starts. • After selecting the desired disc, you can operate in the same way as for the CD player ofthis unit. For details. please see the CDIMP31 WMAlAAC section. * When a 12-disc CD changer is connected. Playing MP3 Files with the CD Changer (Optional) If you connect a changer compatible with MP3, you can play CD-ROMs, CD-Rs. and CD-RWs containing MP3 files on this unit. 1 Press SOURCE/ to switch to the MP3 Changer mode. 2 Press anyone of the disc select buttons (1 through 6) corresponding to one of the discs loaded in the CD Changer. 3 To pause playback, press .'11. Pressing ./11 again will resume playback. • The unit can play discs containing both audio data and MP3 data. • For operating MP3 with an MP3 compatible CD Changer, refer to "CDIMP3IWMAlAAC" pages JO to 13. Multi-Changer Selection (Optional) Alpine's Ai-NET system will suppon up to 6 CD Changers. When operating two or more changers. the KCA-4OOC (Multi-Changer Switching device) must be used. If you use I Switching device. you can connect up to 4 CD Changers. If you use 2 Switching devices. you can connect up to 6 CD Changers. When using KCA-4IOC (Versatile Link Terminal), you can connect two changers and two external outputs (AUX). 1 Press SOURCE/ on this unit to activate the CD Changer mode. Alternatively. press SOURCE on the remote control (RUE-4202) to activate the CD Changer mode. SOURCE ----j,...----, ---'1::;:.e--'--1f-- BAND 2 Press BAND on this unit or the RUE-4202 to activate the CD Changer Selection mode. The CD Changer Selection mode remains active for a few seconds. 3 Press BAND until the desired CD Changer indicator appears on the display. Alternatively press BAND on the Remote Control until the desired changer indicator appears on the display. • Ifthe selected CD Changer is not connected. the display will show "NO CHANGER (No.)". • To operate the selected changer, see "CDIMP3IWMAlAAC" (pages JO to 13). • Forfunher details about the external input (AUX) when using KCA-4JOC. see "Setting the AUX Mode (V-Link)" on page 20. 37-EN F/SETUP Select buttons (1 through 6) Controlling CD Changer (Optional) An optional6-disc or l2-disc CD Changer may be connected to this unit if it is Ai-NET compatible. With a CD Changer connected to the Ai-NET input of this unit, the CD Changer will be controllable from this unit. Using the KCA-400c (Multi-Changer Switching device) or the KCA-4IOC (Versatile Link Terminal) multiple changers can be controlled by this unit. See "Multi-Changer Selection (Optional)" on page 37 for selecting the CD Changers. • The controls on this unit for CD Changer operation are operative only when a CD Changer is connected. • The DVD changer (optional) is controllable from this unit as well as the CD changer. 1 Press SOURCE/ to activate the CHANGER mode. • The source indicator varies depending on the connected source. • Press BAND to switch the Disc mode in the Changer mode. 2 Press F/SETUP to activate Disc Select mode. Disc Select Mode Disc Select Mode • -7 -7 (Disc No.1-·6) (Disc NO.7-12) Disc Select Mode RPT/M.I.X. Mode -7 (Disc No.1-6) 3 Press the disc select buttons (1 through 6) corresponding to one of the discs loaded in the CD Changer. The selected disc number appears in the display and CD/MP3 playback starts. • After selecting the desired disc, you can operate in the same way as for the CD player ofthis unit. For details. please see the CDIMP31 WMAlAAC section. * When a 12-disc CD changer is connected. Playing MP3 Files with the CD Changer (Optional) If you connect a changer compatible with MP3, you can play CD-ROMs, CD-Rs. and CD-RWs containing MP3 files on this unit. 1 Press SOURCE/ to switch to the MP3 Changer mode. 2 Press anyone of the disc select buttons (1 through 6) corresponding to one of the discs loaded in the CD Changer. 3 To pause playback, press .'11. Pressing ./11 again will resume playback. • The unit can play discs containing both audio data and MP3 data. • For operating MP3 with an MP3 compatible CD Changer, refer to "CDIMP3IWMAlAAC" pages JO to 13. Multi-Changer Selection (Optional) Alpine's Ai-NET system will suppon up to 6 CD Changers. When operating two or more changers. the KCA-4OOC (Multi-Changer Switching device) must be used. If you use I Switching device. you can connect up to 4 CD Changers. If you use 2 Switching devices. you can connect up to 6 CD Changers. When using KCA-4IOC (Versatile Link Terminal), you can connect two changers and two external outputs (AUX). 1 Press SOURCE/ on this unit to activate the CD Changer mode. Alternatively. press SOURCE on the remote control (RUE-4202) to activate the CD Changer mode. SOURCE ----j,...----, ---'1::;:.e--'--1f-- BAND 2 Press BAND on this unit or the RUE-4202 to activate the CD Changer Selection mode. The CD Changer Selection mode remains active for a few seconds. 3 Press BAND until the desired CD Changer indicator appears on the display. Alternatively press BAND on the Remote Control until the desired changer indicator appears on the display. • Ifthe selected CD Changer is not connected. the display will show "NO CHANGER (No.)". • To operate the selected changer, see "CDIMP3IWMAlAAC" (pages JO to 13). • Forfunher details about the external input (AUX) when using KCA-4JOC. see "Setting the AUX Mode (V-Link)" on page 20. 37-EN

CD Source Button Press this button to select the audio source. @ Volume Adjustment Buttons To increase the volume level: Press the l6l button To decrease the volume level: Press the rlI button @ • Button Radio mode: Pressing this button will select, in ascending order, stations programmed into the radio's presets as shown below. 1I]~[1] ... ~~1I] CD Changer mode: DISC Select (UP) button Press this button to select a disc in ascending order. MP3NJMA/AAC mode: Folder Select (UP) button Press this button to select the folder. MP3 compatible CD changer mode: Folder Select (UP) / DISC Select (UP) button Press this button to select a folder in ascending order. Press and hold this button to select a disc in ascending order. iPod mode: Switches Playlisl/Artisl/Album/Genre/Composer. @ ... DNButton Radio mode: SEEK (ON) Button CD/iPod mode: Press this button to go back to the beginning of the current track. <§) • /11 Button Press this button to switch between the Play and Pause modes for CD. 38-EN ® Audio Processor Button Each press of the button changes the audio processor mode. For details, refer to "Operating the Audio Processor" as shown below. Press the button to activate the external audio processor mode when the external audio processor is connected. * * For the operation ofexternal audio processor, refer to the Owner's Manual ofthe external audio processor you purchased. When the IMPRINT·BOX (PXA·HlOO) (sold separately) is connected. refer to "IMPRINT Operation (Optional)" on page 29. (j) Power Button Press this button to turn the power on/off. @ Band Button Radio mode: BAND Button Ptess this button and the band will change. Changer mode: To switch the changer. ® ~ UP Button Radio mode: SEEK (UP) button CD/iPod mode: Press this button to advance to the beginning of the next track. @> T Button Radio mode: Pressing this button will select, in descending order, stations programmed into the radio's presets as shown below. [!] -7 [!] ... II] -7 [!] CD Changer mode: DISC Select (ON) button Press this button to select a disc in descending order. MP3NJMA/AAC mode: Folder Select (ON) button Press this button to select the folder. MP3 compatible CD changer mode: Folder Select (ON) / DISC Select (ON) button Press this button to select a folder in descending order. Press and hold this button to select a disc in descending order. iPod mode: Switches Playlisl/Artisl/Album/Genre/Composer. ® Mute Button Press this button to lower the volume by 20 dB instantly. Press this button again to cancel. Operating the Audio Processor 1 Press A.PROC to select the mode. Normal mode -7 Time Correction -7 X-OYER -7 Normal mode 2 Press. or T to select the item. Time Correction mode/Crossover (X-OYER) mode: Select from MEMORY 1 through 6. Remote Control Controls on Remote Control CD Source Button Press this button to select the audio source. @ Volume Adjustment Buttons To increase the volume level: Press the l6l button To decrease the volume level: Press the rlI button @ • Button Radio mode: Pressing this button will select, in ascending order, stations programmed into the radio's presets as shown below. 1I]~[1] ... ~~1I] CD Changer mode: DISC Select (UP) button Press this button to select a disc in ascending order. MP3NJMA/AAC mode: Folder Select (UP) button Press this button to select the folder. MP3 compatible CD changer mode: Folder Select (UP) / DISC Select (UP) button Press this button to select a folder in ascending order. Press and hold this button to select a disc in ascending order. iPod mode: Switches Playlisl/Artisl/Album/Genre/Composer. @ ... DNButton Radio mode: SEEK (ON) Button CD/iPod mode: Press this button to go back to the beginning of the current track. <§) • /11 Button Press this button to switch between the Play and Pause modes for CD. 38-EN ® Audio Processor Button Each press of the button changes the audio processor mode. For details, refer to "Operating the Audio Processor" as shown below. Press the button to activate the external audio processor mode when the external audio processor is connected. * * For the operation ofexternal audio processor, refer to the Owner's Manual ofthe external audio processor you purchased. When the IMPRINT·BOX (PXA·HlOO) (sold separately) is connected. refer to "IMPRINT Operation (Optional)" on page 29. (j) Power Button Press this button to turn the power on/off. @ Band Button Radio mode: BAND Button Ptess this button and the band will change. Changer mode: To switch the changer. ® ~ UP Button Radio mode: SEEK (UP) button CD/iPod mode: Press this button to advance to the beginning of the next track. @> T Button Radio mode: Pressing this button will select, in descending order, stations programmed into the radio's presets as shown below. [!] -7 [!] ... II] -7 [!] CD Changer mode: DISC Select (ON) button Press this button to select a disc in descending order. MP3NJMA/AAC mode: Folder Select (ON) button Press this button to select the folder. MP3 compatible CD changer mode: Folder Select (ON) / DISC Select (ON) button Press this button to select a folder in descending order. Press and hold this button to select a disc in descending order. iPod mode: Switches Playlisl/Artisl/Album/Genre/Composer. ® Mute Button Press this button to lower the volume by 20 dB instantly. Press this button again to cancel. Operating the Audio Processor 1 Press A.PROC to select the mode. Normal mode -7 Time Correction -7 X-OYER -7 Normal mode 2 Press. or T to select the item. Time Correction mode/Crossover (X-OYER) mode: Select from MEMORY 1 through 6.

1 Opening the battery cover Slide out the battery cover while firmly pressing in the direction of the arrow. 2 Replacing the battery Insert the batteries, observing the polarities as illustrated. ill 3 Closing the cover Slide the cover as illustrated until a click is heard. Controllable With Remote Control Point the remote control transmitter at the remote control sensor. Remote control sensor Connectable to Remote Control Interface Box This unit may be controlled from the vehicle's audio controls. An optional Alpine Remote Control Interface Box must be used. For details, contact your Alpine dealer. 39-EN Battery Replacement Applicable banery: Use two "AAA" sized dry batteries or equivalent. 1 Opening the battery cover Slide out the battery cover while firmly pressing in the direction of the arrow. 2 Replacing the battery Insert the batteries, observing the polarities as illustrated. ill 3 Closing the cover Slide the cover as illustrated until a click is heard. Controllable With Remote Control Point the remote control transmitter at the remote control sensor. Remote control sensor Connectable to Remote Control Interface Box This unit may be controlled from the vehicle's audio controls. An optional Alpine Remote Control Interface Box must be used. For details, contact your Alpine dealer. 39-EN

If you encounter a problem, please tum the power off, then on again. If the unit is still not functioning normally, please review the items in the following checklist. This guide will help you isolate the problem if the unit is at fault. Otherwise, make sure the rest of your system is properly connected or consult your authorized Alpine dealer. No function or display. • Vehicle's ignition is off. · If connected following instructions, the unit will not operate with the vehicle's ignition off. • Improper power lead (Red) and battery lead (Yellow) connections. · Check power lead and battery lead connections. • Blown fuse. • Check the fuse of the unit; replace with the proper value if necessary. • Internal micro-computer malfunctioned due to interference noise etc. • Press the RESET switch with a ballpoint pen or other pointed article. Unable to receive stations. • No antenna or open connection in cable. · Make sure the antenna is properly connected; replace the antenna or cable if necessary. Unable to tune stations In the seek mode. You are in a weak signal area. · Make sure the tuner is in the OX mode. If the area you are in is a primary signal area, the antenna may not be grounded and connected properly. · Check your antenna connections; make sure the antenna is properly grounded at its mounting location. The antenna may not be the proper length. · Make sure the antenna is fully extended; if broken, replace the antenna with a new one. Broadcast Is noisy. • The antenna is not the proper length. · Extend the antenna fully; replace it if it is broken. • The antenna is poorly grounded. - Make sure the antenna is grounded properly at its mounting location. CD Player/Changer not functioning. • Out of operating temperature range +50°C (+120°F) for CD. - Allow the vehicle's interior (or trunk) temperature to cool. CD playback sound is wavering. • Moisture condensation in the CD Module. - Allow enough time for the condensation to evaporate (about I hour). 40-EN MP3, WMA or AAC Is not played back. • Writing error occurred. The MP3IWMNAAC format is not compatible. - Make sure the MP3IWMNAAC has been written in a supported format. Refer to "About MP3IWMNAAC" (pages 12-13). then rewrite in the format supported by this device. The sound Is not output from the speakers. • Unit has no output signal of the internal amplifier. - Power IC is switched to "ON" (page 20). iPod does not play and no sound Is output. • The iPod has not been recognized. - Reset this unit and the iPod. Refer to "Initial System Start-Up" (page 7). To reset the iPod, refer to the Owner's Manual of the iPod. Information In Case of Difficulty If you encounter a problem, please tum the power off, then on again. If the unit is still not functioning normally, please review the items in the following checklist. This guide will help you isolate the problem if the unit is at fault. Otherwise, make sure the rest of your system is properly connected or consult your authorized Alpine dealer. No function or display. • Vehicle's ignition is off. · If connected following instructions, the unit will not operate with the vehicle's ignition off. • Improper power lead (Red) and battery lead (Yellow) connections. · Check power lead and battery lead connections. • Blown fuse. • Check the fuse of the unit; replace with the proper value if necessary. • Internal micro-computer malfunctioned due to interference noise etc. • Press the RESET switch with a ballpoint pen or other pointed article. Unable to receive stations. • No antenna or open connection in cable. · Make sure the antenna is properly connected; replace the antenna or cable if necessary. Unable to tune stations In the seek mode. You are in a weak signal area. · Make sure the tuner is in the OX mode. If the area you are in is a primary signal area, the antenna may not be grounded and connected properly. · Check your antenna connections; make sure the antenna is properly grounded at its mounting location. The antenna may not be the proper length. · Make sure the antenna is fully extended; if broken, replace the antenna with a new one. Broadcast Is noisy. • The antenna is not the proper length. · Extend the antenna fully; replace it if it is broken. • The antenna is poorly grounded. - Make sure the antenna is grounded properly at its mounting location. CD Player/Changer not functioning. • Out of operating temperature range +50°C (+120°F) for CD. - Allow the vehicle's interior (or trunk) temperature to cool. CD playback sound is wavering. • Moisture condensation in the CD Module. - Allow enough time for the condensation to evaporate (about I hour). 40-EN MP3, WMA or AAC Is not played back. • Writing error occurred. The MP3IWMNAAC format is not compatible. - Make sure the MP3IWMNAAC has been written in a supported format. Refer to "About MP3IWMNAAC" (pages 12-13). then rewrite in the format supported by this device. The sound Is not output from the speakers. • Unit has no output signal of the internal amplifier. - Power IC is switched to "ON" (page 20). iPod does not play and no sound Is output. • The iPod has not been recognized. - Reset this unit and the iPod. Refer to "Initial System Start-Up" (page 7). To reset the iPod, refer to the Owner's Manual of the iPod.

- Insert a CD. • Although a disc is inserted, "No Disc" is displayed and the unit does not start to play or eject the disc. - Remove the disc by following these steps: Press the ~ button again for at least 2 seconds. If the disc still does not eject, consult your Alpine dealer. Error • Mechanism error. I) Press the ~ bunon and eject the CD. If not ejecting, consult your Alpine dealer. 2) When the error indication remains after ejecting, press the ~ bunon again. If the error indication still does not tum off after pressing the ~ button for a few times, consult your Alpine dealer. • When "Error" is displayed: Ifthe disc cannot be ejected by pressing ~. press the RESET switch (refer 10 page 7) and press ~ again. Ifthe disc still cannot be ejected. consult your Alpine dealer. PROTECT • A copy-protected WMA file was played back. - You can only play back non-copy-protected files. I UNSUPPORTED I • A sampling ratelbit rate not supported by the unit is used. - Use a sampling ratelbit rate that is supported by the unit. Error 02 • A disc is left inside the CD Changer. - Press the eject button to activate the eject function. When the CD Changer finishes the eject function, insert an empty CD magazine into the CD Changer to receive the disc left inside the CD Changer. No Magazine • No magazine is loaded into the CD Changer. - Insert a magazine. No Disc • No indicated disc. - Choose another disc. ANTENNA • The XM or SIRIUS antenna is not connected to the XM or SIRIUS radio module. - Check whether the XM or SIRIUS antenna cable is attached securely to the XM or SIRIUS radio module. UPDATING I • Radio is being updated with latest encryption code. - Wait until encryption code is being updated. Channels 0 and I should function normally. LOADING • XM or SIRIUS signal is too weak at the current location. - Wait until the car reaches a location with a stronger signal. • Radio is acquiring audio or program information. - Wait until the radio has received the information. • The channel currently selected has stopped broadcasting. - Select another channel. High Temperature • Protective circuit is activated due to high temperature. - The indication will disappear when the temperature returns to normal operating range. Error 01 • Malfunction in the CD Changer. - Consult your Alpine dealer. Press the magazine eject bunon and pull out the magazine. Check the indication. Insert the magazine again. If the magazine cannot be pulled out, consult your Alpine dealer. • Magazine ejection not possible. - Press the magazine eject button. Ifthe magazine does not eject, consult your Alpine dealer. I NO SIGNAL I I Acquiring Signal I OFF AIR Acquiring Signal (XM mode) (SIRIUS mode) (XM mode) (SIRIUS mode) 41-EN No Disc • No CD is inserted. - Insert a CD. • Although a disc is inserted, "No Disc" is displayed and the unit does not start to play or eject the disc. - Remove the disc by following these steps: Press the ~ button again for at least 2 seconds. If the disc still does not eject, consult your Alpine dealer. Error • Mechanism error. I) Press the ~ bunon and eject the CD. If not ejecting, consult your Alpine dealer. 2) When the error indication remains after ejecting, press the ~ bunon again. If the error indication still does not tum off after pressing the ~ button for a few times, consult your Alpine dealer. • When "Error" is displayed: Ifthe disc cannot be ejected by pressing ~. press the RESET switch (refer 10 page 7) and press ~ again. Ifthe disc still cannot be ejected. consult your Alpine dealer. PROTECT • A copy-protected WMA file was played back. - You can only play back non-copy-protected files. I UNSUPPORTED I • A sampling ratelbit rate not supported by the unit is used. - Use a sampling ratelbit rate that is supported by the unit. Error 02 • A disc is left inside the CD Changer. - Press the eject button to activate the eject function. When the CD Changer finishes the eject function, insert an empty CD magazine into the CD Changer to receive the disc left inside the CD Changer. No Magazine • No magazine is loaded into the CD Changer. - Insert a magazine. No Disc • No indicated disc. - Choose another disc. ANTENNA • The XM or SIRIUS antenna is not connected to the XM or SIRIUS radio module. - Check whether the XM or SIRIUS antenna cable is attached securely to the XM or SIRIUS radio module. UPDATING I • Radio is being updated with latest encryption code. - Wait until encryption code is being updated. Channels 0 and I should function normally. LOADING • XM or SIRIUS signal is too weak at the current location. - Wait until the car reaches a location with a stronger signal. • Radio is acquiring audio or program information. - Wait until the radio has received the information. • The channel currently selected has stopped broadcasting. - Select another channel. High Temperature • Protective circuit is activated due to high temperature. - The indication will disappear when the temperature returns to normal operating range. Error 01 • Malfunction in the CD Changer. - Consult your Alpine dealer. Press the magazine eject bunon and pull out the magazine. Check the indication. Insert the magazine again. If the magazine cannot be pulled out, consult your Alpine dealer. • Magazine ejection not possible. - Press the magazine eject button. Ifthe magazine does not eject, consult your Alpine dealer. I NO SIGNAL I I Acquiring Signal I OFF AIR Acquiring Signal (XM mode) (SIRIUS mode) (XM mode) (SIRIUS mode) 41-EN

not subscribed to. - The unit will revert back to the previously selected channel. • There is no artist name/feature, song/program title, or additional information associated with the channel at that time. - No action needed. Error • If an error or other problem occurs. - Change channels or consult your Alpine dealer. NoiPod • The iPod is not connected. - Make sure the iPod is correctly connected (refer to "Connections"). Make sure the cable is not bent excessively. NO SONG • There are no songs in the iPod. - Download songs to the iPod and connect to this unit. Error 01 • Communication error - Tum the ignition key off, and then set to ON again. - Check the display by reconnecting between the iPod and this unit, using the iPod cable. Error 02 • Caused by the iPod Software Version not being compatible with this unit. - Update the iPod Software Version to be compatible with this unit. 42-EN I Error I • Abnormal current is run to the USB connector device (an error message may be displayed if the USB device that is not compatible with the unit is connected). USB memory is a malfunction or it is shorted. - Connect another USB memory. IDevice Error I • A USB device that is not supported by the unit is connected. - Connect a USB device that is supported by the unit. No USB Unit • A USB memory is not connected. - Make sure the USB memory device is correctly connected and the cable is not excessively bent. NO FILE • No song (file) is stored in the USB memory. - Connect the USB memory device after storing songs (files). I UNSUPPORTED I • A sampling rate/bit rate not supported by the unit is used. - Use a sampling rate/bit rate that is supported by the unit. PROTECT 1 • A copy-protected WMA file was played back. - You can only play back non-copy-protected files. 1- -----------I • The user has selected a channel number that does not exist or is not subscribed to. - The unit will revert back to the previously selected channel. • There is no artist name/feature, song/program title, or additional information associated with the channel at that time. - No action needed. Error • If an error or other problem occurs. - Change channels or consult your Alpine dealer. NoiPod • The iPod is not connected. - Make sure the iPod is correctly connected (refer to "Connections"). Make sure the cable is not bent excessively. NO SONG • There are no songs in the iPod. - Download songs to the iPod and connect to this unit. Error 01 • Communication error - Tum the ignition key off, and then set to ON again. - Check the display by reconnecting between the iPod and this unit, using the iPod cable. Error 02 • Caused by the iPod Software Version not being compatible with this unit. - Update the iPod Software Version to be compatible with this unit. 42-EN I Error I • Abnormal current is run to the USB connector device (an error message may be displayed if the USB device that is not compatible with the unit is connected). USB memory is a malfunction or it is shorted. - Connect another USB memory. IDevice Error I • A USB device that is not supported by the unit is connected. - Connect a USB device that is supported by the unit. No USB Unit • A USB memory is not connected. - Make sure the USB memory device is correctly connected and the cable is not excessively bent. NO FILE • No song (file) is stored in the USB memory. - Connect the USB memory device after storing songs (files). I UNSUPPORTED I • A sampling ratelbit rate not supported by the unit is used. - Use a sampling ratelbit rate that is supported by the unit. PROTECT 1 • A copy-protected WMA file was played back. - You can only play back non-copy-protected files.

(11-16 V allowable) Power Output 18 W RMS x 4* *Primary amplifier ratings per CEA-2006 Standard • Power output: measured at 4 Ohms and :S 1% THD+N • SIN: 80 dBA (reference: I W into 4 Ohms) Maximum Pre-Output Voltage 4 V/IO k ohms Bass +14/-14 dB at 100 Hz Treble ±14 dB at 10 kHz Weight 1.6 kg (3 1bs. 8 oz) 178 mm (7") 50 mm (2") 160 mm (6-1/4") CHASSIS SIZE Width Height Depth 530-1,710 kHz 22.5 IlV127 dB 87.7-107.9 MHz 9.3 dBf (0.8 IlV175 ohms) 13.5 dBf(1.3IlV175 ohms) 80dB 65 dB 35 dB 2.0 dB Tuning Range Sensitivity (IEC Standard) Tuning Range Mono Usable Sensitivity 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity Alternate Channel Selectivity Signal-to-Noise Ratio Stereo Separation Capture Ratio CD PLAYER SECTION AM TUNER SECTION FM TUNER SECTION • Due to continuous product improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice. Frequency Response Wow & Hutter (% WRMS) Total Harmonic Distortion Dynamic Range Signal-to-Noise Ratio Channel Separation 5-20,000 Hz (±I dB) Below measurable limits 0.008% (at 1 kHz) 95 dB (at I kHz) 105 dB 85 dB (at I kHz) NOSEPIECE SIZE Width Height Depth 170 mm (6-3/4") 46 mm (1-13/16") 24 mm (15/16") USB SECTION USB requirements USB 1.112.0 Max. Power Consumption 500 rnA USB Class Mass Storage File System FAT 12/16/32 MP3 Decoding MPEG-1/2 AUDIO Layer-3 WMA Decoding Windows Media™ Audio AAC Decoding AAC-LC format ".m4a" file Number of Channels 2-Channel (Stereo) Frequency Response* 5-20,000 Hz (±I dB) Total Harmonic Distortion 0.008% (at I kHz) Dynamic Range 95 dB (at I kHz) Signal-to-Noise Ratio 105 dB Channel Separation 85 dB (at I kHz) * Frequency response may differ depending on the encoder softwarelbit rate. PICKUP Wave length Laser power 795 nm CLASS 1 REMOTE CONTROL Battery Type Width Height Depth Weight AAA batteries (2 pes.) 42 mm (1-21/32") 121 mm (4-25/32") 23 mm (29/32") 50 g (1.8 oz) 43-EN Specifications GENERAL Power Requirement 14.4 V DC (11-16 V allowable) Power Output 18 W RMS x 4* *Primary amplifier ratings per CEA-2006 Standard • Power output: measured at 4 Ohms and :S 1% THD+N • SIN: 80 dBA (reference: I W into 4 Ohms) Maximum Pre-Output Voltage 4 V/IO k ohms Bass +14/-14 dB at 100 Hz Treble ±14 dB at 10 kHz Weight 1.6 kg (3 1bs. 8 oz) 178 mm (7") 50 mm (2") 160 mm (6-1/4") CHASSIS SIZE Width Height Depth 530-1,710 kHz 22.5 IlV127 dB 87.7-107.9 MHz 9.3 dBf (0.8 IlV175 ohms) 13.5 dBf(1.3IlV175 ohms) 80dB 65 dB 35 dB 2.0 dB Tuning Range Sensitivity (IEC Standard) Tuning Range Mono Usable Sensitivity 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity Alternate Channel Selectivity Signal-to-Noise Ratio Stereo Separation Capture Ratio CD PLAYER SECTION AM TUNER SECTION FM TUNER SECTION • Due to continuous product improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice. Frequency Response Wow & Hutter (% WRMS) Total Harmonic Distortion Dynamic Range Signal-to-Noise Ratio Channel Separation 5-20,000 Hz (±I dB) Below measurable limits 0.008% (at 1 kHz) 95 dB (at I kHz) 105 dB 85 dB (at I kHz) NOSEPIECE SIZE Width Height Depth 170 mm (6-3/4") 46 mm (1-13/16") 24 mm (15/16") USB SECTION USB requirements USB 1.112.0 Max. Power Consumption 500 rnA USB Class Mass Storage File System FAT 12/16/32 MP3 Decoding MPEG-1/2 AUDIO Layer-3 WMA Decoding Windows Media™ Audio AAC Decoding AAC-LC format ".m4a" file Number of Channels 2-Channel (Stereo) Frequency Response* 5-20,000 Hz (±I dB) Total Harmonic Distortion 0.008% (at I kHz) Dynamic Range 95 dB (at I kHz) Signal-to-Noise Ratio 105 dB Channel Separation 85 dB (at I kHz) * Frequency response may differ depending on the encoder softwarelbit rate. PICKUP Wave length Laser power 795 nm CLASS 1 REMOTE CONTROL Battery Type Width Height Depth Weight AAA batteries (2 pes.) 42 mm (1-21/32") 121 mm (4-25/32") 23 mm (29/32") 50 g (1.8 oz) 43-EN

Before installing or connecting the unit, please read the following and pages 4 to 6 of this manual thoroughly for proper use. LtWarning MAKE THE CORRECT CONNECTIONS. Failure to make the proper connections may result in fire or product damage. USE ONLY IN CARS WITH A12 VOLT NEGATIVE GROUND. (Check with your dealer if you are not sure.) Failure to do so may result in fire, etc. BEFORE WIRING, DISCONNECT THE CABLE FROM THE NEGATIVE BATIERY TERMINAL. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or injury due to electrical shorts. DO NOT SPLICE INTO ELECTRICAL CABLES. Never cut away cable insulation to supply power to other equipment. Doing so will exceed the current carrying capacity of the wire and result in fire or electric shock. DO NOT DAMAGE PIPE OR WIRING WHEN DRILLING HOLES. When drilling holes in the chassis for installation, take precautions so as not to contact, damage or obstruct pipes, fueliines, tanks or electrical wiring. Failure to take such precautions may result in fire. DO NOT USE BOLTS OR NUTS IN THE BRAKE OR STEERING SYSTEMS TO MAKE GROUND CONNECTIONS. Bolts or nuts used for the brake or steering systems (or any other safety-related system), or tanks should NEVER be used for installations or ground connections. Using such parts could disable control of the vehicle and cause fire etc. KEEP SMALL OBJECTS SUCH AS BATIERIES OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN. Swallowing them may result in serious injury. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately. DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WHICH MIGHT HINDER VEHICLE OPERATION, SUCH AS THE STEERING WHEEL OR GEARSHIFT. Doing so may obstruct forward vision or hamper movement etc. and results in serious accident. DO NOT ALLOW CABLES TO BECOME ENTANGLED IN SURROUNDING OBJECTS. Arrange wiring and cables in compliance with the manual to prevent obstructions when driving. Cables or wiring that obstruct or hang up on places such as the steering wheel, gear lever, brake pedals, etc. can be extremely hazardous. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of your unit in the space provided below and keep it as a permanent record. The serial number or the engraved serial number is located on the bottom of the unit. 44-EN LtCaution HAVE THE WIRING AND INSTALLATION DONE BY EXPERTS. The wiring and installation of this unit requires special technical skill and experience. To ensure safety, always contact the dealer where you purchased this product to have the work done. USE SPECIFIED ACCESSORY PARTS AND INSTALL THEM SECURELY. Be sure to use only the specified accessory parts. Use of other than designated parts may damage this unit internally or may not securely install the unit in place. This may cause parts to become loose resulting in hazards or product failure. ARRANGE THE WIRING SO IT IS NOT CRIMPED OR PINCHED BY ASHARP METAL EDGE. Route the cables and wiring away from moving parts (like the seat rails) or sharp or pointed edges. This will prevent crimping and damage to the wiring. If wiring passes through a hole in metal, use a rubber grommet to prevent the wire's insulation from being cut by the metal edge of the hole. DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WITH HIGH MOISTURE OR DUST. Avoid installing the unit in locations with high incidence of moisture or dust. Moisture or dust that penetrates into this unit may result in product failure. Precautions • Be sure to disconnect the cable from the (-) battery post before installing your CDA-9886. This will reduce any chance of damage to the unit in case of a short-circuit. • Be sure to connect the color coded leads according to the diagram. Incorrect connections may cause the unit to malfunction or damage to the vehicle's electrical system. • When making connections to the vehicle's electrical system, be aware of the factory installed components (e.g. on-board computer). Do not tap into these leads to provide power for this unit. When connecting the CDA-9886 to the fuse box, make sure the fuse for the intended circuit of the CDA-9886 has the appropriate amperage. Failure to do so may result in damage to the unit and/or the vehicle. When in doubt, consult your Alpine dealer. • The CDA-9886 uses female RCA-type jacks for connection to other units (e.g. amplifier) having RCA connectors. You may need an adaptor to connect other units. If so, please contact your authorized Alpine dealer for assistance. • Be sure to connect the speaker (-) leads to the speaker (-) terminal. Never connect left and right channel speaker cables to each other or to the vehicle body. SERIAL NUMBER: _ INSTALLATION DATE: _ INSTALLATION TECHNICIAN: _ PLACE OF PURCHASE: _ Installation and Connections Before installing or connecting the unit, please read the following and pages 4 to 6 of this manual thoroughly for proper use. LtWarning MAKE THE CORRECT CONNECTIONS. Failure to make the proper connections may result in fire or product damage. USE ONLY IN CARS WITH A12 VOLT NEGATIVE GROUND. (Check with your dealer if you are not sure.) Failure to do so may result in fire, etc. BEFORE WIRING, DISCONNECT THE CABLE FROM THE NEGATIVE BATIERY TERMINAL. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or injury due to electrical shorts. DO NOT SPLICE INTO ELECTRICAL CABLES. Never cut away cable insulation to supply power to other equipment. Doing so will exceed the current carrying capacity of the wire and result in fire or electric shock. DO NOT DAMAGE PIPE OR WIRING WHEN DRILLING HOLES. When drilling holes in the chassis for installation, take precautions so as not to contact, damage or obstruct pipes, fueliines, tanks or electrical wiring. Failure to take such precautions may result in fire. DO NOT USE BOLTS OR NUTS IN THE BRAKE OR STEERING SYSTEMS TO MAKE GROUND CONNECTIONS. Bolts or nuts used for the brake or steering systems (or any other safety-related system), or tanks should NEVER be used for installations or ground connections. Using such parts could disable control of the vehicle and cause fire etc. KEEP SMALL OBJECTS SUCH AS BATIERIES OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN. Swallowing them may result in serious injury. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately. DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WHICH MIGHT HINDER VEHICLE OPERATION, SUCH AS THE STEERING WHEEL OR GEARSHIFT. Doing so may obstruct forward vision or hamper movement etc. and results in serious accident. DO NOT ALLOW CABLES TO BECOME ENTANGLED IN SURROUNDING OBJECTS. Arrange wiring and cables in compliance with the manual to prevent obstructions when driving. Cables or wiring that obstruct or hang up on places such as the steering wheel, gear lever, brake pedals, etc. can be extremely hazardous. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of your unit in the space provided below and keep it as a permanent record. The serial number or the engraved serial number is located on the bottom of the unit. 44-EN LtCaution HAVE THE WIRING AND INSTALLATION DONE BY EXPERTS. The wiring and installation of this unit requires special technical skill and experience. To ensure safety, always contact the dealer where you purchased this product to have the work done. USE SPECIFIED ACCESSORY PARTS AND INSTALL THEM SECURELY. Be sure to use only the specified accessory parts. Use of other than designated parts may damage this unit internally or may not securely install the unit in place. This may cause parts to become loose resulting in hazards or product failure. ARRANGE THE WIRING SO IT IS NOT CRIMPED OR PINCHED BY ASHARP METAL EDGE. Route the cables and wiring away from moving parts (like the seat rails) or sharp or pointed edges. This will prevent crimping and damage to the wiring. If wiring passes through a hole in metal, use a rubber grommet to prevent the wire's insulation from being cut by the metal edge of the hole. DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WITH HIGH MOISTURE OR DUST. Avoid installing the unit in locations with high incidence of moisture or dust. Moisture or dust that penetrates into this unit may result in product failure. Precautions • Be sure to disconnect the cable from the (-) battery post before installing your CDA-9886. This will reduce any chance of damage to the unit in case of a short-circuit. • Be sure to connect the color coded leads according to the diagram. Incorrect connections may cause the unit to malfunction or damage to the vehicle's electrical system. • When making connections to the vehicle's electrical system, be aware of the factory installed components (e.g. on-board computer). Do not tap into these leads to provide power for this unit. When connecting the CDA-9886 to the fuse box, make sure the fuse for the intended circuit of the CDA-9886 has the appropriate amperage. Failure to do so may result in damage to the unit and/or the vehicle. When in doubt, consult your Alpine dealer. • The CDA-9886 uses female RCA-type jacks for connection to other units (e.g. amplifier) having RCA connectors. You may need an adaptor to connect other units. If so, please contact your authorized Alpine dealer for assistance. • Be sure to connect the speaker (-) leads to the speaker (-) terminal. Never connect left and right channel speaker cables to each other or to the vehicle body. SERIAL NUMBER: _ INSTALLATION DATE: _ INSTALLATION TECHNICIAN: _ PLACE OF PURCHASE: _

Screw Air ventilation hole Metal Mounting Strap Ground Lead Slide the CDA-9886 into the dashboard until it clicks. This ensures that the unit Is properly locked and will not accidentally come out from the dashboard. Removal 1. Remove the detachable front panel. 2. Insert the bracket keys into the unit, along the guides on either side. The unit can now be removed from the mounting sleeve. 3 ~D _::~Mr·R Front Frame This unit ~. . ~ Bracket keys ~' ~ (Included) ~ 3. Pull the unit out, keeping it unlocked as you do so. Chassis Reinforce the head unit with the metal mounting strap (not supplied). Secure the ground lead of the unit to a clean metal spot using a screw (*1) already attached to the vehicle's chassis. • For the screw marked ",.2 ", use an appropriate screw for the chosen mounting location. Connect each input lead coming from an amplifier or equalizer to the corresponding output lead coming from the left rear of the CDA·9886. Connect all other leads of the CDA-9886 according to details described in the CONNECTIONS section. Dashboard This unit Mounting Sleeve (InclUded) Lou,",,"" ;-;~ 1 a: .....J--- Pressure Plates· Caution When you install this unit in your car, do not remove the detachable front panel. . If the detachable front panel is removed during installation, you might press too hard and warp the metal plate that holds it in place. Caution Do not block the unit's fan or heat sink, thus preventing air circulation. Ifblocked, heat will accumulate inside the unit and may cause afire. • The main unit must be mounted within 35 degrees ofthe horizontal plane, back to front. 1 • Ifthe installed mounting sleeve is loose in the dashboani, the pressure plates may be bent slightly to remedy the problem. This unit Remove the mounting sleeve from the main unit (see "Removal" on page 45). Scraws (M5 x 8) (Included) • Secure the ground lead ofthe unit to a clean metal spot using a screw (,.3) already attached to the vehicle's chassis. 45-EN Installation 2 Hex Nut (M5) Screw Air ventilation hole Metal Mounting Strap Ground Lead Slide the CDA-9886 into the dashboard until it clicks. This ensures that the unit Is properly locked and will not accidentally come out from the dashboard. Removal 1. Remove the detachable front panel. 2. Insert the bracket keys into the unit, along the guides on either side. The unit can now be removed from the mounting sleeve. 3 ~D _::~Mr·R Front Frame This unit ~. . ~ Bracket keys ~' ~ (Included) ~ 3. Pull the unit out, keeping it unlocked as you do so. Chassis Reinforce the head unit with the metal mounting strap (not supplied). Secure the ground lead of the unit to a clean metal spot using a screw (*1) already attached to the vehicle's chassis. • For the screw marked ",.2 ", use an appropriate screw for the chosen mounting location. Connect each input lead coming from an amplifier or equalizer to the corresponding output lead coming from the left rear of the CDA·9886. Connect all other leads of the CDA-9886 according to details described in the CONNECTIONS section. Dashboard This unit Mounting Sleeve (InclUded) Lou,",,"" ;-;~ 1 a: .....J--- Pressure Plates· Caution When you install this unit in your car, do not remove the detachable front panel. . If the detachable front panel is removed during installation, you might press too hard and warp the metal plate that holds it in place. Caution Do not block the unit's fan or heat sink, thus preventing air circulation. Ifblocked, heat will accumulate inside the unit and may cause afire. • The main unit must be mounted within 35 degrees ofthe horizontal plane, back to front. 1 • Ifthe installed mounting sleeve is loose in the dashboani, the pressure plates may be bent slightly to remedy the problem. This unit Remove the mounting sleeve from the main unit (see "Removal" on page 45). Scraws (M5 x 8) (Included) • Secure the ground lead ofthe unit to a clean metal spot using a screw (,.3) already attached to the vehicle's chassis. 45-EN

Connect USB memory Connect USB memory to USB cable. This unit USB memory IP b USB"._ {.... H ..~""I l~~Q~~-~-mcS Cable (sold separately) Remove USB memory Pull out USB memory squarely from the USB cable. This unit USB memory J.. USB connector (sold separately) I~!~ ~~. ~ ~"- Cable (sold separately) • When removing USB memory. pull it out straight. • Ifsound is not output or USB memory is nor recognized even when USB memory is connected. remove USB memory once. then connect it again. • Change to a source other than the USB memory mode. then remove the USB memory. Ifthe USB memory is removed in the USB memory mode. data may be damaged. • Route the USB cable awayfrom another cables. etc. 46-EN USB memory Connection (sold separately) Connect USB memory Connect USB memory to USB cable. This unit USB memory IP b USB"._ {.... H ..~""I l~~Q~~-~-mcS Cable (sold separately) Remove USB memory Pull out USB memory squarely from the USB cable. This unit USB memory J.. USB connector (sold separately) I~!~ ~~. ~ ~"- Cable (sold separately) • When removing USB memory. pull it out straight. • Ifsound is not output or USB memory is nor recognized even when USB memory is connected. remove USB memory once. then connect it again. • Change to a source other than the USB memory mode. then remove the USB memory. Ifthe USB memory is removed in the USB memory mode. data may be damaged. • Route the USB cable awayfrom another cables. etc. 46-EN

rAntenna =----- Blue rl--:PO=W':l'E'l;R-:A~Ni'l"T-"1 ~ Blue/WMe I REMOTE TURNOON I PinkIBlack I AUDIO INTERRUPT IN I c>-- To power antenna ____ To amplifier or equalizer ____ To vehicle phone Orange I Red I Yellow I Black I ILLUMINATION I ~ IGNITION I ® BATIERY I (J) GND I ® @ "S1 ---- To the instrument cluster illumination lead ---0'0------__ Ignition Key Front left Rear left Rear right ~ speakers EEl Front right e Whrte EEl EEl , ~1_------------@cQDJDI:::IDI------I (So~~s~~:r;;t~ly) ISpeakers I ~ Rear Left Amplifier e ___________ : Rear Right I ~ e Front Left Amplifier EBie Front Right I Amplmw ~ '.""""f'B Gray @ ~-----------------,,-': i JI1SPEAKER IEBi '<:!!OP------" : : : IIRIGHT FRONT I ® r--. ----- , , ' , GraylBlack e I I \ I I r++--1I-+-\.~_· ~ ---, : , : : , Viol9VBlack@ I I I' I \.'----------------~ • The label is attached on the bottom ofthe unit. 47-EN Connections @ @ ,-----------------a:=n:::Jn 8lIJJ~-----4To IPod rAntenna =----- Blue rl--:PO=W':l'E'l;R-:A~Ni'l"T-"1 ~ Blue/WMe I REMOTE TURNOON I PinkIBlack I AUDIO INTERRUPT IN I c>-- To power antenna ____ To amplifier or equalizer ____ To vehicle phone Orange I Red I Yellow I Black I ILLUMINATION I ~ IGNITION I ® BATIERY I (J) GND I ® @ "S1 ---- To the instrument cluster illumination lead ---0'0------__ Ignition Key Front left Rear left Rear right ~ speakers EEl Front right e Whrte EEl EEl , ~1_------------@cQDJDI:::IDI------I (So~~s~~:r;;t~ly) ISpeakers I ~ Rear Left Amplifier e ___________ : Rear Right I ~ e Front Left Amplifier EBie Front Right I Amplmw ~ '.""""f'B Gray @ ~-----------------,,-': i JI1SPEAKER IEBi '<:!!OP------" : : : IIRIGHT FRONT I ® r--. ----- , , ' , GraylBlack e I I \ I I r++--1I-+-\.~_· ~ ---, : , : : , Viol9VBlack@ I I I' I \.'----------------~ • The label is attached on the bottom ofthe unit. 47-EN

Connect this lead to the +B terminal of your power antenna, if applicable. o This lead should be used only for controlling the vehicle's power antenna. Do not use this lead to tum on an amplifier, or a signal processor, etc. @ Remote Turn-On Lead (BluelWhlte) Connect this lead to the remote turn-on lead of your amplifier or signal processor. When an Imprint Box PXA-H100 (sold separately) is connected, use the Remote Turn-on Lead of PXA-H100 to connect to your amplifier or signal processor. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual of PXA-H100. @ Audio Interrupt In Lead (Pink/Black) Connect this lead to the Audio interface output of a cellular phone which provides ground shorting when a call is received. @) illumination Lead (Orange) This lead may be connected to the vehicle's instrument cluster illumination lead. This will allow the backlighting of the CDA-9886 to dim whenever the vehicle's lights are turned on. ® Switched Power Lead (Ignition) (Red) Connect this lead to an open terminal on the vehicle's fuse box or another unused power source which provides (+)12V only when the ignition is turned on or in the accessory position. (j) Battery Lead (Yellow) Connect this lead to the positive (+) post of the vehicle's battery. @ Ground Lead (Black) Connect this lead to a good chassis ground on the vehicle. Make sure the connection is made to bare metal and is securely fastened using the sheet metal screw provided. ® Power Supply Connector @ Right Front (+) Speaker Output Lead (Gray) @ Right Front (-) Speaker Output Lead (GraylBlack) @ Right Rear (-) Speaker Output Lead (VloletIBlack) @ Right Rear (+) Speaker Output Lead (Violet) @ Left Rear (+) Speaker Output Lead (Green) @ Left Rear (-) Speaker Output Lead (GreenlBlack) @ Left Front (-) Speaker Output Lead (White/Black) @ Left Front (+) Speaker Output Lead (White) @ Fuse Holder (10A) @ AI-NET Connector Connect this to the output or input connector of another device (CD Changer, Imprint Box, Equalizer, HD Radio TUNER MODULE, etc.) equipped with Ai-NET. o Interface adapterfor iPoJ» (KCA-420i) is not recommendedfor use with this product. o You can input 7V/video sound by connecting an optional Ai-NET/ RCA Interface cable (KCA·12IB) to this component. ® Steering Remote Control Interface Connector To steering Remote control interface box. @ Rear Outputllnput RCA Connectors It can be used as Rear Output or Input RCA Connectors. RED is right and WHITE is left. @ Front Outputllnput RCA Connectors It can be used as Front Output or Input RCA Connectors. RED is right and WHITE is left. @ Subwoofer RCA Connectors RED is right and WHITE is left. @ AI-NET Cable (Included with CD Changer) @ RCA Extension Cable (sold separately) @ IPod Direct Connector Control iPod signals. Connect this to an iPod or to an optional Bluetooth Box. To use a hands-free mobile phone, an optional Bluetooth Box connection is required. For details on connection, refer to the Owner's Manual of the Bluetooth Box. You can also connect this to an external device (such as a portable player) by using iPed DirecVRCA Interface cable (sold separately). • Refer to "Setting the AUX+Setup Mode" (page 20). AUX+ ON : When the external device is connected. AUX+ OFF: When an iPod is connected. ® FULL SPEEDTM Connection Cable (KCE-4221) (sold separately) @ System Switch When connecting a processor or divider using Ai-NET. place the three swithes in the EXT AP position. When no device is connected, leave the switch in the NORM position. o Do not make the three switches to different settings. o Be sure to turn the power offto the unit before changing the switch position. ®l USB Connector Connect USB cable. To prevent external noise from entering the audio system. o Locate the unit and route the leads at least 10 cm away from the car harness. • Keep the banery power leads as far away from other leads as possible. • Connect the ground lead securely to a bare metal spot (remove any paint. dirt or grease if necessary) of the car chassis. o If you add an optional noise suppressor, connect it as far away from the unit as possible. Your Alpine dealer carries various noise suppressors, contact them for further information. • Your Alpine dealer knows best about noise prevention measures so consult your dealer for further information. 48-EN CD Antenna Receptacle ® Power Antenna Lead (Blue) Connect this lead to the +B terminal of your power antenna, if applicable. o This lead should be used only for controlling the vehicle's power antenna. Do not use this lead to tum on an amplifier, or a signal processor, etc. @ Remote Turn-On Lead (BluelWhlte) Connect this lead to the remote turn-on lead of your amplifier or signal processor. When an Imprint Box PXA-H100 (sold separately) is connected, use the Remote Turn-on Lead of PXA-H100 to connect to your amplifier or signal processor. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual of PXA-H100. @ Audio Interrupt In Lead (Pink/Black) Connect this lead to the Audio interface output of a cellular phone which provides ground shorting when a call is received. @) illumination Lead (Orange) This lead may be connected to the vehicle's instrument cluster illumination lead. This will allow the backlighting of the CDA-9886 to dim whenever the vehicle's lights are turned on. ® Switched Power Lead (Ignition) (Red) Connect this lead to an open terminal on the vehicle's fuse box or another unused power source which provides (+)12V only when the ignition is turned on or in the accessory position. (j) Battery Lead (Yellow) Connect this lead to the positive (+) post of the vehicle's battery. @ Ground Lead (Black) Connect this lead to a good chassis ground on the vehicle. Make sure the connection is made to bare metal and is securely fastened using the sheet metal screw provided. ® Power Supply Connector @ Right Front (+) Speaker Output Lead (Gray) @ Right Front (-) Speaker Output Lead (GraylBlack) @ Right Rear (-) Speaker Output Lead (VloletIBlack) @ Right Rear (+) Speaker Output Lead (Violet) @ Left Rear (+) Speaker Output Lead (Green) @ Left Rear (-) Speaker Output Lead (GreenlBlack) @ Left Front (-) Speaker Output Lead (White/Black) @ Left Front (+) Speaker Output Lead (White) @ Fuse Holder (10A) @ AI-NET Connector Connect this to the output or input connector of another device (CD Changer, Imprint Box, Equalizer, HD Radio TUNER MODULE, etc.) equipped with Ai-NET. o Interface adapterfor iPofi'» (KCA-420i) is not recommendedfor use with this product. o You can input 7V/video sound by connecting an optional Ai-NET/ RCA Interface cable (KCA·12IB) to this component. ® Steering Remote Control Interface Connector To steering Remote control interface box. @ Rear Outputllnput RCA Connectors It can be used as Rear Output or Input RCA Connectors. RED is right and WHITE is left. @ Front Outputllnput RCA Connectors It can be used as Front Output or Input RCA Connectors. RED is right and WHITE is left. @ Subwoofer RCA Connectors RED is right and WHITE is left. @ AI-NET Cable (Included with CD Changer) @ RCA Extension Cable (sold separately) @ IPod Direct Connector Control iPod signals. Connect this to an iPod or to an optional Bluetooth Box. To use a hands-free mobile phone, an optional Bluetooth Box connection is required. For details on connection, refer to the Owner's Manual of the Bluetooth Box. You can also connect this to an external device (such as a portable player) by using iPed DirecVRCA Interface cable (sold separately). • Refer to "Setting the AUX+Setup Mode" (page 20). AUX+ ON : When the external device is connected. AUX+ OFF: When an iPod is connected. ® FULL SPEEDTM Connection Cable (KCE-4221) (sold separately) @ System Switch When connecting a processor or divider using Ai-NET. place the three swithes in the EXT AP position. When no device is connected, leave the switch in the NORM position. o Do not make the three switches to different settings. o Be sure to turn the power offto the unit before changing the switch position. ®l USB Connector Connect USB cable. To prevent external noise from entering the audio system. o Locate the unit and route the leads at least 10 cm away from the car harness. • Keep the banery power leads as far away from other leads as possible. • Connect the ground lead securely to a bare metal spot (remove any paint. dirt or grease if necessary) of the car chassis. o If you add an optional noise suppressor, connect it as far away from the unit as possible. Your Alpine dealer carries various noise suppressors, contact them for further information. • Your Alpine dealer knows best about noise prevention measures so consult your dealer for further information. 48-EN

are pleased to offer this Warranty. We suggest that you read it thoroughly. Should you have any questions, please contact your Dealer or contact Alpine at one of the telephone numbers listed below. • PRODUCTS COVERED: This Warranty covers Car Audio Products and Related Accessories ("the product"). Products purchased in the Canada are covered only in the Canada. Products purchased in the U.S.A. are covered only in the U.S.A. @ You must supply proof of your purchase of the product. @ You must package the product securely to avoid damage during shipment. To prevent lost packages it is recommended to use a carrier that provides a tracking service. Or visit our website at; http://www.alpine-usa.com • HOW TO CONTACT CUSTOMER SERVICE: Should the product require service, please call the following number for your nearest Authorized Alpine Service Center. • IN CANADA ONLY: This Warranty is not valid unless your Alpine car audio product has been installed in your vehicle by an Authorized Installation Center, and this warranty stamped upon installation by the installation center. • HOW WE LIMIT IMPLIED WARRANTIES: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING FITNESS FOR USE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE PERIOD OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE AND NO PERSON IS AUTHORIZED TO ASSUME FOR ALPINE ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OF THE PRODUCT. • HOW WE EXCLUDE CERTAIN DAMAGES: ALPINE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE PRODUCT. THE TERM "INCIDENTAL DAMAGES" REFERS TO EXPENSES OF TRANSPORTING THE PRODUCT TO THE ALPINE SERVICE CENTER, LOSS OF THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER'S TIME, LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, BUS FARES, CAR RENTALS OR OTHERS COSTS RELATING TO THE CARE AND CUSTODY OF THE PRODUCT. THE TERM "CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES" REFERS TO THE COST OF REPAIRING OR REPLACING OTHER PROPERTY WHICH IS DAMAGED WHEN THIS PRODUCT DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY. THE REMEDIES PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS. • HOW STATE/PROVINCIAL LAW RELATES TO THE WARRANTY: This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state and province to province. In addition, some states/provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, and some do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. Accordingly, limitations as to these matters contained herein may not apply to you. 1-SOO-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) 1·888-NAV·HELP (1-888-628-4357) CAR AUDIO NAVIGATION • HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE: CD You are responsible for delivery of the product to an Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine for repair and for payment of any initial shipping charges. Alpine will, at its option, repair or replace the product with a new or reconditioned product without charge. If the repairs are covered by the warranty, and if the product was shipped to an Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine, Alpine will pay the return shipping charges. @ You should provide a detailed description of the problem(s) for which service is required. • WHAT IS COVERED: This Warranty covers defects in materials or workmanship (parts and labor) in the product. • WHAT IS NOT COVERED: This Warranty does not cover the following: CD Damage occurring during shipment of the product to Alpine for repair (claims must be presented to the carrier). ® Damage caused by accident or abuse, including burned voice coils caused by over-driving the speaker (amplifier level is turned up and driven into distortion or clipping). Speaker mechanical failure (e.g. punctures, tears or rips). Cracked or damaged LCD panels. Dropped or damaged hard drives. @ Damage caused by negligence, misuse, improper operation or failure to follow instructions contained in the Owner's manual. @ Damage caused by act of God, including without limitation, earthquake, fire, flood, storms or other acts of nature. Any cost or expense related to the removal or reinstallation of the product. ® Service performed by an unauthorized person, company or association. ® Any product which has the serial number defaced, altered or removed. (j) Any product which has been adjusted, altered or modified without Alpine's consent. ® Any product not distributed by Alpine within the United States, Puerto Rico or Canada. ® Any product not purchased from an Authorized Alpine Dealer. • WHO IS COVERED: This Warranty only covers the original purchaser of the product, who must reside in the United States, Puerto Rico or Canada. • LENGTH OF WARRANTY: This Warranty is in effect for one year from the date of the first consumer purchase. ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC., 19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance, California 90501, U.S.A. ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC., 777 Supertest Road, Toronto, Ontario M3J 2M9, Canada Do not send products to these addresses. Call the toll free telephone number or visit the website to locate a service center. /#ff/iLPINE~ LIMITED WARRANTY ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC. AND ALPINE OF CANADA INC. ("Alpine"), are dedicated to quality craftsmanship and are pleased to offer this Warranty. We suggest that you read it thoroughly. Should you have any questions, please contact your Dealer or contact Alpine at one of the telephone numbers listed below. • PRODUCTS COVERED: This Warranty covers Car Audio Products and Related Accessories ("the product"). Products purchased in the Canada are covered only in the Canada. Products purchased in the U.S.A. are covered only in the U.S.A. @ You must supply proof of your purchase of the product. @ You must package the product securely to avoid damage during shipment. To prevent lost packages it is recommended to use a carrier that provides a tracking service. Or visit our website at; http://www.alpine-usa.com • HOW TO CONTACT CUSTOMER SERVICE: Should the product require service, please call the following number for your nearest Authorized Alpine Service Center. • IN CANADA ONLY: This Warranty is not valid unless your Alpine car audio product has been installed in your vehicle by an Authorized Installation Center, and this warranty stamped upon installation by the installation center. • HOW WE LIMIT IMPLIED WARRANTIES: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING FITNESS FOR USE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE PERIOD OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE AND NO PERSON IS AUTHORIZED TO ASSUME FOR ALPINE ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OF THE PRODUCT. • HOW WE EXCLUDE CERTAIN DAMAGES: ALPINE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE PRODUCT. THE TERM "INCIDENTAL DAMAGES" REFERS TO EXPENSES OF TRANSPORTING THE PRODUCT TO THE ALPINE SERVICE CENTER, LOSS OF THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER'S TIME, LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, BUS FARES, CAR RENTALS OR OTHERS COSTS RELATING TO THE CARE AND CUSTODY OF THE PRODUCT. THE TERM "CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES" REFERS TO THE COST OF REPAIRING OR REPLACING OTHER PROPERTY WHICH IS DAMAGED WHEN THIS PRODUCT DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY. THE REMEDIES PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS. • HOW STATE/PROVINCIAL LAW RELATES TO THE WARRANTY: This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state and province to province. In addition, some states/provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, and some do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. Accordingly, limitations as to these matters contained herein may not apply to you. 1-SOO-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) 1·888-NAV·HELP (1-888-628-4357) CAR AUDIO NAVIGATION • HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE: CD You are responsible for delivery of the product to an Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine for repair and for payment of any initial shipping charges. Alpine will, at its option, repair or replace the product with a new or reconditioned product without charge. If the repairs are covered by the warranty, and if the product was shipped to an Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine, Alpine will pay the return shipping charges. @ You should provide a detailed description of the problem(s) for which service is required. • WHAT IS COVERED: This Warranty covers defects in materials or workmanship (parts and labor) in the product. • WHAT IS NOT COVERED: This Warranty does not cover the following: CD Damage occurring during shipment of the product to Alpine for repair (claims must be presented to the carrier). ® Damage caused by accident or abuse, including burned voice coils caused by over-driving the speaker (amplifier level is turned up and driven into distortion or clipping). Speaker mechanical failure (e.g. punctures, tears or rips). Cracked or damaged LCD panels. Dropped or damaged hard drives. @ Damage caused by negligence, misuse, improper operation or failure to follow instructions contained in the Owner's manual. @ Damage caused by act of God, including without limitation, earthquake, fire, flood, storms or other acts of nature. Any cost or expense related to the removal or reinstallation of the product. ® Service performed by an unauthorized person, company or association. ® Any product which has the serial number defaced, altered or removed. (j) Any product which has been adjusted, altered or modified without Alpine's consent. ® Any product not distributed by Alpine within the United States, Puerto Rico or Canada. ® Any product not purchased from an Authorized Alpine Dealer. • WHO IS COVERED: This Warranty only covers the original purchaser of the product, who must reside in the United States, Puerto Rico or Canada. • LENGTH OF WARRANTY: This Warranty is in effect for one year from the date of the first consumer purchase. ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC., 19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance, California 90501, U.S.A. ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC., 777 Supertest Road, Toronto, Ontario M3J 2M9, Canada Do not send products to these addresses. Call the toll free telephone number or visit the website to locate a service center.

DESIGNED BY ALPINE JAPAN FABRIOUE EN CHINE CONCU PAR ALPINE JAPON ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC.

Microsoft®, Windows®, 95/98!Me/NT/20aO/Xp or Apple Mac OS X 10.4. In order to use the CD, Acrobat Reader 4.0 (or above) is required • How to Use the CD Insert the CD, open it, then click twice the file for the model purchased • Caution on Handling the CD Never try to play the CD on any other audio CD player Resultant loud volume may cause hearing damage or damage 10 the speaker • About Use of Software License Concerning provided CD, you are required to use the CD in agreement/complying with the following provisions If you do not agree, the CD cannot be used • Terms of Use Alpine Electronics Incorporation (following Alpine) reserves all copyrights on the information provided on this CD, The contents 01 the CD cannot be used for copying without permission of its owners, Internet transfer, public showing, or commercial rent. lease, etc • Limitation of Liability Alpine does not guarantee correct operation of any computer component when used with the CD, Alpine also has no responsibility, direct or indirect. for damage resulting from use of this CD, and no compensation can be offered, All products and brand names described above are trademarks or registered marks of their respective owners, • Configuration systeme Ce CD peut etre utilise sous les systemes d'exploitation suivants Microsoft®, Windows®, 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP ou Apple Mac as x lOA. Pour pouvoir utiliser Ie CD, vous devez installer Acrobat Reader 4.0 (ou ullerieur) • Comment utiliser Ie CD Inserez Ie CD, ouvrez-Ie, puis c1iquez deux fois sur Ie fichier du modele que vous avez achete • Precautions lors de la manipulation du CD N'essayez pas de lire Ie CD sur un autre lecteur CD Le cas echeant. Ie niveau de volume eleve pourrait endommager Ie haut-parleur ou provoquer des troubles auditifs. • Apropos de I'utilisation de la licence du logiciel Vous devez utiliser Ie CD fourni conformement aux conditions suivanles Si vous n'acceptez pas Ie contrat de licence, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser ce CD. • Conditions d'utilisation Alpine Electronics Incorporation (Alpine) detient tous les droits d'auteur relatifs aux informations fournies dans ce CD Le contenu de ce CD ne peut donc en aucun cas etre copie, divulgue par Internet, utilise pour une projection publique, une location commerciale ou une concession, etc., sans autorisation expresse du proprietaire • Limitation de responsabilite Alpine ne garantit pas Ie bon fonctionnement des composants de rordinateur lorsque vous utilisez ce CD Alpine decline egalement toute responsabilite, directe ou indirecte, en cas de dommage lors de I'utilisation de ce CD, et n'oflre aucune compensation economique. Tous les produits et noms de marque cites ci-dessus sont des marques commerciales ou des marques deposees de leurs detenteurs respectifs.

Block 28-25,Changjiang Nanlu, WND, jiangsu, China Printed in China (Y) 68-09359Z59-A

FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO, 320 TORRANCE CA POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE ATIENTION MARKETING SERVICES ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA INC PO BOX 2859 TORRANCE CA 90509-9939 11,1"11""1,1,11",1,1,,1,1,,1,1,,,,11,1,1,,1,,,11 l' FOR USE IN USA, PLEASE FOLD HERE AND ENSURE THAT AMERICAN ADDRESS FACES UP, 'dn S38'v'.:l SS3~OO'v' N'v'IO'v'N'v'8 1'v'H13~nSN3 ON'v' 3~3H OlO.:l 3S'v'31d ''v'O'v'N'v'8 NI 3Sn ~O.:l 1 1'1'1"'11'1"'1'1"1"1'111"""11'1'1""11"1'11 V81Cl3V1JV .:10 831'17'18 0311Nn 9Lg6-~0~06 '17'8 38NVClCl01 ld A8Cl3V1JVCl8 ~v~6~ 881NOCl18313 3NldlV SllVlS lIl1H1 II" lJDVIIiI J AlMRrll IlVU.... nAVd lSNOdlH/1IVW AldlH SSlNISnalVNOIiVNHUNI OZl: "ON 11133/SIIlI rnIIIJ!I!m..

~ For easy on-line registration, go to ..www.alpine-usa.com/registration.. Thank you for choosing Alpine! Please register your product with us so we can serve you better. (J)m l>r- ~m ::Dm 6. 0 EngineeringlTechnical 7. D Farming/Fishing 8. DRetired 9. DStudent 10. D Other _ .When you purchased this Alpine unit, did you compare it with other brands? 1.0YesJ.. 2.0No. (Brand Name) _ • Which of the following statements best describes you? 1.0 I usually have more electronic equipment than my friends 2.0 I am usually one of the first of my friends to buy the newest electronic equipment 3.0 I usually wait until a product has been out for a while before I purchase it 4.0 I am usually on of the first of my friends to know about the newest car 5.0 I usually know more about cars than my friends • Occupation 1.0 Executive/Managerial 2.0 Secretarial/Clerical 3.0 Sales 4.0 General Labor 5.0 Professional • Household Income 1. 0 Less than $30,000 4.0 $70,000 - $90,000 2.0 $30,000 - $50,000 5.0 $90,000 - $110,000 3. 0 $50,000 - $70,000 6.0 Over $110,000 • Type of vehicle in which this unit is installed. Make: Model: _ Purchased Year: Model Year: _ • How was this vehicle purchased? 1. 0 Bought 2. 0 Leased Year: _ 9. 0 Monitor Controller 10.0 Video Monitor 11 .D Navigation 12. D Mobile Mayday 13.0 Video Tape Player 14.0 Processor/Equalizer 15.0 Security 16.0 Other _ • Product purchased 1.0 Cassette Player 2. 0 CD Player 3.0 MD Player 4. 0 DVD Player 5.0 CD Changer 6.0 Amplifier 7.0 Speaker 8.0 Subwoofer • Model Number: _ • Serial Number: _ • Date of Purchase: Month: _ • If navigation system, which monitor? 1.0 Alpine ~ (Model No.) ------------- 2.0 Other ~ (Brand Name)------------ • Purpose of buying this unit? 1.0 Addition 2.0 Replacement ~ *Previous brand replaced? 1.0 Factory installed 2.0 Alpine 3.0 Other _ • Have you purchased Alpine products before? 1.0 First time 2.0 Two or more times First name: _ Last name: _ Home address: O'St=ree=t-=ad"'dr=es=s------------ City State/Provo Zip Code May we contact you at this address? 1. DYes 2.0 No Phone number: (-----------=:,-----c:=-- May we contact you at this number? 1.0 Yes 2.0 No E-mail Address:-----------;=,------;=.----- May we contact you bye-mail? 1.0 Yes 2.0 No • Gender 1.0 Male 2.0 Female • Date of Birth Month: Year: =---- • Marital Status 1.0 Single 2.0 Married • Which ethnicity best describes yourself: 1. 0 Caucasian 4. D Asian 2.0 Hispanic 5.0 Other _ 3. D African-American • Your highest level of education completed: 1. D High School Student 2. D High School Graduate 3.02 Yr. Degree/Some College ·4.0 Completed 4 Yr. College 5.0 Completed Graduate School wct W ::I: ...J oct W (J) Thank you for your cooperationI We value your privacy. This information will remain confidential with Alpine and its affiliates. Customer Care Registration is for Product registration. Failure to complete and return this card does not diminish your warranty rights. PART NO. 68P04190K01-A